Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Permit D08-363 - SEGMENT 2 - BANK OF AMERICA - BUILDING
D08-363 Bank of America 320 Strander Boulevard Due to the file size, this record has been broken down into 4 segments for easier download. Click on the following links to review the permit segments: Segment 1 - Bank of America — Building D08-363 Segment 2 - Bank of America — Building D08-363 Segment 3 - Bank of America — Building D08-363 Segment 4 - Plans - Bank of America — Building D08-363 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change. 5. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. C. Proposal Request Form: Architect will use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests. 1.4 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of the Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701. 1.5 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES A. Construction Change Directive: Owner may issue an Architect prepared Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714 or other form as acceptable to the Owner. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01250 01250/9-98/bac CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250-2 • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review SECTION 01.290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. (Field) Review: Architect's visits to the site as agreed upon between the Owner and the Architect to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the Work completed and to determine in general if the Work completed is in accordance with the Contract Documents. Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. 1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. General: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with the General Conditions and with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. Submittals Schedule. c. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Owner at earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290-1 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value. Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. a. Break down principal subcontract amounts into separate labor and materials items. Breakdown of subcontractor's schedule of values must be true and accurate. 4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. Include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing if required. 6. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 7. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work -in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 8. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.4 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. General: Refer to General Conditions for requirements applicable to payments. B. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified and paid for by Owner. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290-2 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA • 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. • • C. Payment Application Review: 1. Prior to the 25th day of each month, furnish the Owner with a draft (pencil) copy of the Application for Payment. 2. On the 251 day of each month, the Owner and the Contractor shall meet to review the draft (pencil) copy of the application and Certificate for payment. Questions resulting from this review shall be answered by the Contractor and clarified prior to receipt of the final copy of the Application and Certificate for Payment which is to be submitted to the Owner on the 1st day of the following month. 3. Upon receipt of the fmal Application and Certificate for Payment and other documentation as required by the Owner including the updated Schedule of Values and the updated Construction Schedule, the Owner shall review the documents received to determine if they correspond to the agreements reached during the draft (pencil) copy review. Upon completion of the Owner's review, the Owner shall revise and execute the Applications and Certificate for Payment to correspond to the agreements reached and forward the executed copies to the Contractor. 4. In taking action on the contractor's Application and Certificate for Payment, the Owner will rely on the accuracy and completeness of the information furnished by the contractor and will not be deemed to represent that he has made audits of the supporting data. 5. Payment will not be made for materials and equipment stored off the site, except at the Owner's discretion and prior approval. When the Application and Certificate for Payment includes material or equipment stored off-site, the Application shall be accompanied by a statement certifying: a. Description of the item(s) being stored. b. Location of the bonded warehouse(s) where materials or equipment is being stored. c. Affidavit of Storage. d. Certificate of Insurance. e. Bill of sale made to Owner stating there will be no additional cost for transportation and delivery of the item(s) being stored. f. Statement certifying that item or any part thereof will not be installed in any construction other than work under this Contract. D. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets as form for Applications for Payment. E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Owner will return incomplete appllications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290-3 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA F. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Owner by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. G. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit notarized waivers of mechanic's lien from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested, before deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Waiver Delays: Submit each Application for Payment with Contractor's waiver of mechanic's lien for construction period covered by the application. a. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien. 5. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner. H. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors, principal suppliers and fabricators. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Products list. 5. Schedule of unit prices. 6. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). 7. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 8. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 9. Copies of building permits. 10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 11. Initial progress report. 12. Report of preconstruction conference. 13. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 14. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance coverage(s). 15. Performance and payment bonds. 16. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. I. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290-4 • • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. J. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements, including, but not limited to: a. Transmittal of required Project Record Documents to Owner. b. Evidence of completion of demonstration and training. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for fmal changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims" and AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 5. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 6. Evidence that claims have been settled. 7. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 8. Occupancy permits and similar approvals or certifications by governing authorities and franchised services, assuring Owner's full access and use of completed work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01290 01290/9-98/bac PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290-5 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review SECTION 01310 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Th is Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. If necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-1 Gensler 32.2177.089 1.3 SUBMITTALS April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. 1. Indicate relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings. 2. Indicate required installation sequences. B. Staff Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of principal staff assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 1. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL A. General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory personnel as required for proper performance of the Work. Refer to General Conditions for additional requirements. 1.5 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Record minutes in writing. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within 3 days of the meeting. 4. Notification: Inform participants 3 days prior to meetings not regularly scheduled. B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers, testing laboratory representatives; regulatory, fmancial personnel, and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-2 • • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Requirements in individual Specification Sections for preconstruction responsibilities. b. Tentative construction schedule. c. Project coordination d. Critical work sequencing. e. Designation of responsible personnel. f. Procedures for processing Requests for Information (RFI's.) g. Procedures for processing Bulletins. h. Procedures for processing submittals. i. Procedures for processing substitutions. j. Procedures for processing field decisions, proposal requests and Change Orders. k. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. 1. Distribution of the Contract Documents. m. Submittal procedures. n. Preparation of Record Documents. o. Use of the premises. p. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. q. Parking availability. r. Office, work, and storage areas. s. Equipment deliveries and priorities. t. First aid. u. Security. v. Progress cleaning. w. Working hours. C. Preinstallation Conferences and Meetings: Conduct a preinstallation conference, or meeting, at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. Contract Documents. b. Related Change Orders. c. Purchases. d. Deliveries. e. Submittals. f. Review of mockups. g. Possible conflicts. h. Compatibility problems. i. Time schedules. j. Weather limitations. k. Manufacturer's written recommendations. 1. Warranty requirements. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-3 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review m. Compatibility of materials. n. Acceptability of substrates. o. Temporary facilities and controls. p. Space and access limitations. q. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. r. Testing and inspecting requirements. s. Required performance results. t. Protection of construction and personnel. 3. Record minutes of each meeting. Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. Schedule and administer special meetings as required. 1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours. 10) Hazards and risks. 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Change Orders. 14) Documentation of information for payment requests. 15) Testing and inspection requirements. 16) Status of Request for Information. 17) Other business relating to the Work. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-4 • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 3. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since the previous meeting and report. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. E. Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings at weekly intervals. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings and preinstallation conferences. 1. Attendees: Every entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions • are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. b. Schedule Updating: Revise Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule after each coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting. c. Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours. 10) Hazards and risks. 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Change Orders. 3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-5 Gensler 32.2177.089 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01310 01310/9-98/bac April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-6 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review SECTION 01320 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals Schedule: Submit three printed copies of schedule. B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit, for the Owner's and Architect's information, three printed copies of schedule, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period. C. Digital Images: Submit a complete set of digital image electronic files as specified herein. Identify electronic media with date photographs were taken. Submit images that have the same aspect ratio as the sensor, uncropped. D. Field Condition Reports: Submit two copies at time of discovery of differing conditions. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. C. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with Owner's Construction Schedule for Owner's own forces. Contractor shall make any revision to the Construction Schedule after a joint review and mutual agreement. The Construction Schedule shall then constitute the Schedule to be used by Contractor, separate contractors and Owner until subsequently revised. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-1 Gensler 32.2177.089 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Preparation: Submit, for Architect's approval, concurrently with the Contractor's Construction Schedule a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Refer to General Conditions `Contractor's Construction Schedules' for additional requirements. Include the following information: 1. Anticipated date of Architect's receipt of submittal. 2. Number of business days allowed for Architect's review of submittal. 3. Specification Section to which submittal relates. 4. Subcontractor, fabricator or supplier responsible for preparing the submittal. 5. Provide blank columns for actual date of submittal, re -submittal, and final -review status. 6. Systems Submittals: Identify submittals for systems such as fire alarms, on the transmittal and act upon the system singularly as a combined submittal. B. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. General: Comply with the provisions of General Conditions `Contractor's Construction Schedules' for additional requirements. B. Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in AGC's "Construction Planning & Scheduling." C. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice of Award to date of Final Completion. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. D. Activities: Treat each separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Include selection process activities for finishes and products specified to be selected during the sample review process. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule. 4. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than 5 days for startup and testing. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-2 • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. 6. Demonstration and Training: Training of Owner's personnel as indicated in Division 1 Section "Close -Out Procedures." E: Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract. 2. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner. 3. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Uninterruptible services. c. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. d. Use of premises restrictions. e. Seasonal variations. f. Environmental control. F. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice of Award, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion. G. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time -impact analysis to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. 2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE) A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity -on -node) format. B. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's Construction Schedule using a CPM network analysis diagram. 1. Develop and submit CPM schedule within 10 days after date established for the Notice of Award of Contract and/or Work Authorization. 2. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates. 3. Use "one workday" as the unit of time. C. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. 1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities: a. Preparation and processing of submittals. b. Purchase of materials. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-3 • Gensler 32.2177.089 c. Delivery. d. Fabrication. e. Installation. April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 2. Processing: Process data to produce output data or a computer -drawn, time -scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time. 3. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges. a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path. D. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a list of straight "early start -total float" sort. Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity. 2. Description of activity. 3. Principal events of activity. 4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. 5. Early and late start dates. 6. Early and late finish dates. 7. Activity duration in workdays. 8. Total float or slack time. 9. Average size of workforce. 10. Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the Schedule of Values). E. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Identification of activities that have changed. 2. Changes in early and late start dates. 3. Changes in early and late finish dates. 4. Changes in activity durations in workdays. 5. Changes in the critical path. 6. Changes in total float or slack time. 7. Changes in the Contract Time. 2.4 REPORTS A. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare a detailed report. Submit with a request for information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-4 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 PART 3 - EXECUTION April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity. B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need -to -know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. • 3.2 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A. Digital Images: Provide images in JPEG format, with minimum sensor size of 1.3 megapixels. B. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take digital images showing the progress of the Work, taken every month, starting when the work begins and ending when the Work is completed. Submit with each Application for Payment. Show project from at least two different exterior viewpoints and a sufficient number of interior viewpoints to show progress of construction. 1. Take photographs for each submittal from the same viewpoint unless specifically directed otherwise by the Owner. • C. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take digital images at the completion of the Work after the date of Substantial Completion for submission as Project Record Documents. 1. Take a minimum of 4 different exterior views and a minimum of 4 different interior views. END OF SECTION 01320 01320/9-98/bac CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-5 • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action. B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. B. Processing Time: Promptly submit Shop Drawings Product Data and Samples in accordance with the accepted schedule, as to cause no delay in the Work. Allow 10 working days for initial review of all submittals. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. 1. Initial Review: Allow 15 calendar days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. Delaying submittals to facilitate coordination between submittals shall not constitute a delay of the Work nor shall it be the basis for an extension of time. 2. Concurrent Review: Concurrent review is a submittal that requires review by more than one design discipline. Where concurrent review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is required, submittal schedule shall reflect concurrent review. 3. Direct Transmittal to Consultant: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted directly to Architect's consultants, provide duplicate copy of SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-1 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA transmittal to Architect. Submittal will be returned to Architect, before being returned to Contractor. 4. If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 5. Allow 15 calendar days for processing each resubmittal. 6. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing. C. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 5 inches by 6 inches on label or beside title block to record Architect's review markings. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Unique identifier, including revision number. Submittals shall be numbered consecutively and the numbering system shall be retained throughout all revisions. i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Other necessary identification. D. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. E. Resubmission: Unless corrected copies are required for final submittal due to Architect's observance of noncompliance with provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. 1. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Architect. 2. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action taken and will be returned. F. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using an Architect accepted transmittal form. Architect, will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor. 1. Include Contractor's certification stating that information submitted complies with requirements of the Contract Documents. G. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-2 • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA H. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect in connection with construction. I. Substitution requests are not allowed in the form of submittals. Substitution requests must be made in accordance with Division 1 Section, "Product Requirements." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. 1. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Clearly mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. e. Wiring diagrams showing factory -installed wiring. f. Printed performance curves. g. Operational range diagrams. h. Mill reports. i. Standard product operating and maintenance manuals. j. Compliance with recognized trade association standards. k. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project -specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable: a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. c. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing -in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field -installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-3 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. i. Design calculations. j. Compliance with specified standards. k. Notation of coordination requirements. 1. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 2. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer -installed and field -installed wiring. 3. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 30 by 40 inches (750 by 1000 mm). 4. Number of Copies: Submit copies of each submittal, as follows: a. Initial Submittal: Submit one correctable, translucent, reproducible print and one blue- or black -line print. Architect will return the reproducible print. b. Final Submittal: Submit three blue- or black -line prints, unless prints are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Submit five prints where prints are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain two prints; remainder will be returned. D. Samples: Prepare physical units of materials or products, including the following: 1. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. 2. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from the same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with the product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. 3. Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match Architect's sample where so indicated. Attach label on unexposed side that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name or name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. 4. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a final check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between final submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. a. If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of samples that show the range of variations. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-4 • • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA b. Refer to individual Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation, and similar construction characteristics. 5. Number of Samples for Initial Selection: Submit one full set of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 6. Number of Samples for Verification: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned. a. Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 7. Systems Submittals: Identify submittals for systems such as fire alarms, exterior walls, and curtain walls, on the transmittal and act upon the system singularly as a combined submittal. If resubmission is required, resubmit entire system submittal. 8. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality - control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine fmal acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. E. Product Schedule or List: Prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product. 2. Number and name of room or space. 3. Location within room or space. F. Delegated -Design Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for action required. H. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." I. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." J. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-5 Gensler 32/177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. 2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. 1. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. 2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. 3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." C. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. D. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements. E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements and, where required, is authorized for this specific Project. G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. H. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements. I. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-6 • • • • • Gensler April 30, 2008 Bank of America 32.2177.089 CD Owner Review SouthCenter Tukwila, WA J. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements. K. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. L. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements. M. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. N. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction (ie, IBCC, BOCA, SBCCI) that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: 1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use. O. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and nonoral maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." P. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. Q. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Preparation of substrates. 2. Required substrate tolerances. 3. Sequence of installation or erection. 4. Required installation tolerances. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-7 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review 5. Required adjustments. 6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection. Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA R. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory -authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory -authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. S. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage. T. Construction Photographs: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, coordinated, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECTS ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each properly executed submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will reject and return submittals not complying with requirements. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows: 1. No exception Taken. No further review of Submittal required. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-8 • • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 2. Make Corrections as Noted. Incorporate corrections in Work; resubmittal is not required. If Contractor cannot comply with corrections as noted, revise to respond to exceptions and resubmit. 3. Revise and Resubmit. Revise as noted & resubmit for further review. 4. Resubmit Properly. Submittal not reviewed because it does not contain Contractor's signature indicating its review and approval, and/or is not in proper condition for review. Resubmit. 5. Not Reviewed. Submittal is not required by Contract Documents. C. Informational Submittals: Architect may review each submittal and will not return it, or will reject and return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. D. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded or returned marked "Not Reviewed." END OF SECTION 01330 01330/9-98/bac SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-9 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review SECTION 0:1400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. The Contractor will engage Independent Testing and Inspection Agencies, which are acceptable to the Owner, to verify the adequacy of the Contractors Quality Control for compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction. 1.2 INTENT A. The specified testing and inspections are not intended to limit the Contractor's own quality control program. The specified testing and inspections shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor of responsibility for the Contractor' own quality controls for the specified tests and inspections nor for the fulfillment of the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.3 DELEGATED DESIGN A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. 1.4 SUI3MITTALS A. Delegated -Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance with performance and design criteria indicated. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. B. Testing Agency and Inspection Reports: 1. Prepare and submit, simultaneously to the entities identified in the distribution below, certified written reports of each test and inspection. Each report shall include the information required in each technical section and the following: a. Date of issue. b. Project title and number. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-1 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA c. Name, address, telephone, and facsimile numbers of testing agency. d. Dates and locations of tests or inspections. e. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. f. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. g. Identification of product and Specification Section. h. Complete test or inspection data. i. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. j. Ambient conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. k. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. m. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. n. Final report which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies (if any). 2. Distribution: a. Architect: 2 copies. b. Structural Engineer: 1 copy. c. Owner: 1 copy. d. Contractor: 3 copies (1 field, 1 office, 1 subcontractor). e. Building Authority: 1 copy or as otherwise required or requested by the Authority. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor's Independent Inspection and Testing Agency(s) Qualifications: The Contractor will engage the services of an independent testing and inspection agency(s) and laboratory(s) which comply with the following qualifications for all requirements in the specifications that are identified as having to be provided by the Contractor's Independent Inspection and Testing Agency. 1. The facilities and procedures shall be pre -qualified as being accredited by the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) and which specialize in the types of inspections and tests to be performed. 2. Authorized by the authorities having jurisdiction to perform inspection and testing services in the jurisdiction where Project is located. 3. Employ individuals who will be performing the inspections and testing who are certified by the following organizations for the material testing categories listed. a. ACI (American Concrete Institute): Concrete and laboratory. b. NICET (National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technology): Soils and concrete. c. ASNT (American Society for Nondestructive Testing): Structural steel. d. AWS (American Welding Society): Structural steel. 4. Can provide information necessary for the thorough evaluation of the agency or laboratory capability to provide the services specified in the Contract Documents in accordance with ASTM E548 "Standard Guide for General Criteria Used for Evaluating Laboratory Competence". QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-2 • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA B. Testing and inspecting agencies performing work in connection with concrete and steel shall conform to basic requirements of ASTM E329. 1.6 QUALITY CONTROL A. This section and the following applicable construction subject areas include the testing and inspection requirements to be performed by the Owner's Independent Testing and Inspection agency(s) or laboratory(s): 1. EARTHWORK. 2. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE. 3. STRUCTURAL STEEL. 4. METAL DECK. 5. LOAD BEARING ROUGH CARPENTRY, (if any). 6. GLUED -LAMINATED STRUCTURAL UNITS, (if any). 7. PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES, (if any). B. The Contractor's Independent Testing and Inspection Agency(ies) or Laboratory(ies) engaged to perform inspections, sampling and testing of materials and construction specified shall cooperate with the Architect and Contractor in performance of its duties, and shall provide qualified personnel to perform required inspections and tests. 1. Testing agency will notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Testing agency will interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 3. Testing agency will retest and reinspect corrected work. 4. Testing agency will perform additional tests and inspections as requested by the Owner. 5. Attend progress meetings as requested by Owner. C. Coordination: The Contractor and each Independent Testing and Inspection Agency and Laboratory engaged to perform inspections, tests, and similar services shall sequence their activities to accommodate required services with a minimum of delay. In addition the Contractor and each Independent Testing and Inspection Agency or Laboratory shall coordinate activities to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. D. Limits of Authority: The Contractor's Independent Testing and Inspection Agency(s) or Laboratory(s) is not authorized to: 1. Release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on the requirements of the Contract Documents. 2. Approve or accept any portion of the work. 3. Perform any of the testing and inspection quality control duties of the Contractor. 1.7 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Retesting: The Contractor shall be responsible for retesting where results of the required • inspections, tests, or similar services provided by the Contractors Independent Testing and QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-3 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA Inspection Agency(s) or Laboratory(s) indicate that installed or fabricated work is not in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Cost of retesting work which has been revised or replaced by the Contractor for not being in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents shall be borne by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. B. Cooperate with the agencies and laboratories performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality -control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. All costs for these auxiliary services shall be included in the Contract Sum. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of construction operations to permit the testing and inspection agencies and laboratories to assign personnel to test or inspect the construction operation. Other auxiliary services required include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Providing access to the Work. 2. Providing incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Taking adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Providing facilities for storage and field -curing of test samples. 5. Providing delivery of samples to testing agencies or arranging for pick-up of test samples after normal business hours. 6. Providing preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Providing security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. 8. Ensuring that the work to be tested or inspected by the Contractor's Independent Testing and Inspection Agencies, or Laboratories, has been tested, or inspected by the Contractor's own quality control personnel. C. Coordination: The Contractor and each Independent Testing and Inspection Agency and Laboratory engaged to perform inspections, tests, and similar services shall sequence their activities to accommodate required services with a minimum of delay. In addition the Contractor and each Independent Testing and Inspection Agency or Laboratory shall coordinate activities to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. D. The Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for inspections, tests, taking samples and similar activities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-4 • • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate evidence of testing and inspection and sample taking. 1. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching." END OF SECTION 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-5 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 SECTION 01420 - REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I. "Installer": Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub -subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. Installers shall be experienced in the operation they are engaged to perform. J. "Experienced": When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a miinimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. K. "As Required": As required by regulatory bodies, by referenced standards, by existing conditions, by generally accepted construction practice or by the Contract Documents. In the event of ambiguity or conflicts, the most stringent requirements shall apply. REFERENCES 01420-1 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review L. "By Others" refers to work that is not a part of the Contract. Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA M. "N.I.C.: "Not in Contract" means the work or the item indicated is not a part of the Contract and will be provided by the Owner. 1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise indicated. C. Conflicting Requirements: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum. D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project must be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. On request, make available a copy of standards specific to the Work being performed. E. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from Access Board www.access-board.gov CFR FS Code of Federal Regulations Available from Government Printing Office www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr Federal Specification Available from General Services Administration www.fss.gsa.gov/pub/fed-specs.cfm (800) 872-2253 (202) 272-5434 (888) 293-6498 (202) 512-1530 (202) 619-8925 F. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. REFERENCES 01420-2 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) (202) 862-5100 www.aluminum.org AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737-0202 www.aabchq.com AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664 www.aamanet.org AASHTO American Association of State Highway and (202) 624-5800 Transportation Officials www.aashto.org ACI American Concrete Institute/ACI International (248) 848-3700 www.aci-int.org ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506-7216 www.concrete-pipe.org ADC Air Diffusion Council (312) 201-0101 www.flexibleduct.org AGA American Gas Association (202) 824-7000 www.aga.org AI Asphalt Institute (859) 288-4960 www.asphaltinstitute.org AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (202) 626-7300 www.e-architect.com AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) 644-2400 www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100 www.steel.org AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303) 792-9559 www.aitc-glulam.org ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America (800) 395-2522 www.alca.org (703) 736-9666 ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee (301) 972-1700 AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394-0150 www.amca.org 411 ANLA American Nursery & Landscape Association (202) 789-2900 (Formerly: AAN - American Association of Nurserymen) REFERENCES 01420-3 Gensler 32.2177.089 www.anla.org April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review ANSI American National Standards Institute www.ansi.org APA ARI ASA APA - The Engineered Wood Association www.apawood.org Air -Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute www.ari.org Acoustical Society of America www.asa.aip.org/ ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers www.asce.org ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers www.ashrae.org ASME ASME International (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) www.asme.org ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers www.aspe.org:8080 ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering www.asse-plumbing.org ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials www.astm.org AWCI AWCI International (Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industries International) www.awci.org AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute www.awinet.org AWPA American Wood -Preservers' Association www.awpa.com AWS American Welding Society www.aws.org BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association www.buildershardware.com Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA (202) 293-8020 (253) 565-6600 (703) 524-8800 (516) 576-2360 (800) 548-2723 (703) 295-6300 (800) 527-4723 (404) 636-8400 (800) 843-2763 (212) 591-7722 (773) 693-2773 (440) 835-3040 (610) 832-9585 (703) 534-8300 (800) 449-8811 (703) 733-0600 (817) 326-6300 (800) 443-9353 (305) 443-9353 (212) 297-2122 REFERENCES 01420-4 • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 BIA CDA CGA April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Brick Industry Association (The) www.bia.org Copper Development Association Inc. www.copper.org Compressed Gas Association www.cganet.com CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association www.cisca.org CPA CRI CRSI DHI Composite Panel Association (Formerly: National Particleboard Association) www.pbmdf.com Carpet & Rug Institute (The) www.carpet-rug.com Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute www.crsi.org Door and Hardware Institute www.dhi.org EIA/TIA Electronic Industries Alliance/Telecommunications Industry Association www.eia.org FMG GA FM Global (Formerly: FM - Factory Mutual System) www.fmglobal.com Gypsum Association www.gypsum.org GANA Glass Association of North America (Formerly: FGMA - Flat Glass Marketing Association) www.glasswebsite.com/gana GTA Glass Tempering Division of Glass Association of North America (See GANA) HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (See NAAMM) Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA (703) 620-0010 (800) 232-3282 (212) 251-7200 (703) 412-0900 (630) 584-1919 (301) 670-0604 (800) 882-8846 (706) 278-3176 (847) 517-1200 (703) 222-2010 (703) 907-7500 (401) 275-3000 (202) 289-5440 (785) 271-0208 HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435-2900 www.hpva.org REFERENCES 01420-5 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) www.ieee.org IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America www.iesna.org IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council www.igcc.org ITS Intertek Testing Services www.itsglobal.com LPI Lightning Protection Institute www.lightning.org LSGA Laminated Safety Glass Association (See GANA) NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers www.naamm.org NACE NACE International (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) www.nace.org NCMA NEBB National Concrete Masonry Association www.ncma.org National Environmental Balancing Bureau www.nebb.org NECA National Electrical Contractors Association www.necanet.org NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association www.nelma.org NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association www.nema.org NFPA National Fire Protection Association www.nfpa.org NLGA NPA National Lumber Grades Authority www.nlga.org National Particleboard Association (See CPA) Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA (212) 419-7900 (212) 248-5000 (315) 646-2234 (800) 345-3851 (607) 753-6711 (800) 488-6864 (847) 577-7200 (312) 332-0405 (281) 228-6200 (703) 713-1900 (301) 977-3698 (301) 657-3110 (207) 829-6901 (703) 841-3200 (800) 344-3555 (617) 770-3000 (604) 524-2393 REFERENCES 01420-6 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323-9545 www.nrca.net (847) 299-9070 NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622 www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400 NWWDA. National Wood Window and Door Association (See WDMA) PCA Portland Cement Association (847) 966-6200 www.portcement.org PDCA Painting and Decorating Contractors of America (800) 332-7322 www.pdca.com (703) 359-0826 RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections (800) 644-2400 www.boltcouncil.org (312) 670-2400 RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute (Contact by mail only) SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 462-1930 www.sdi.org • SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council (315) 646-2234 www.sgcc.org SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (312) 644-6610 www.sigmaonline.org/sigma SMACNA. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' (703) 803-2980 National Association www.smacna.org SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800) 523-6154 (Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division) www.sprayfoam.org SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) (850) 434-2611 www.spib.org SPRI SPRI (781) 444-0242 (Single Ply Roofing Institute) www.spri.org SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (800) 837-8303 www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331 REFERENCES 01420-7 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. www.tileusa.com Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA (864) 646-8453 TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic (703) 907-7700 Industries Alliance www.tiaonline.org UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (800) 704-4050 www.ul.com (847) 272-8800 WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (800) 283-1486 www.wclib.org (503) 639-0651 WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association (800) 506-4653 (Formerly: AWCMA - American Window Covering (212) 661-4261 Manufacturers Association) www.windowcoverings.org WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223-2301 (Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and (847) 299-5200 Door Association) www.wdma.com WWPA Western Wood Products Association www.wwpa.org (503) 224-3930 G. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. BOCA BOCA International, Inc. (708) 799-2300 www.bocai.org IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (The) www.iapmo.org (909) 595-8449 ICBO International Conference of Building Officials (Uniform Building (800) 284-4406 Code) www.icbo.org (562) 699-0541 ICC International Code Council (703) 931-4533 (Formerly: CABO - Council of American Building Officials) www.inticode.org SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. (205) 591-1853 www.sbcci.org REFERENCES 01420-8 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA H. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772 www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-0990 DOC Department of Commerce (202) 482-2000 www.doc.gov EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 260-2090 www.epa.gov NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-6478 www.nist.gov OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (202) 693-1999 www.osha.gov PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) • END OF SECTION 01420 01420/11-00/bac REFERENCES 01420-9 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review SECTION 01.500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls. Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1. Provide and maintain all temporary facilities and controls necessary for the performance of the Work. Locate and install all temporary facilities and controls where acceptable to the local authorities having jurisdiction and utility owner and remove same and terminate, in a manner suitable to the local authorities having jurisdiction and utility owner, at completion of Work or when otherwise directed. Unless otherwise specified, pay all costs associated with the provision, and maintenance of, temporary facilities and .controls including power, water, and fuel (if any) consumed until Substantial Completion. 1.2 USE CHARGES A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to Owner or Architect and shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Owner's construction forces. 2. Occupants of Project. 3. Architect. 4. Testing agencies. 5. Personnel of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sewer Service: Pay sewer service use charges for sewer usage, by all parties engaged in construction, at Project site. C. Water Service: Pay water service use charges, whether metered or otherwise, for water used by all entities engaged in construction activities at Project site. D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric power service use charges, whether metered or otherwise, for electricity used by all entities engaged in construction activities at Project site. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Underground Utilities: Comply with all laws and regulations concerning the identification and locations of all underground utilities. Utilities data on Drawings are based upon information obtained by Architect and have not been verified by Architect. Architect shall not be responsible or liable for the data supplied. Data shall not be relied upon by Contractor in complying with Contract Documents or safety requirements. Report to the utility any break, leak, dent, gouge, groove, or any other damage to facilities whether or not caused by the TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-1 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA Contractor. Contractor shall notify Architect and nearby occupants of emergency situations that may arise. B. Use of Permanent Utilities: When each permanent utility is operational, it may be used for construction purposes, if acceptable in writing, to the Owner. The written request for permission for use of the system from the Owner shall include, as a minimum, the conditions and reasons for use and provisions for and effect on equipment warranties. In the event that the Owner accepts the Contractors use of the permanent utility for the balance of the Work, the Contractor shall be fully responsible for it, and shall pay all costs for operation, power, restoration and maintenance of same. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Engage appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to existing service. Where utility company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with utility company recommendations. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. 2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Before temporary utility is available, provide trucked -in services. 3. Obtain easements to bring temporary utilities to Project site where Owner's easements cannot be used for that purpose. B. Sewers and Drainage: If sewers are available, provide temporary connections to remove effluent that can be discharged lawfully. If sewers are not available or cannot be used, provide drainage ditches, dry wells, stabilization ponds, and similar facilities. 1. Filter out excessive soil, construction debris, chemicals, oils, and similar contaminants that might clog sewers or pollute waterways before discharge. 2. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by sewer department officials. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-2 • or • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 3. Maintain temporary sewers and drainage facilities in a clean, sanitary condition. After heavy use, restore normal conditions promptly. 4. Provide temporary filter beds, settlement tanks, separators, and similar devices to purify effluent to levels acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction until permanent water service is in use. D. Temporary Toilet and Drinking Water Facilities: Provide and maintain temporary toilets, and drinking -water, facilities for use by all construction workers throughout the construction period. 1. Self -Contained Toilet Units: Single -occupant units of chemical, aerated recirculation, or combustion type; vented; fully enclosed with a glass -fiber -reinforced polyester shell. Keep toilet facilities clean, sanitary, and provided with all appurtenances, and in compliance with all applicable codes and regulations. Service as often as necessary to prevent accumulation of wastes and creation of unsanitary conditions. 2. Drinking -Water Fixtures: Where the work is in progress provide drinking water, water dispensers, and cups. E. Heating: Provide temporary heating required by construction activities for curing or drying of cornpleted installations and for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Provide temporary heating using UL Listed, or FM approved, portable smokeless heaters having safety controls against explosion, overheating and carbon monoxide buildup, until a major portion of the building, or the entire building, is enclosed. 1. The building shall be considered enclosed when the permanent walls, roofs, weather- tight, windows are in place and glazed, and all entrance enclosures are either permanently in place or are provided with suitable temporary enclosures all to the extent that the building interiors are suitable for the installation of interior finishes. 2. In the event that the Owner accepts the Contractor's use of the permanent heating systems for the balance of the Work, provide temporary filters to adequately filter air being distributed through the duct work and air handling units to the supply outlets; disposable filter shall be placed in front of all exhaust registers to keep construction dirt out of exhaust duct work. F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide adequate ventilation in enclosed areas throughout construction period required to: facilitate progress of Work; to protect Work and products against dampness and heat; to prevent moisture condensation on surfaces; to provide suitable ambient temperatures for installation and curing of finish materials; to provide adequate ventilating; to meet health regulations for safe working environment; and, to prevent hazardous accumulations of dusts, fumes, mists, vapors or gases in areas occupied during construction. Provide local exhaust ventilating to prevent harmful dispersal of hazardous substances into atmosphere of occupied areas. Dispose of exhaust materials in manner that will not result in harmful exposure to persons or property. Provide ventilating operations at all times personnel occupy an area, when subject to hazardous accumulations of harmful elements. Continue operation of ventilating system for as long as required after cessation of Work to assure removal of harmful elements. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-3 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1. In the event that the Owner accepts the Contractor's use of the permanent ventilation and air conditioning systems for the balance of the Work, provide and maintain temporary filters to adequately filter air being distributed through the ductwork and air handling units to the supply outlets; disposable filter shall be placed in front of all exhaust registers to keep construction dirt out of exhaust duct work. G. Electric Power and Lighting Service: 1. Arrange with local electric utility for temporary electric service to the site. Provide all installation and equipment for temporary lighting and power. The electrical service shall be of adequate capacity for all construction tools and equipment without overloading the temporary facilities. a. Provide power distribution throughout the structure and site as required to facilitate construction operations. Terminations shall be provided for each voltage supply complete with circuit breakers, disconnect switches and other electrical devices as required to protect the power supply system. b. A temporary lighting system shall be furnished, installed and maintained by the Contractor as required to satisfy the minimum requirements of security and safety. Provide general illumination for the entire project. Provide increased levels of illumination where the work is being installed. 2. All temporary equipment and wiring for power and lighting shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of the governing codes and regulations, the NEC, NEMA, and OSHA standards. All temporary power and lighting shall be maintained to give safe working conditions, continuous service, and so as not to pose a threat to the Owner's property. Modify and extend temporary power and lighting systems as the Work progress requires. H. Telephone Service: Provide and pay for temporary telephone service, and service charges, throughout construction period. Long distance calls shall be paid for by the party making the call. A pay phone is not acceptable. 3.3 TEMPORARY SUPPORT FACILITIES AND PROTECTION A. Temporary Construction Openings: Provide openings in slabs, walls, and partitions where required for moving in large pieces of equipment. Close and restore all openings and finish them after the equipment is in place. If structural modifications are required to provide temporary construction openings notify the Architect for acceptance prior to making the modification. B. Dewatering Facilities: Protect the site and the Work from rain, spring or ground water, backing up of drains, broken water lines, and all other water accumulations. Construct and maintain temporary drainage and lawfully dispose of pumped water to prevent water accumulations. Provide and operate sufficient dewatering and pumping equipment to maintain site and Work free of water. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-4 • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA C. Access Roads: Construct and maintain, in good useable condition, required temporary roads and other access to the site. When no longer required remove temporary access roads. D. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Provide one 8' x 4' painted wood project sign, with prcject information applied thereon in a form and of content acceptable to the Owner, at a location designated by the Owner. Graphics for project information sign shall be black. Upon completion of the project, the sign shall be removed and disposed of by the Contractor. Refer to the General Conditions `Construction Signs' for additional requirements. 1. Use 3/4" APA A -C exterior grade plywood with 2" x 4" framing; prime entire sign, coat face of sign with 2 coats of white paint, coat edges and back of sign with 2 coats of black paint. Support sign on 4" x 4" wood posts, properly braced. Paint supporting structure with 2 coats of black paint. 2. Paint sign panel and applied graphics with exterior -grade alkyd gloss enamel over exterior primer. E. Waste Disposal Facilities: Refer to Division 1 Section "Waste Management Program" for requirements applicable to waste disposal facilities. F. Janitorial Services: Provide janitorial services on a daily basis for temporary offices, first-aid stations, toilets, wash facilities, and similar areas. G. Ternporary Field Office: Provide suitable insulated, weathertight, air-conditioned field office faciilities complete with telephone and furnishings for use as a common facility by all personnel engaged in construction activities; of sufficient size to accommodate required office personnel, storage of field documents, layout space for drawings, drafting table for production of As -built drawings, and meetings at Project site. Keep office clean and orderly. H. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate storage of materials and equipment subject to weather damage, vandalism, or theft. Provide lockable doors and floors raised above the ground. Construction Aids: Provide all items, such as hoists, cranes, and other lifting devices, all scaffolding, staging, platforms, runways, ladders; and all temporary flooring, as required by the various trades for the proper execution of the Work. Excavate, level, or otherwise treat existing grade as required for placement of construction plant items. Provide such equipment with proper guys, bracing, guards, railings, and other safety devices as required by governing authorities and OSHA. All permanent work shall be protected from hoists, cranes, and other lifting devices so as to prevent staining, damage or marring of the permanent work. J. Tree and Plant Protection: Existing or newly planted vegetation, shrubs, trees, sidewalks, paving, etc., on the site, shall, unless directly affected by the Work, be protected against damage of any kind. No diesel or gasoline engine shall be left running under trees. No vehicle shall be allowed to pass over the feeder root system within the drip line. Damage of any kind caused by the Work shall corrected before final acceptance. Maintain trees, plants, shrubs, existing site improvements, etc., designated to remain within the project site. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-5 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA K. Streets and Sidewalk Protection: Protect streets and sidewalks and repair damage caused by construction operations. Clean mud and debris from wheels of vehicles leaving Site and from streets as required. L. Pest Control: Within the limits of the construction site provide an effective rodent, insect and pest control program. Engage a professional pest -control service to perform this program at regular intervals throughout the duration of the Project. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials. M. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, erect a temporary fence and gates to prevent unauthorized persons from entering the construction site. The extent of the fencing required shall be that determined by the Contractor to protect the Work, and to comply with the requirements of local authorities and regulations. Install in a manner that will prevent people, dogs, and other animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. N. Security: Maintain building and site security at all times. Provide temporary weather -tight enclosures for all exterior openings. Equip exterior doors with locks. At the end of each day's Work, close and lock all temporary enclosures. Provide security watchman service as required to protect the building and site during working and non -working hours. O. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Provide all barricades, shoring, fences, railings, and guards for the protection of the public and construction personnel. All safety devices shall conform to the applicable requirements of local building codes, OSHA. P. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from wind, rain dust, frost, freezing temperatures, weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. Q. Temporary Fire Protection: Throughout the building, during construction, provide for fire protection and fire prevention in accordance with all applicable Federal, state and local codes and regulations. 3.4 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from damage caused by freezing temperatures and similar elements. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,' ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. 2. Prevent water -filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines. Protect from damage during excavation operations. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-6 • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Except for using permanent fire protection as soon as available, do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the property of Contractor. 2. Remove and dispose of temporary filters and thoroughly clean the interior of the air handling units and duct work prior to acceptance of the Work. Provide all new filters in heating, ventilation and air conditioning systems. 3. Replace all lamps of the permanent lighting system, to comply with the Contract Documents, at no cost to the Owner. 4. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-7 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Thiis Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and product substitutions. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation, shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. C. Basis -of -Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating the product of another proposed manufacturer. D. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. E. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: All bids shall be based on the products required in the Contract Documents. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-1 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA B. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. 5. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 6. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 7. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 8. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather -protection requirements for storage. 9. Protect stored products from damage. B. Storage: Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner. 1.5 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project -specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: Prepare a written document using appropriate form properly executed. 3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-2 • • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 1.6 SUBMITTALS April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use form provided by Architect. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities shall include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, service life, maintenance, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. i. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. j. Time value to be added to, or subtracted from, the Contract Time of completion. k. Benefit(s) to the Owner. 1. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution. Substitution requests, if any, shall be submitted so as to allow a reasonable time for their consideration and shall not be justification for delay of the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-3 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged, and that are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: Unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide products of both quality and type that have been used successfully in similar situations on equal quality projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Architect's. 6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient characteristics" of products. B. Product Selection Procedures: Procedures for product selection include the following: 1. Product: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Product" name a single product and manufacturer, provide the product named. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Manufacturer" or "Source" name single manufacturers or sources, provide a product by the manufacturer or from the source named that complies with requirements. 3. Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Products" introduce a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. 4. Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Manufacturers" introduce a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. 5. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select a product (and manufacturer) that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily. a. If no product available within specified category matches satisfactorily and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the Contract Documents on "substitutions" for selection of a matching product. C. Substitutions: Substitutions will be considered only under one of the following conditions: 1. That the specified product is not available due to lockout, strike, bankruptcy, product discontinuance, Acts of God, and that the proposed product will match or exceed the quality of the specified product while either providing the Owner with a cost savings or expediting the Work. 2. When a warranty of performance is specified and, in the judgment of the Contractor, the specified product will not provide the desired performance. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-4 • • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review SECTION 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Certificates: Submit certificate and 2 copies of the certified survey. Each certificate and survey shall be signed by land surveyor certifying the location and elevation of improvements, and plan dimensions of building, are accurately established in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice land surveying in the jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land -surveying services of the kind indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services. B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water -service piping; and underground electrical services. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700-1 Gensler 32.2177.089 3.2 PREPARATION April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements. and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION SURVEYING AND LAYOUT A. General: The Work to be performed under the Contract Documents shall be laid out solely by the Contractor. Provide and pay for all construction surveying and layout work required for the Project. Under no circumstances will the Architect assume any responsibilities for laying out the Work. 1. Verify all dimensions shown on the drawings. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. Notify the Architect in writing of any discrepancies found before proceeding with the Work. B. Surveying: Engage land surveyor to establish and maintain benchmarks, reference lines, and reference points from which the building elevations and lines can be determined, and from which the Work can be properly laid out. 1. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations. 3. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations 4. As construction proceeds, verify every major element for line, level, and plumb. 5. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700-2 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 6. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field -engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework. C. Construction Layout: During the progress of the Work establish additional bench marks, reference lines and reference points and levels and as otherwise necessary for the guidance and information of each trade and for the field verification of specified construction tolerances. Callculate and measure required dimensions within indicated or recognized tolerances. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. D. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 3.5 OWNER -INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Site: Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction forces. B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction forces. 1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner. of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress. 2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction forces at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction forces if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700-3 Gensler April 30, 2008 32.2177.089 CD Owner Review 3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate. progress cleaning for joint -use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom -clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Cutting and Patching: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, oils, putty, and similar materials. 1. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. H. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted. I. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. J. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. 3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. proper operation. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS operation. Remove Adjust equipment for 01700-4 • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory -authorized service representative is required to inspect field -assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." 3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. 3.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching." 1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components thatcannot be repaired. E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces. END OF SECTION 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700-5 • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review SECTION 01731 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. 1.2 DEFINITIONS Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Cutting: Removal of existing construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Openings in new Work which can be pre -planned by the Contractor requiring the opening shall be built into the Work by the proper trade for each material under his Contract. It is the responsibility of the Contractor requiring such openings or requiring the placement of built-in items, to coordinate the Work with the proper trade for each material, sufficiently in advance for the Work to be accomplished in the proper sequence and without delay, or pay the costs caused by the delay or for extra Work required. B. Do not damage or endanger any portion of the Work of the Contract, of the Owner, or of any separate Contractors by cutting, patching or otherwise altering any such Work, or by excavation. C. Do not cut or otherwise alter the work of the Owner or any separate Contractor except with the written consent of the Owner and of such separate Contractor. Do not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or any separate Contractor, consent for cutting or otherwise altering the Work. D. Do not cut, weld to, drill, remove or otherwise alter any structural member, whether new or existing, without the written consent of Architect, unless such condition is indicated in detail on the Drawings and reinforcing of members affected or new members to compensate for such cutting, drilling, removals or other alteration are indicated. E. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731-1 Gensler 32.2177.089 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PERFORMANCE April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching who are experienced with the material to be patched. B. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refmishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. C. Workmanship: If a wall, or ceiling that has been patched is painted, the final 2 coats of paint shall be applied to the entire wall, corner to corner, or to the entire ceiling wall to wall. END OF SECTION 01731 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731-2 • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review SECTION 01.770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout. 1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final Completion construction photographs and photographic negatives, damage surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Owner will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-1 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. 1.3 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting fmal inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a fmal Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by the Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest -control fmal inspection report and warranty. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will issue a fmal Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-2 • • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Project Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. B. Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of blue- or black -line white prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked -up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 2. Mark record sets with erasable, red -colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location. 3. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternate numbers, and similar identification where applicable. 5. Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. C. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. Mark copy to indicate the actual product installation where installation variies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations. that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Product Data, where applicable. D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections such as tests and inspections, surveys, mix records, and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows: CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-3 Gensler 32.2177.089 1. Operation Data: April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA a. Emergency instructions and procedures. b. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions, including operating standards. c. Operating procedures, including startup, shutdown, seasonal, and weekend operations. d. Description of controls and sequence of operations. e. Piping diagrams. 2. Maintenance Data: a. Manufacturer's information, including list of spare parts. b. Name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier. c. Maintenance procedures. d. Maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance. e. Maintenance record forms. f. Sources of spare parts and maintenance materials. g. Copies of maintenance service agreements. h. Copies of warranties and bonds. B. Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and index data in heavy-duty, 3 -ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, with pocket inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets. Identify each binder on front and spine with the printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project name, and subject matter of contents. 1.7 WARRANTIES A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3 -ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8 -1/2 -by -11 -inch (115 -by -280 -mm) paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic -covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-4 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 • 2.1 • MATERIALS April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Instruction: Instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, andequipment not part of a system. 1. Provide instructors experienced in operation and maintenance procedures. 2. Provide instruction at mutually agreed -on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at the start of each season. 3. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice. 4. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction, and course content. B. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections. For each training module, develop a learning objective and teaching outline. Include instruction for the following: 1. System design and operational philosophy. 2. Review of documentation. 3. Operations. 4. Adjustments. 5. Troubleshooting. 6. Maintenance. 7. Repair. 3.2 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste -removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification . of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: CLOSEOUT ]PROCEDURES 01770-5 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. c. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. d. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard -surfaced finishes to a dirt -free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. e. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, and similar spaces. f. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. g. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. h. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision -obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. i. Remove labels that are not permanent. j. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. k. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint droppings, and other foreign substances. 1. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. o. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. p. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned -out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a fmal inspection and rid Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report. D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. END OF SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-6 • • • • • • Gensler April 30, 2008 32.2177.089 CD Owner Review SECTION 02361 - TERMITE CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following for termite control: 1. Soil treatment. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Treatments and application instructions, including EPA B. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of termite control treatments furnished comply with requirements. C. Soil Treatment Application Report: After application of termiticide is for Owner's record information, including the following as applicable: 1. Date and time of application. 2. Moisture content of soil before application. 3. Brand name and manufacturer of termiticide. 4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used. 5. Dilutions, methods, volumes, and rates of application used. 6. Areas of application. 7. Water source for application. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA -Registered Label. products certifying that completed, submit report A. Applicator Qualifications: A pest control operator who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment in jurisdiction where Projectis located. B. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides, and label with a Federal registration number, to comply with EPA regulations and authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated or frozen. Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with EPA -Registered Label requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. TERMITE CONTROL 02361-1 Gensler 32.2177.089 1.5 COORDINATION April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, and grading and concreting operations. Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground -supported slabs, before construction. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Written warranty, signed by applicator and Contractor certifying that termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered during warranty period, re -treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation. B. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL TREATMENT A. Termiticide: Provide an EPA -registered termiticide complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, in a soluble or emulsible, concentrated formulation that dilutes with water or foaming agent, and formulated to prevent termite infestation. Use only soil treatment solutions that are not harmful to plants. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, according to the product's EPA -Registered Label. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for moisture content of the soil, interfaces with earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping, and other conditions affecting performance of termite control. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's written instructions for preparing substrate. Remove all extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste wood from soil and around foundations. B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be TERMITE CONTROL 02361-2 • • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA treated, except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended by termiticide manufacturer. 3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's EPA -Registered Label for products. 3.4 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT A. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of tenniticide, according to manufacturer's EPA -Registered Label, to the following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building construction. Distribute the treatment evenly. 1. Slabs -on -Grade: Under ground -supported slab construction, including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed. 2. Foundations: Adjacent soil including soil along entire inside perimeter of foundation walls, along both sides of interior partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating slab, and around interior column footers, and along entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings. 3. Masonry: Treat voids. 4. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated. B. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry. C. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground - supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA -Registered Label instructions. D. Post warning signs in areas of application. E. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping, or other construction activities following application. END OF SECTION 02361 TERMITE CONTROL 02361-3 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review SECTION 02456 - CONCRETE -FILLED STEEL PILES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Sec:tion includes concrete -filled steel pipe piles. Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1.2 UNIT PRICES A. General: See Division 1 Section "Unit Prices" for piles affected by unit prices. B. The Contract Sum: Base the Contract Sum on number and dimensions of piles indicated from tip to cutoff, plus not less than 12 inches (305 mm) of overlength. C. Work of this Section is affected as follows: 1. Additional payment for pile lengths in excess of that indicated, and credit for pile lengths less than that indicated, will be calculated at unit prices stated in the Contract, based on net addition or deduction to total pile length as determined by Architect measured to nearest 12 inches (305 mm). a. Additional payment for splices required to extend pile lengths in excess of that indicated will be calculated at unit prices stated in the Contract. 2. Additional payment for number of piles in excess of that indicated, and credit for number of piles less than that indicated, will be calculated at unit prices stated in the Contract. 3. Unit prices include labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals for furnishing, driving, cutting off, capping, and disposing of cutoffs. 4. Test piles that become part of permanent foundation system will be considered as an integral part of the Work. 5. No payment will be made for rejected piles, including piles driven out of tolerance, defective piles, or piles damaged during handling or driving. 1.3 SUI3MITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for piles, including splices and tip details. 1. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. 2. Indicate locations, sizes, type, and arrangement of reinforcement. C. Welding certificates. CONCRETE -FILLED STEEL PILES 02456 - 1 Gensler 32.2177.089 D. Concrete design mixes. E. Material certificates. F. Material test reports. April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA G. Pile -Driving Equipment Data: Include type, make, and rated energy range; weight of striking part of hammer; weight of drive cap; and, type, size, and properties of hammer cushion. Include mandrel type and details. H. Pile -driving records. I. Field quality -control reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements in ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete." B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel". 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code Sheet Steel." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL PIPE PILES A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 252, Grade 2; seamless or welded. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420); deformed. B. Low -Alloy -Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M. C. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 767/A 767M, Class II zinc coated, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and bending, as follows: 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or B. 1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. 2. Ground Granulated Blast -Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. B. Normal -Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33 uniformly graded, 3/4 -inch (19 -mm) maximum aggregate size. Provide aggregates from a single source. CONCRETE -FILLED STEEL PILES 02456 - 2 • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review C. Water: Potable, complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements. D. Admixtures: Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. 2. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 3. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 4. Water -Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 5. High -Range, Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 6. High -Range, Water -Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 7. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. 2.4 PILE ACCESSORIES A. Driving Points: Manufacturer's standard 60 -degree conical driving point, with integral reinforcing ribs, to provide full bearing of pipe pile tip. Fabricate from steel castings as follows: B. Inside Cutting Shoes: Manufacturer's standard, inside -flanged, open-ended cutting shoe, to provide full bearing of pipe pile tip. Fabricate from steel castings as follows: C. Outside Cutting Shoes: Manufacturer's standard, outside -flanged, open-ended cutting shoe, to provide full bearing of pipe pile tip. Fabricate from steel castings as follows: • D. Splice Coupling: Manufacturer's standard splice coupling, rolled from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon -steel bar or cast from heat-treated carbon steel, ASTM A 27/A 27M, Grade 65-35 (Grade 450-240), with interior stop and internally tapered for friction fit driving. • 2.5 CONCRETE MIXES A. Prepare concrete design mixes according to ACI 301, determined by either laboratory trial batch or field test data basis. B. Proportion mixes according to ACI 301 to provide normal -weight concrete suitable for piles with the following properties: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 5000 psi (34.5 MPa). 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Material Ratio at Point of Placement: [0.45]. 3. Slump Limit: [6 inches (127 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 4. Air Content: 6.0 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate full-length piles by splicing pile lengths together. Maintain axial alignment of pile lengths. Maintain structural properties of pile across splice. CONCRETE -(FILLED STEEL PILES 02456 - 3 Gensler April 30, 2008 Bank of America 32.2177.089 CD Owner Review SouthCenter Tukwila, WA B. Fit and weld driving points to tip of pile according to manufacturer's written instructions and AWS D1.1/D1.1M for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. C. Pile -Length Markings: Mark each pile with horizontal lines at 12 -inch (305 -mm) intervals; label the distance from pile tip at 60 -inch (1.52-m) intervals. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with recommendations in CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. B. Fabricate and install reinforcement cages symmetrically about axis of pile pipe in a single unit. 3.2 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Place concrete in a continuous operation and without segregation immediately after cleaning out pile pipe. B. Place concrete by means of bottom discharge bucket, flexible drop chute, steep -sided funnel hopper, or tremie or pump concrete into place. C. Place concrete in a dry pile pipe unless placement underwater is approved by Architect. D. Consolidate final 10 feet (3 m) of concrete during placement to ensure that concrete is thoroughly worked around steel reinforcement and into corners. 3.3 DRIVING PILES A. General: Continuously drive piles to elevations or penetration resistance indicated. Establish and maintain axial alignment of leads and piles before and during driving. B. Heaved Piles: Redrive heaved piles to tip elevation at least as deep as original tip elevation with a driving resistance at least as great as original driving resistance. C. Pile Splices: Splice piles during installation and align pile segments concentrically. D. Driving Tolerances: Drive piles without exceeding the following tolerances, measured at pile heads: 1. Location: 4 inches (102 mm) from location indicated after initial driving, and 6 inches (152 mm) after pile driving is completed. 2. Plumb: Maintain 1 inch (25 mm) in 4 feet (1.2 m) from vertical, or a maximum of 4 inches (102 mm), measured when pile is aboveground in leads. 3. Batter Angle: Maximum 1 inch (25 mm) in 4 feet (1.2 m) from required angle, measured when pile is aboveground in leads. CONCRETE -FILLED STEEL PILES 02456 - 4 • • • Gensler April 30, 2008 Bank of America 32.2177.089 CD Owner Review SouthCenter Tukwila, WA E. Excavation: Clean out steel pipe pile by removing soil and debris from inside pile before placing steel reinforcement or concrete. F. Cutting Off: Cut off tops of driven piles square with pile axis and at elevations indicated. G. Pile -Driving Records: Maintain accurate driving records for each pile, compiled and attested to by a qualified owners designated representative. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1. Pile foundations. B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform tests and inspections. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Dynamic Pile Testing: High -strain dynamic monitoring shall be performed and reported according to ASTM D 4945 during initial driving and during restriking on [3 percent of] <Insert number or percent ofl piles. 2. Low -strain integrity measurement shall be performed and reported for each pile. 3. Weld Testing: In addition to visual inspection, welds shall be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 4. Concrete: Sampling and testing of concrete for quality control shall include the following: a. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94/C 94M. 1) Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M. 2) Compressive -Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; one set for each truck load. One specimen shall be tested at seven days, two specimens shall be tested at 28 days, and one specimen shall be retained in reserve for later testing if required. END OF SECTION 02456 CONCRETE -FILLED STEEL PILES 02456 - 5 • Gensler 32.2177.089 SECTION 02875 - BICYCLE RACKS PART 1 - GENERAL April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Bicycle racks. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Material Certificates: For site furnishings, signed by manufacturers. C. Maintenance Data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS • 2.1 MATERIALS • A. Steel and Iron: Free of surface blemishes. Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA B. Anchors, Fasteners, Fittings, and Hardware: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion -resistant - coated or noncorrodible materials; commercial quality, tamperproof, vandal and theft resistant, concealed, recessed, and capped or plugged. C. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory -packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107; recommended in writing by manufacturer, for exterior applications. D. Galvanizing: 1. Zinc -Coated Tubing: External, zinc with organic overcoat, consisting of a minimum of 0.9 oz./sq. ft. (0.27 kg/sq. m) of zinc after welding, a chromate conversion coating, and a clear, polymer film. Internal, same as external or consisting of 81 percent zinc pigmented coating, not less than 0.3 mil (0.0076 mm) thick. 2. Hot -Dip Galvanizing: According to ASTM A 123/A 123M, ASTM A 153/A 153M, or ASTM A 924/A 924M. BICYCLE RACKS Copyright 2008 Gensler 02875 - 1 Gensler 32.2177.089 2.2 BICYCLE RACKS April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide AAA Ribbon Rack Co., Inc.; RB Series, or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. American Bicycle Security Company. 2. Columbia Cascade Company. 3. Creative Pipe, Inc. 4. FairWeather Site Furnishings. 5. Huntco Supply, LLC. 6. L. A. Steelcraft. B. Bicycle Rack Construction: 1. Frame: Galvanized steel. a. Pipe OD: Not less than 2-3/8 inches (60 mm). 2. Style: As indicated for Basis of Design Product. a. Capacity: Designed to accommodate no fewer than five bicycles. 3. Security: Designed to lock frame. 4. Installation Method: Cast in concrete. C. Steel Finish: Galvanized. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Metal Components: Form to required shapes and sizes with true, consistent curves, lines, and angles. Separate metals from dissimilar materials to prevent electrolytic action. B. Welded Connections: At exposed connections, finish surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness or unevenness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. C. Pipes and Tubes: Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of handrail and railing components. D. Exposed Surfaces: Polished, sanded, or otherwise finished; all surfaces smooth, free of burrs, barbs, splinters, and sharpness; all edges and ends rolled, rounded, or capped. E. Factory Assembly: Assemble components in the factory to greatest extent possible to minimize field.assembly. Clearly mark units for assembly in the field. BICYCLE RACKS 02875 - 2 Copyright 2008 Gensler • • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Complete field assembly of site furnishings where required. B. Post Setting: Set cast -in support posts in concrete footing plumb or at correct angle and aligned and at correct height and spacing. C. Posts Set into Voids in Concrete: Form or core -drill holes for installing posts in concrete to depth recommended in writing by manufacturer of site furnishings and fill annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 02875 BICYCLE RACKS Copyright 2008 Gensler 02875 - 3 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review SECTION 03000 - STRUCTURAL CONCRETE Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE: Conform to "Specifications for Structural Concrete" ACI 301-99 and the following: A. Allowable Tolerances in Exposed Finished Work: 1. In Linear Building Lines, Elevation and Conspicuous Lines and Arises: Maximum 3/16" in 20'-0"; maximum 3/8" in 40'-0" or more. 2. In Cross -Sectional Dimension: 3/16". 3. In surface Plane, Plumb and Level: 1/8" in 10'-0" in any direction when measured with a 10'-0" straight edge. B. Testing Laboratory: 1. Concrete testing shall be performed by an independent testing agency selected and paid for by the Contractor and acceptable to the Architect. Costs for testing shall be included in Contract Sum. 2. Qualifications: Testing agency shall comply with requirements of ASTM E329- 77. C. Testing Laboratories Duties: 1. Preparation and/or verification of mix designs for concrete classes specified. 2. Check concrete materials for compliance with specifications and report results and recommendations to Architect. 3. Perform specified laboratory tests. Report results on field test data sheet to architect. 4. Notify Architect immediately of any test specimens that do not meet design compressive strength at 28 days or 2/3 of design strength at seven days. 5. Testing agency shall distribute copies of test reports as follows: a. Three copies to Architect. b. Two copies to Contractor. c. One copy to concrete supplier. D. Contractor's Duties Relative to Testing: 1. Contractor shall designate one individual in his organization to be responsible for conducting Contractor's duties relative to testing. Individual will be instructed in his duties by testing agency. Individual shall not be changed without notice to Architect. 2. Delivering of materials to testing agency's laboratory for use in verifying design mixes. 3. Molding cylinders for compression testing, performing slump tests and air content tests. STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 03000-1 Gensler 01.3154.000 April 30, 2008 Issue for Permit and Bid Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwilla, WA 4. Advising testing agency of conditions requiring testing and scheduling testing agency's work. 5. Storing cylinders at project site in storage box for 24 hours after molding. 6. Delivering cylinders to testing agency's laboratory. 7. Maintaining field test data sheet for each set of concrete specimens. The completed data sheet shall show the following information: laboratory number, date, plant, truck number, time batched, time sampled, air temperature, concrete temperature, inspector, mix design number, required strength, unit weight, air content, slump, locations of placement, 7 -day and 28 -day strengths. 8. Contractor shall provide stable, lockable insulated storage box thermostatically controlled to maintain temperature between 60 degrees and 80 degrees F. for storage cylinders for first 24 hours after molding. Box shall have minimum capacity of 40 cu. ft. Locate box in a permanent lockable area of approximately 100 sq.ft. Limit access to testing agency personnel and Contractor's designated agency. E. Acceptance of Concrete: 1. Compressive strength of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of all sets of two compressive strength test results equal or exceed the required design compressive strength and no individual strength test results is less than 90% of the required design compressive strength. Whenever this criteria is not met, core tests shall be taken in those areas with questionable concrete, as directed by the Architect. F. Architect Inspection: Notify Architect at least 48 hours prior to placing concrete to allow for inspection. G. Use of Fly Ash: To the extent that it supports concrete strength and performance characteristics specified on the drawings and elsewhere in this section, Bank of America encourages the use of fly ash in concrete mix design. 1.2 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings: Submit for concrete reinforcement. Indicate type, size and location of all reinforcement. Indicate fabrication details. Details not indicated shall comply with ACI 315-99. B. Mix Design: Submit for each type and class of concrete. In particular, include percentage of fly ash content in mix design. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Mix and transport concrete in accordance with ACI 304R-00. B. Delivery tickets to indicate time and date truck leaves the plant and the time the truck is completely unloaded. 03000-2 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA C. No water shall be allowed to be added over and above that indicated in the accepted design mix. 1.4 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Environmental Conditions: 1. Cold weather concreting shall be in accordance with ACI 306R, "Cold Weather Concreting" when condition at the site tends to impair the quality of freshly mixed or hardened concrete. 2. Hot weather concreting shall be in accordance with ACI 305R, "Hot Weather Concreting" when condition at the site tends to impair the quality of freshly mixed or hardened concrete. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. Formwork: 1. Lumber: Square edge, #2 Grade. 2. Plywood: B -B Plyform — EXT -APA. B. Reinforcement: 1. Welded Wire Fabric: Meeting ASTM A185-97. 2. Bars: Meeting A615-82, Grade 40 for bars #2 and smaller; Grade 60 for bars #3 and larger. 3. Accessories: Galvanized. 4. Supports for Reinforcement: a. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI specifications, or concrete bricks. Do not use wood, brick, or other unacceptable materials. b. Provide supports contacting forms with either hot -dipped galvanized or plastic protected legs. C. Concrete Materials: 1. Portland Cement: Meeting ASTM C150-84, Type I or III. Only one brand of cement shall be used for all concrete work. 2. Normal Weight Fine Aggregates: Meeting ASTM C33-84. 3. Normal Weight Coarse Aggregates: Meeting ASTM C33-84, Size No. 57, Class Designation 1S. 4. 5. Water: Clean, potable. 6. Admixtures: a. Water Reducing Admixture: "Eucon WR -75" by the Euclid Chemical Company, "Pozzolith 220-N" by Master Builders or "Plastocrete" by Sika Corporation. The admixture shall conform to ASTM C494-82, STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 03000-3 Gensler 01.3154.000 April 30, 2008 Issue for Permit and Bid Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwilla, WA Type A, and not contain more chloride ions than are present in municipal drinking water. b. Water Reducing, Retarding Admixture: "Eucon Retarder -75" by the Euclid Chemical Company, "Pozzolith 100-XR" by Master Builders or "Plastiment" by Sika Chemical Corporation. The admixture shall conform to ASTM C494-82, Type D, and not contain more chloride ions than are present in municipal drinking water. c. High Range Water Reducing Admixture (Superplasticizer): "Eucon 37" by The Euclid Chemical Company or "Sikament" by Sika Corporation. The admixture shall conform to ASTM C494-82, Type F or G, and not contain more chloride ions than are present in municipal drinking water. d. Non -Chloride Accelerator: "Accelguard 80" by The Euclid Chemical Company, "Pozzutec 20" by Master Builders, or "Plastocrete 161FL" by Sika Corporation. The admixture shall conform to ASTM C494-82, Type C or E, and not contain more chloride ions than are present in municipal drinking water. e. Air Entraining Admixture: Conforming to ASTM C260-77. f. Calcium Chloride: Calcium chloride or admixtures containing more than 0.1% chloride ions are not permitted. g. Certification: Written conformance to above mentioned requirements and the chloride ion content will be required from the admixture manufacturer prior to mix design review by the Architect. D. Filler Strips for Expansion Joints: Non -extruding type cane fiber board impregnated with bituminous material. E. Curing and Sealing Compound: The compound shall conform to Federal Specification TT -C -800A, 30% solids content minimum, and have test data from an independent laboratory indicating a maximum moisture loss of 0.030 grams per sq. cm. when applied at a coverage rate of 300 sq.ft. per gallon. Manufacturer's certification required. The compatibility of the compound with tile and/or carpet adhesives shall be verified before use. 1. Acceptable Products: a. "Super Diamond Clear" by the Euclid Chemical Company. b. "Cure & Seal 31% UV" Symons Corporation. c. "Kure -N -Seal 30" by Sonneborn/ChemRex. d. "Kurez DR" by the Euclid Chemical Company (Dissipating Curing Compound). 2. Type: Styrene butadiene acrylic based compound except "Kurez DR" which is a resin cure. F. Construction Joints for Slabs on Grade: Minimum 24 ga. galvanized steel forming keyed joint full depth of slab. Furnish complete with stake pins. G. Contraction (control) Joints for Slabs on Grade: 1. Saw cuts within 24 hours or plastic inserts. 03000-4 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review 2. Acceptable Products: a. Greenstreak Plastic Products, "Zipcap". b. Vinylex Corp., "Zip -per Strip". 3. Depth: 1" or 'A slab thickness, whichever is greater. Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 2.2 ABRASIVE AGGREGATE: A. Aluminum oxide or emery graded from particles retained on a #50 mesh screen to particles passed by a 1/8"screen. 2.3 CONCRETE STRENGTH: A. Concrete design strength shall be as indicated on the drawings. B. Mix Designs shall be in accordance with Method 1 or Method 2 of ACI 301. C. All concrete shall contain the specified water reducing admixture, water reducing, retarding admixture and/or high range water reducing admixture (superplasticizer). All concrete slabs placed at air temperatures below 50 degrees F° shall contain the specified non -chloride accelerator. All concrete required to be air entrained shall contain an approved air entrained admixture. All pumped concrete, concrete for industrial slabs, concrete required to be watertight and concrete with a water -cement ratio below 0.50 for 3000 PSI concrete and 0.45 for 5000 PSI concrete shall contain the specified high range water reducing admixture (superplasticizer). D. Air Content: All concrete exposed to freezing and thawing and/or required to be watertight shall have an air content of 4.5% to 7.5%. All interior slabs subject to abrasion shall have a maximum air content of 3%. E. Water -Cement Ratio: All concrete subjected to freezing and thawing shall have a maximum water -cement ratio of 0.45. All concrete required to be watertight and/or subjected to deicers shall have a maximum water -cement ratio of 0.45. F. Slump: All concrete containing mid-range water reducing admixture shall have a maximum slump of 7" (+/- 1") unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. All concrete containing the high range water reducing admixture (superplasticizer) shall have a maximum slump 8" (+/- 1") unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. The concrete shall arrive at the job site at a slump of 3" to 5", to be verified, then the high range water reducing admixture added to increase the slump to the approved level. All other concrete shall have a slump of 3" to 5". STRUCTURAL, CONCRETE 03000-5 Gensler 01.3154.000 PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 FORMS: April 30, 2008 Issue for Permit and Bid Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwilla, WA A. Earth forms may be used for footing forms where sides of the excavation are cut true, in firm soil. B. Forms: Construct to conform to the shape, lines, grades and dimensions indicated. Make forms substantial and sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of liquid and braced or tied together to maintain position and shape. Forms shall not deflect under the deadload weight of the liquid concrete of construction loads. C. Build bulkheads with keys in footings and slabs where necessary to stop concrete placement. Submit locations of construction joints and sequence of pours to Architect for acceptance before starting concrete placement. Form construction joints in slabs using keyed joints; control joints by saw cutting or installation of specified joints. D. Apply form release agent to forms immediately prior to placing concrete. Clean forms prior to re -use. 3.2 REINFORCEMENT: A. Metal reinforcement shall be protected by concrete cover. Where not otherwise shown on the drawings, the thickness of concrete over the reinforcement shall be as follows: 1. Where concrete is deposited against ground without the use of forms: Not less than 3". 2. Where concrete is exposed to the weather, or exposed to the ground by placed in forms: Not less than 2" for bars more than 5/8" diameter and 1-1/2" for bars 5/8" or less in diameter. B. Lap joints in wire mesh reinforcement 8" and extend mesh within 1" of sides and ends of slabs. C. Splicing of reinforcement will not be permitted except where shown on drawings. D. Cleaning: Clean reinforcement of mill scale and of coatings that would destroy or reduce bond before placing. Where there is delay in depositing concrete after reinforcement is placed, steel shall be reinspected and where necessary recleaned. 3.3 PLACING CONCRETE: A. Place no concrete until all embedded items and reinforcement have been placed in forms and Architect's acceptance has been obtained. Ample notice shall be given Architect of an impending pour so that he may inspect work prior to placing. B. Convey concrete from mixer to place of final deposits by methods that will prevent segregation or loss of material. 03000-6 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA C. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to final position to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. Placing shall be carried on at such a rate that concrete is at all times plastic and flows readily into spaces between reinforcement. Once placing is started, it shall be carried on as a continuous operation until placement of the section is complete. D. Work concrete into forms, around bars and embedded items with spades, rods, trowels, and vibration, so as to produce a solid homogeneous mass, free of pockets, voids and honeycombs. E. Make and locate construction joints so as to least impair the strength of the structure. Where a joint is made, clean surface of the concrete and remove laitance. In addition, mechanically roughen, wet and slush vertical joints with coat of neat cement grout immediately before placement of new concrete. F. When pouring slab on grade, one person with no other duties shall raise the welded wire fabric and place it in the proper position. G. Finishing: Finishes for cast -in-place concrete shall be in accordance with ACI -301, and as follows: 1. Interior Floor Slabs: Trowel finish. 2. Exterior Slabs, Stairs, and Platforms: Non -Slip Broom finish. 3. Exterior Stair Treads: Abrasive Aggregate Finish. 4. Unexposed Concrete: As -cast rough form finish. H. Cure all concrete in accordance with provisions of ACI 301-99 (rev. 1981). All concrete shall be kept continuously moist and above 50 degrees F. for seven days. The time requirement may be reduced to three days when high early strength concrete is used. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Compression Tests: Test specimens in accordance with ASTM C32-73 (1979), C39-83, C172-82 and C192-81. At project site, prepare cylinders for testing and perform required tests of concrete. Make four cylinders for each sample of concrete to be tested; one to be broken at seven days, two at 28 days for strength compliance, and one held in reserve. If 28 -day tests indicate specified strength, reserve cylinder may be discarded. B. Core Tests: Core tests, at Contractor's expense, shall be required whenever concrete fails to meet the "Acceptance of Concrete" criteria. Cores shall be taken under the direction of Architect. Criteria for acceptance of cores shall be as described in ACI 318, Section 5.6.5.2. Additional core tests, at Contractor's expense, may be required by Architect whenever other requirements of these specifications are not complied with. C. Load Tests: Perform, at Contractor's expense, when core testing is inconclusive or impracticable. Evaluate load tests in accordance with ACI -318 and 301. STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 03000-7 Gensler 01.3154.000 April30, 2008 Issue for Permit and Bid Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwilla, WA D. Test for Air Content: Perform each time a set of cylinders is prepared for compression testing. Test in accordance with ASTM C 173-78 for lightweight concrete and ASTM C- 231-82 for normal weight concrete. E. Slump Test: Perform each time a set of cylinders is prepared for compression testing. Test in accordance with ASTM C 143-78. F. Shrinkage Test: Perform only if directed by Architect. 3.5 FREQUENCY OF TESTING: A. Take samples for compressive strength tests for each class of concrete for each 75 cu.yd. Minimum of one sample for each day of pouring. Minimum of one sample for each class of concrete poured. 3.6 ADDITIONAL TESTING: A. Perform additional testing of materials to determine compliance with Contract Documents when directed by Architect. Contractor shall furnish samples and deliver them to testing agency's laboratory. B. Additional testing will be paid for as extra work in accordance with Contract Condition. END OF SECTION 03000 03000-8 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review SECTION 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following: 1. Face brick. 2. Mortar and grout. 3. Ties and anchors. 4. Embedded flashing. 5. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. B. Related Sections include the following: Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1. Division 7 Section "Anti -Graffiti Coatings" for anti -graffiti coatings applied to unit masonry assemblies. 2. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for sheet metal flashing. 3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing control and expansion joints in unit masonry. • C. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following: • 1. Anchor sections of adjustable masonry anchors for connecting to structural frame, installed under Division 5 Section "Structural Steel." D. Products installed, but not furnished, under this Section include the following: 1. Steel lintels and shelf angles for unit masonry, furnished under Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications." 2. Manufactured reglets in masonry joints for metal flashing, furnished under Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 1.2 REFERENCES A. Brick Industry Association, Principles of Brick Masonry, Reston, VA, BIA 1989. B. Brick Industry Association, Technical Notes on Brick Construction, No. 31, "Bonds and Patterns In Brick Masonry," January, 1995. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide unit masonry that develops net -area compressive strengths (fm) at 28 days as indicated. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Copyright 2008 Gensler 04810 - 1 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1. Determine net -area compressive strength (fm) of masonry from average net -area compressive strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit -strength method) according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and CBC Section 2105A 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. 2. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end -dam units, and other special applications. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For the following: 1. Face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks. 2. Colored mortar. 3. Weep holes/vents. D. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following: 1. Face brick. 2. Special brick shapes. 3. Pigmented mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on Project. Label Samples to indicate types and amounts of pigments used. 4. Weep holes/vents. 5. Accessories embedded in masonry. E. Qualification Data: For testing agency. F. Material Certificates: Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with requirements including compliance with standards and type designations within standards. Provide for each type and size of the following: 1. Masonry units. a. Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements. b. For bricks, include size -variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls within specified tolerances. c. For exposed brick, include material test report for efflorescence according to ASTM C 67. 2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer. 3. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 4. Joint reinforcement. 5. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories. G. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 2 Copyright 2008 Gensler • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1. Include test reports, per ASTM C 780, for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. H. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type, provide statement of average net -area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and resulting net -area compressive strength of masonry determined according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and CBC Section 2105A. I. Cold -Weather and Hot -Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with cold -weather requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. B. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one source from a single manufacturer for each product required. C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, inc luding color for exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. D. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. 1. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, according to ASTM C 67 for compressive strength. 2. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content. 3. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 1019. E. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for mockups. 1 Build sample panels for typical exterior wall in sizes approximately 48 inches long by 48 inches high by full thickness. 2. Include sealant joint. 3. Clean one-half of exposed faces of panels with masonry cleaner indicated. 4. Protect approved sample panels from the elements with weather -resistant membrane. 5. Approval of sample panels is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; aesthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Copyright 2008 Gensler 04810 - 3 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA a. Approval of sample panels does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in sample panels unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing. F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.6 DELNERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. B. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture -resistant containers designed for lifting and emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with weatherproof cover. C. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 36 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place. B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain -splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry. D. Cold -Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold -weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Copyright 2008 Gensler 04810 - 4 • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1. Cold -Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing cleaning. E. Hot -Weather Requirements: Comply with hot -weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work. 2.2 .MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Basis of Design Product: Design is based on the named product. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated or a comparable product by another manufacturer. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.3 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to exceed tolerances and to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not uses units where such defects, including dimensions that vary from specified dimensions by more than stated tolerances, will be exposed in the completed Work or will impair the quality of completed masonry. 2.4 BR[CK A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows: 1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished. 2. Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate special conditions, including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams, sashes, and lintels. 3. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Copyright 2008 Gensler 04810 - 5 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 4. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view. a. Provide cut or formed quoin bricks with stretcher and header finish surfaces, 3.5 by 2.5 by 6.0 inches, at outside corners. b. , Provide cut or formed bricks with header finish surface, 3.5 by 2.5 by 3.5, for header bricks for single-wythe Flemish Bond pattern. 5. Provide lipped brick at shelf angles, in configurations indicated in Drawings. B. Face Brick: ASTM C 216, Grade SW, Type FBX. 1. Manufacturer: Mutual Materials Company. 2. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net -area compressive strength of 8000 psi. 3. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. 4. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated "not effloresced." 5. Size: Modular, 3 5/8 inches wide by 2 1/4 inches high by 7 5/8 inches long. 6. Color: Limestone. 7. Texture: Mission. 2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Colored Cement Product: Packaged blend made from portland cement and hydrated lime and mortar pigments, all complying with specified requirements, and containing no other ingredients. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Colored Portland Cement -Lime Mix: Mutual Materials Company; DesignMix Colored Mortar Mix. 2. Formulate blend as required to produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard colors. 3. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight. B. Water: Potable. 2.6 REINFORCEMENT A. Masonry Joint Reinforcement: UBC Standard 21-10; hot -dip galvanized, carbon -steel wire 1. Wire size: 9 gage. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Copyright 2008 Gensler 04810 - 6 • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 2.7 TIES AND ANCHORS April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent paragraphs that are made from materials that comply with eight subparagraphs below, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Hot -Dip Galvanized, Carbon -Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating. 2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M. 3. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway through veneer but with at least 5/8 -inch cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent 90 degrees and extend 2 inches parallel to face of veneer. C. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structure: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. 1. Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4 -inch- diameter, hot -dip galvanized steel wire. 2. Tie Section for Steel Frame: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch of masonry face, made from 0.188 -inch- diameter, hot -dip galvanized steel wire. D. Adjustable Masonry -Veneer Anchors 1. General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to wood or metal studs, and as follows: a. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf load in both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch. 2. Screw Attached Seismic Masonry -Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a metal anchor section and a connector section designed to engage a continuous wire embedded in the veneer mortar joint. a. Anchor Section: Gasketed sheet metal plate, 1-1/4 inches wide by 6 inches long, with screw holes top and bottom; top and bottom ends bent to form pronged legs to bridge insulation or sheathing and contact studs; and raised rib -stiffened strap, 5/8 inch wide by 6 inches long, stamped into center to provide a slot between strap and plate for inserting wire tie. Provide anchor manufacturer's standard, self -adhering, modified bituminous gaskets manufactured to fit behind anchor plate and extend beyond pronged legs. b. Connector Section: Triangular wire tie and rigid PVC extrusion with snap -in grooves for inserting continuous wire. Size wire tie to extend at least halfway through veneer but with at least 5/8 -inch cover on outside face. c. Fabricate sheet metal anchor sections and other sheet metal parts from 0.067 -inch - thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Copyright 2008 Gensler 04810 - 7 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA d. Fabricate wire connector sections from 0.188 -inch- diameter, hot -dip galvanized, carbon -steel wire. e. Product: No substitutions. 1) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. X -Seal with Byna-Lok Wire Tie and X -Seal Tape. 3. Stainless -Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: Proprietary fastener consisting of carbon - steel drill point and 300 Series stainless-steel shank, complying with ASTM C 954 except manufactured with hex washer head and neoprene washer, No. 10 diameter by length required to penetrate steel stud flange with not less than three exposed threads. a. Product: No substitutions. 1) SX Fastener by SFS Stadler. 2.8 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing, where flashing is exposed or partly exposed and where indicated, complying with Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" and as follows: 1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 0.016 inch thick. 2. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper -bearing lead sheet, 17.2 oz./sq. ft. (0.60 mm thick). 3. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches long minimum, but not exceeding 12 feet. Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing. 4. Metal Flashing Terminations: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and out to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend metal back on itself for 3/4 inch and down into joint 3/8 inch to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod. B. Flexible Flashing: Provide rubberized asphalt flashing with stainless steel drip edge: 1. Rubberized -Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable, adhesive rubberized -asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross -laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040 inch. a. Products: 1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Peel -N -Seal. 2) Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofmg; CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing. 3) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur -O -Wal Division; Dur -O -Barrier -44. 4) Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Perm -A - Barrier Wall Flashing. 5) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 82 Rubberized -Asphalt Thru-Wall Flashing. 6) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Textroflash. 7) Polyguard Products, Inc.; Polyguard 300. 8) Polytite Manufacturing Corp.; Poly -Barrier Self -Adhering Wall Flashing. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 8 Copyright 2008 Gensler • • • • 411) • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review 9) Williams Products, Inc.; Everlastic MF -40. C. Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, chemically curing sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications recommended by flexible flashing manufacturer as required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. D. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; formulated from neoprene, urethane or PVC. B. Preformed Control -Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene -butadiene -rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. C. Bond -Breaker Strips: Asphalt -saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). D. WeepNent Products: Use one of the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Cellular Plastic WeepNent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV -resistant polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch less than depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's standard. a. Products: 1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Maze weep vent. 2) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur -O -Wal Division; Cell Vents. 3) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 85 Cell Vent. 4) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Quadro-Vent. 5) Wire -Bond; Cell Vent. 2. Mesh WeepNent: Free -draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch less than depth of outer wythe; in color selected from manufacturer's standard. a. Products: 1) Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net Weep Vents. E. Cavity Drainage Material: Free -draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade within the wall cavity. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Copyright 2008 Gensler 04810 - 9 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review 1. Provide one of the following configurations: Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA a. Strips, full -depth of cavity and 10 inches (250 mm) high, with dovetail shaped notches 7 inches (175 min) deep that prevent clogging with mortar droppings. b. Strips, not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) thick and 10 inches (250 mm) high, with dimpled surface designed to catch mortar droppings and prevent weep holes from clogging with mortar. 2. Available Products: a. Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Break. b. Archovations, Inc.; CavClear Masonry Mat. c. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur -O -Wal Division; Polytite MortarStop. d. Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net. F. Elastomeric Sealant: See Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 1. Sealant for Joints in Masonry Veneer Cladding: Multicomponent, nonsag, low -modulus, urethane sealant. G. Asphalt Dampproofing for Concrete Backup: Cut-back asphalt complying with ASTM D 4479, Type I, or asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1227, Type III or IV. 2.10 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard -strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. 1. Manufacturers: a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc. b. EaCo Chem, Inc. c. ProSoCo, Inc. 2.11 MORTAR MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air -entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement and lime. B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Copyright 2008 Gensler 04810 - 10 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA • C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated. • • 1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type S. 2. For exterior, above -grade, load-bearing and non -load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non -load-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N. 3. For interior non -load-bearing partitions, Type 0 may be used instead of Type N. D. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product. 1. Application: Use pigmented mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following units: a. Face brick. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work. 2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. B. Before installation, examine rough -in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated. B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections. C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equiipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening. D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor -driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces concealed and, where possible, cut edges concealed. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Copyright 2008 Gensler 04810 - 11 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. 1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed. F. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements: 1. For dimensions m cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus. 1/2 inch (12 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). 2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch (12 mm). 3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) in a story height or 1/2 inch (12 mm) total. B. Lines and Levels: 1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units. C. Joints: 1. Far bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm). 2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). 3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch (9 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Copyright 2008 Gensler 04810 - 12 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm). Do not vary from adjacent bed joint and head joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). 5. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) from one masonry unit to the next. 3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement -type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less -than -half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond pattern. 1. Pattern starting point: As indicated in Drawings. 2. Cut bricks are permitted where required to maintain brick pattern. Do not use units with less than nominal 4 -inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. 3. Joint size: 3/8 inch. C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 4 -inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4 -inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry. E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated. G. Build non -load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above. 2. Wedge non -load-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate, or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead -load deflection of structure above approaches final position. 3. At fire -rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure above to comply with Division 7 Section "Fire -Resistive Joint Systems." UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Copyright 2008 Gensler 04810 - 13 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review 3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints. B. Cut exposed joints flush when thumbprint hard, unless otherwise indicated. C. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct -applied finishes (other than paint), unless otherwise indicated. 3.6 CAVITY WALLS A. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not attempt to trowel or remove mortar fins protruding into cavity. 3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with the following: 1. Provide an open space not less than 1 -inch in width between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials. 2. Anchor masonry to structural members with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches o.c. horizontally. 3.8 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing with seismic masonry -veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements: 1. Fasten screw -attached seismic anchors through sheathing to wall framing with metal fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses one fastener. 2. Insert slip -in anchors in metal studs as sheathing is installed. Provide one anchor at each stud in each horizontal joint between sheathing boards. 3. Embed tie sections in masonry joints. Provide not less than 2 inches of air space between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing. 4. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and down. 5. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 18 inches o.c. vertically and 24 inches o.c. horizontally, with not less than 1 anchor for each 2 sq. ft. of wall area. Install additional UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Copyright 2008 Gensler 04810 - 14 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA • anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 8 inches, around perimeter. 3.9 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in - plane wall or partition movement. B. Form expansion joints in brick with one of the following methods: 1. Build in compressible joint fillers where indicated. 2. Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 - inch, for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." a. Tool sealant flush to match mortar joints. b. Dust sealant with mortar aggregate to match mortar joints. C. Provide horizontal, pressure -relieving joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a cornpressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," but not less than 3/8 inch. 1. Locate horizontal, pressure -relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry. • 3.10 LINTELS A. Install steel lintels where indicated. Provide lipped bricks as indicated in Drawings. B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. • 3.11 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. B. Install flashing as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through -wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2. At masonry -veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer, across air space behind veneer, and up face of sheathing at least 8 inches; with upper edge tucked under building paper or building wrap, lapping at least 4 inches. 3. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches to form end dams. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Copyright 2008 Gensler 04810 - 15 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 4. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination. C. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built into masonry. D. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: 1. Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes. 2. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. E. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage material in Part 2 "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspectors: Owner will engage qualified independent inspectors to perform inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform inspections. B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections indicated below and prepare test reports: 1. Payment for these services will be made by Owner. 2. Retesting of materials failing to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. C. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof. D. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 67 for compressive strength. E. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength. 3.13 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Copyright 2008 Gensler 04810 - 16 • • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA C. In -Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. 4. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces. 3.14 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site. B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil - contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches in each dimension. 2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of masonry waste. 3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of fmished grade. C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. See Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal". END OF SECTION 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES Copyright 2008 Gensler 04810 - 17 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review SECTION Q5120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Extent of structural steel work is shown on drawings, including schedules, notes and details to show size and location of members, typical connections and type of steel required. B. Structural steel is that work defined in AISC "Code of Standard Practice" and as otherwise shown on drawings. C. Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications are specified in Section 05500 "Metal Fabrication". 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of following, except as otherwise indicated. B. AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges". C. AISC "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings", including the "Commentary" and supplements thereto as issued. D. AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" approved by the Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering Foundation. E. AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code". F. ASTM A 36/A 992 "General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling and Bars for Structural Use". G. Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure". 1.3 TESTING AND INSPECTION: A. An independent testing laboratory, selected and paid for by the Contractor and acceptable to the Architect, shall check structural steel erection for compliance with AISC Specifications including Section 8 of the "Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts", 1985 Edition. Contractor shall coordinate erection and testing to facilitate construction. B. Inspection will be required of a random selection of 10% of all high strength shop and field bolting. To be acceptable, 95% of all bolts tested shall comply with Section 8© of the AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts". If the STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-1 Firm Name date Bank of America A/E project number identification of bank project name city and state where project is located bolting fails to meet this requirements, bolts shall be reworked by the Contractor and additional tests of 50% of all bolts shall be made until the above requirements are met. Additional testing shall be at the Contractor's expense. C. Testing laboratory shall perform visual inspection on 10% of all fabricated pieces prior to shipping and on all field work (as applicable) at the site as follows: 1. Beam/Column Moment Connection Welds: 100% 2. Beam to Column/Ended Plate Welds and Brace Welds: 100% 3. Joist Girder to Column/Beam Welds: 50% 4. Joist to Beam/Embed Plate Welds: 10% 5. Edge Angle to Beam/Joist Welds: 10% 6. Miscellaneous Framing Welds: 10% To be acceptable, 85% of all visual welds shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1. If the welds fail to meet this requirement, the welds shall be reworked by the Contractor and additional visual inspections of 100% of all welds shall be made until the above requirements are met. Additional testing shall be at the Contractor's expense. D. Perform ultrasonic testing in accordance with AWS D1.1 on 100% of all partial and full penetration welds (if applicable). 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit producer's or manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for following products. Include laboratory test reports and other data to show compliance with specifications (including specified standards). 1. Mill reports covering chemical and physical properties. 2. High strength bolts (each type), including nuts and washers. 3. Structural steel primer paint. 4. Shrinkage -resistant grout. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings prepared under supervision of a registered professional engineer, including complete details and schedules for fabrication and assembly of structural steel members, procedures and diagrams. The Owner will not pay for additional charges due to redetailing fees associated with a three-dimensional detailing program. The detailer shall estimate and include any costs in the base bid associated with redetailing fees as a result of changes and/or revisions made to the shop drawings during the shop drawing review. C. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages to be installed by others. D. Inspection reports will include the following: 1. Welders Certification. 2. Weld Qualified Tests. 3. Visual Inspections. 05120-2 STRUCTURAL STEEL • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review 4. Results of specified tests. 5. Recommendations for further testing. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Deliver materials to the site at such intervals to ensure uninterrupted progress of the work. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast -in- place concrete or masonry, in ample time to not delay that work. B. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off the ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. Do not store materials on the structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to the members of the supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of work which will be exposed to view, use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes. B. Structural steel angles, plates and bars: ASTM A 36. C. Structural steel I -shapes: ASTM A 992 D. Hot -Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501. E. Cold -Formed steel tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B. F. Bolts: ASTM A 325. G. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, headed type unless otherwise indicated. H. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, regular low carbon steel bolts and nuts. I. Heavy -hex Nuts: ASTM A 563. J. Hardened Steel Washers: ASTM F 436. K. Structural Steel Primer Paint: Fabricator's standard rust -inhibiting primer. L. Non -Shrink Non -Metallic Grout: Pre -mixed, factory -packaged, non -staining, non- corrosive, non-gaseous grout complying with Corps of Engineers CRD -C621-83. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications of type specified in this section. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-3 Firm Name date Bank of America A/E project number identification of bank project name city and state where project is located 2.2 FABRICATION: A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly: Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC specifications and as indicated on final shop drawings. B. Properly mark and match -mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials. C. Where finishing is required, complete assembly, including welding of units, before start of finishing operations. Provide fmish surfaces of members exposed in final structure free of markings, burrs, and other defects. D. Connections: Weld or bolt shop connections, as indicated. E. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections or other connections are indicated. F. Provide high-strength threaded fasteners for principal bolted connections, except where unfinished bolts are indicated. G. Provide unfinished threaded fasteners for only bolted connections of secondary framing members to primary members (including purlins, girts and other framing members taking only nominal stresses) and for temporary bracing to facilitate erection. H. High Strength Bolted Construction: Install high-strength threaded fasteners in accordance with AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" (RCRBSJ). Bolts shall be "snug -tight". I. Holes for Other Work: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing, and for passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on final shop drawings. J. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing, and other specialty items as indicated to receive other work. K. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates. 05120-4 STRUCTURAL STEEL • • Gensler 32.2177.089 PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Erector must examine the areas and conditions under which structural steel work is to be installed, and notify the contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the erector. 3.2 ERECTION: A. Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Provide temporary shoring and bracing members with connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. Remove temporary members and connections when permanent members are in place and fmal connections are made. Provide temporary guy lines to achieve proper alignment of structures as erection proceeds. B. Temporary Planking: Provide temporary planking and working platforms as necessary to effectively complete work. C. Anchor Bolts: Furnish anchor bolts and other connectors required for securing structural steel to foundations and other in-place work. D. Furnish templates and other devices as necessary for presetting bolts and other anchors to accurate locations. E. Setting Bases and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond - reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates. F. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members on leveling nuts. G. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. H. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or plates to ensure that no void remain. Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure. I. For proprietary grout materials, comply with manufacturer's instructions. J. Field Assembly: Set structural frames accurately to lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust various members forming a part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact before assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. K. Level and plumb individual members of structure within specified AISC tolerances. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-5 Firm Name date Bank of America A/E project number identification of bank project name city and state where project is located L. Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on mean operating temperature of structure. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature at which structure will be when completed and in service. M. Bolts shall be "snug -tight". N. Splice members only where indicated and accepted on shop drawings. O. Erection Bolts: On exposed welded construction, remove erection bolts. P. Comply with AISC Specifications for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. Q. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by use of drift pins, except in secondary bracing members. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. R. Gas Cutting: Do not use gas -cutting torches in field for correcting fabrication errors in primary structural framing. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members that are not under stress, as acceptable to engineer. Finish gas -cut sections equal to a sheared appearance when permitted. S. Touch -Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas using same material as used for shop painting. T. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. END OF SECTION 05120 05120-6 STRUCTURAL STEEL • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review SECTION 05400 - COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings: Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1. Prior to fabrication of framing the Contractor shall submit fabrication and erection drawings to the Architect to obtain approval. 2. Indicate all member gauges, spacing and sizes. 3. Indicate shop and field assembly details, including cut and connections. 4. Indicate type and location of welds, bolts and fastening devices. 5. Shop drawings shall indicate all prefabricated framing, if used, with individual panel drawings for each condition. 6. Shop drawings and calculations must be signed and sealed by a professional engineer. See drawings for applicable codes. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Dale/Incor B. The Formetal Company, Inc. C. Unimast Inc. D. CSI 2.2 MATERIALS: A. All framing members shall be manufactured and supplied by one manufacturer, and be of the type and size as shown on the drawings and specified herein. B. All galvanized studs 12, 14 and 16 gauge shall be formed from steel that corresponds to the requirements of ASTM A653 SQ Grade 50 with a minimum yield of 50,000 psi. C. All galvanized 18 and 20 gauge studs, and all painted track, bridging, end closures and accessories shall be formed from steel that corresponds to the requirements of ASTM A653, SQ Grade 33, with a minimum yield of 33,000 psi. D. All galvanized material and accessories shall be formed from steel having a G-60 galvanized coating, meeting ASTM A653 and C955. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION WALLS: COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400-1 Firm Name date Bank of America A/E project number identification of bank project name city and state where project is located A. Erect framing and panels plumb, level and square in strict accordance with the approved shop drawings. B. Handling and lifting of prefabricated panels shall be done m a manner as to not cause distortion in any member. C. Track shall be securely anchored to the supporting structure as shown on the shop drawings. For studs installed prior to full dead load being applied, provide a vertical slip connection between structure and metal stud track. D. At track butt joints, abutting pieces of track shall be securely anchored to a common structural element, or they shall be butt -welded or spliced together. E. Studs shall be plumbed, aligned and securely attached to the flange or webs of both upper and lower tracks. For studs installed prior to full dead load being applied, provide a vertical slip connection between structure and metal stud track. F. Jack studs or cripples shall be installed below window sills, above window and door heads, at free standing stair rails, and elsewhere to furnish support, and shall be securely attached to supporting members. G. Wall stud bridging shall be attached in a manner to prevent stud rotation. Bridging rows shall be spaced according to the shop drawings. Minimum bridging shall be 5'-0" on center for non-loadbearing studs and 4'-0" o.c. for loadbearing studs. H. Framed wall openings shall include headers and supporting studs as shown on the shop drawings. I. Temporary bracing shall be provided until erection is completed. J. Splices in axially loaded studs shall not be permitted. K. Provision for structure vertical movement shall be provided. 3.2 RELATED EQUIPMENT: A. Cutting: All cutting shall be done with a power -driven saw with appropriate abrasive blade. No hand cutting will be permitted. All cuts shall be clean, accurate and true to line. B. Welding: Welding shall be in accordance with the applicable standards of the American Welding Society and manufacturer's recommendations. C. Screw attachment shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION 05400 05400-2 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes metal fabrications. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Exterior Metal Fabrications: All exterior metal fabrications shall be fabricated and installed to prevent buckling, opening up of joints and overstressing of welds and fasteners caused by a maximum change (range) in ambient temperature of 120 deg F (67 deg C) and a maximum surface temperature of +180 deg F (+82 deg C). 1. Dimensions shown on Drawings are based on an assumed ambient design temperature of +70 deg F (+21 deg C). Make all necessary adjustments and provisions for concealed expansion. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings detailing the fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. 1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data, for information only, signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE • 1.5 A. Fabricator/Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to those indicated for this Project for a minimum of 5 years, with a record of successful in- service performance, with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without causing delay in the work. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code --Steel." 2. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. STORAGE, DELIVERY AND HANDLING METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 1 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Store metal fabrications in a dry, well -ventilated, weathertight place. Deliver and handle so as to prevent any type of damage to the fabricated work. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Where metal fabrications are indicated to fit walls and other construction, verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. Allow for trimming and fitting. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. 2.2 FERROUS METALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Steel Tubing: Cold -formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500, or hot formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 501. C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40) minimum, unless otherwise indicated or required to satisfy the performance requirements; fmish as follows: 1. Black finish, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated. D. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 2 • 1 • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA • 2.3 PAINT A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast -curing, lead- and chromate -free, universal modified -alkyd primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT -P-664; selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and capability to provide a sound foundation for field -applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure. B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High -zinc -dust -content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, cornplying with SSPC-Paint 20. 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Provide Type 304 or 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc -plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon -head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers. C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. D. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3 (ASME B18.6.7M). 110 E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M). F. Wood Screws: Flat head, carbon steel, ASME B18.6.1. G. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, ASME B18.22.1 (ASME B18.22M). H. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel, ASME B18.21.1 (ASME B18.21.2M). • I. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Material for Interior Anchors: Carbon -steel components zinc -plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2. Material for Exterior Fasteners: Alloy Group 1 or 2 stainless-steel bolts complying with ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M) and nuts complying with ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M). J. Toggle Bolts: FS FF -B-588, tumble -wing type, class and style as needed. 2.5 GROUT A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory -packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 3 Gensler 32.2177.089 2.6 CONCRETE FILL April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Concrete Materials and Properties: Composed of ASTM C150 Type I Portland cement, ASTM C33 sand and coarse aggregates and potable water to produce a low slump mix suitable for placement. Grade coarse aggregate from 1/8" with at least 95 % passing a 3/8" sieve and not more than 10% passing a No. 8 sieve. Fill shall be proportioned to provide a minimum 28 -day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa). 2.7 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. 1. Welded connections may be used where bolted connections are shown. B. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs. C. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless otherwise indicated. Form bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Weld corners and seams continuously along entire line of contact to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, fmish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. E. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices and fasteners to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive screws, and similar items. G. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep holes where water may accumulate. H. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. I. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces. J. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat -head METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 4 • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA • (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous. Make up threaded connections tight so that threads are entirely concealed. • • K. Hot dip galvanize all exterior ferrous metal fabrications embedded in concrete. Hot dip galvanize all other items where specified or shown. 1. Exterior ferrous metal fabrications are defined as those items which are indicated to be installed in areas exposed to conditions which are not controlled by the building heating and cooling systems. 2. Interior ferrous metal fabrications are defined as those items which are indicated to be installed in areas exposed to conditions which are controlled by the building heating and cooling systems. 2.8 STEEL LADDERS A. General: Fabricate ladders for locations shown, with dimensions, spacings, details, and anchorages as indicated. 1. Comply with ANSI A14.3, unless otherwise indicated. B. Siderails: Continuous, 3/8 -by -2 -1/2 -inch (10 -by -64 -mm) steel flat bars, with eased edges, spaced 16 inches (406 mm) apart. C. Bar Rungs: 3/4 -inch- (19 -mm-) diameter steel bars, spaced 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. D. Fit rungs in centerline of side rails; plug -weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. E. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches (1500 mm) o.c. with welded or bolted steel brackets. Size brackets to support design loads specified in ANSI A14.3. F. Prime paint interior ladders. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports indicated and as necessary to complete the Work and which are not a part of the structural framework, including but not limited to framing and supports for overhead lobby door frames, ceiling hung televisions and VCR cradles, and tube framing for partial height walls, mechanical and electrical equipment. B. Fabricate units from structural -steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports at exterior locations; prime paint miscellaneous framing and supports at interior locations. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 5 Gensler 32.2177.089 2.10 PIPE BOLLARDS April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Fabricate pipe bollards from minimum 4" I.D. Schedule 80 steel pipe to the sizes, shapes and profiles shown on the drawings. B. Galvanize bollards after fabrication. C. Bollard Sleeves: Pre -manufactured protective sleeves that fit over pipe bollards and which are fabricated from materials which are ultraviolet resistant, antistatic, and durable to extreme temperatures. Each sleeve shall have a smooth surface with 2 one half inch wide red colored horizontal reflective strips recessed into the sleeve at the rounded top end of the sleeve. The sleeve shall be provided to suit bollard pipe diameter(s) and length(s) indicated. Furnish each sleeve with installation kit. Provide bollard sleeve in dark grey — manufacturer's standard color. 1. Post Guard; Encore (available through Robert Liles Parking Lot Services (903) 566-5499 voice/ (866) 821-0552 fax.). 2. Or approved equal. 2.11 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. 2.12 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot -dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed below: 1. ASTM A 123, for galvanizing steel and iron products. 2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware. B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous -metal surfaces by removing oil, grease, and similar contaminants in accordance with SSPC -SP 1 "Solvent Cleaning," followed with the SSPC surface -preparation specifications listed below and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications. Surface preparation shall be done after fabrication and immediately prior to shop painting. Apply shop coat of paint within 4 hours after cleaning and before rust bloom occurs. 1. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." C. Apply a minimum of one coat of shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized fmishes and those to be field welded, and those to be embedded in concrete, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1," for shop painting. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 6 • • • 1 • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2. Dry Film Thickness of Primer: 2.5 to 3.0 mils, dry film thickness. Apply paint thoroughly and evenly to dry surfaces, free from holidays and pinholes, in accordance with manufacturers directions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal fabrications to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete inserts, toggle bolts, through -bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors. Drill holes for bolts to the exact diameter of the bolt. Provide screws threaded full length to the screw head. B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete construction. D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. E. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth . and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. 3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings, if any. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 7 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review 3.3 INSTALLING PIPE BOLLARDS Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Bollards to be Inserted Into Cast -In -Place Footings: Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Support and brace bollards in position in footing excavations until concrete has been placed and cured. 1. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface. 2. Slide bollard sleeve over each bollard and secure in accordance with bollard sleeve manufacturer instructions. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop -painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0 -mil (0.05 -mm) dry film thickness. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 05500 05500/2-01/M METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 8 • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review SECTION 06105 - MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Thiis Section includes miscellaneous carpentry. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1. Submit data for wood -preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used, net amount of preservative retained, and chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material. 2. Submit data for fire -retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials, both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures when tested according to ASTM D 5516 and ASTM D 5664. 3. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, submit statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 4. Submit copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. B. Research/Evaluation Reports: Submit research/evaluation reports that are acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction and that show compliance with building code in effect for preservative -treated wood and fire -retardant -treated wood. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility for Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Obtain each type of fire retardant treated product from one source for both treatment and fire retardant formulation. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels; place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. B. Deliver gypsum sheathing materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum sheathing MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105-1 Gensler April 30, 2008 Bank of America 32.2177.089 CD Owner Review SouthCenter Tukwila, WA flat to prevent sagging. Handle gypsum sheathing to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Installation of gypsum sheathing materials shall be in strict accordance with the written recommendations of gypsum sheathing materials manufacturer. 1.6 PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Pre -Installation Conference: Prior to the start of the miscellaneous carpentry work, and at the Contractor's direction, meet at the site and review the installation procedures and required coordination with other work. Meeting shall include Contractor, Owner's representatives, metal window and curtain wall installer, light gage steel framing installer, flashing subcontractor, sealant installer, the Portland cement (stucco) plaster installer, as well as any other subcontractors or material technical service representatives whose work, or products, must be coordinated with the miscellaneous carpentry work. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S. 4. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2 - inch nominal (38 -mm actual) thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wood Panels (Plywood): 1. Plywood: Comply with DOC PS 1. 2. Factory mark panels with APA trademark evidencing compliance with grade requirements. 2.2 WOOD -PRESERVATIVE -TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: Pressure treat above ground items with waterborne preservatives to comply with AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood) for retention, penetration, and other requirements applicable to the species, product, treatment and condition of use specified and indicated. MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105-2 • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review 1. Preservative Chemicals: Chromated copper arsenate (CCA). Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA B. Kiln -dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15 percent for plywood. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark each treated item with the treatment quality mark of the SPIE. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, plywood sheathing, and similar members in connection with roofing and flashing. 2. Wood blocking and similar concealed members in contact with concrete. 3. Treatment Level: Using CCA chemicals for Southern Pine the required preservative retention shall be 0.40 lbs./cubic foot. E. Complete fabrication of items to be treated prior to treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment, coat cut surfaces to comply with AWPA M4. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. 2.3 FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where fire -retardant -treated materials are indicated, provide materials that comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Identify fire -retardant -treated wood with appropriate classification marking of UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. The selected treatment shall produce the following properties under conditions present after installation: 1. No reduction takes place in bending strength, stiffness and fastener holding capacities below values published by manufacturer of chemical formulation that are based on tests by a qualified independent testing laboratory of treated wood products identical to those indicated for this Project under elevated temperature and humidity conditions simulating installed conditions. 2. No other form of degradation occurs due to acid hydrolysis or other causes related to manufacture and treatment. 3. Metal fasteners do not corrode. B. Use: 1. Exterior Type: Use for exterior locations where indicated. 2. Interior Type (Typical): Type A High Temperature (HT). 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including rooftop equipment bases, support curbs, blocking, cants, and nailers. B. Fabricate miscellaneous lumber from dimensional lumber of sizes indicated and into shapes shown. MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105-3 Gensler April 30, 2008 Bank of America 32.2177.089 CD Owner Review SouthCenter Tukwila, WA C. For items of dimension lumber size, provide SPIB No. 2 or better grade lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content. 2.5 GYPSUM SHEATHING, FASTENERS, AND GYPSUM SHEATHING JOINT MATERIALS A. General: 1/2" thick gypsum sheathing board exceeding the requirements of ASTM C 1177 and ASTM C 79 and consisting of a water resistant silicone treated gypsum core, surfaced with inorganic glass mats on face and back, partially or completely embedded in core, topcoated with an alkali resistant surface coating, unsurfaced square edges. Board shall be resistant to wicking, moisture penetration, and delamination caused by surface water exposure and resistant to warping, rippling, buckling and sagging. 1. Product and Manufacturer: Dens -Glass Gold Exterior Sheathing; Georgia-Pacific Corp. B. Sheathing Fasteners: ASTM C 954, fine threaded, steel drilling and tapping screws, Type S-12, bugle head type, fluted tip, a minimum of 1-1/4 inches long, with organic -polymer coating or other corrosion -protective coating and specifically manufactured to attach sheathing to metal framing from 0.033 to 0.112" thick. C. Joint Sealant: Product compatible with gypsum sheathing recommended by manufacturer of sheathing for use indicated and specified. 1. Product and Manufacturer: Dow Corning 795 Building Sealant. 2.6 PANEL PRODUCTS A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment, Wall Hung Equipment and Furniture, Backing Panels: APA Exposure 1, C -D Plugged, fire -retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick. B. Plywood Sheathing: APA Rated Plywood Sheathing, Exposure 1 Durability Classification, 32/16 span index, preservative treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 15/32" inch thick; square edged. 2.7 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot -dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power -Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105-4 • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. (ASME B18.2.3.8M). Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Material: Carbon -steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of carpentry and that are too small to use: with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. B. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports for attaching other construction. C. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative -treated lumber. D. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated and according to applicable codes and recognized standards. E. Use fasteners of appropriate type and length. Install members without splitting wood; predrill when required. 3.2 WC)OD BLOCKING, CANT, AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attachment of adjacent work. Form to shapes indicated or required and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached to it. Coordinate location of adjacent work. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces. 3.3 LOCKER BASE INSTALLATION A. Concealed Wood Support Base: 2 -by -4 -inch nominal- (38 -by -89 -mm actual-) size, preservative -treated lumber. MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105-5 Gensler April 30, 2008 Bank of America 32.2177.089 CD Owner Review SouthCenter Tukwila, WA B. Install where indicated and where required for attachment of adjacent work. Form to shapes indicated or required and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached to it. Coordinate location of adjacent work. C. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces. 3.4 GYPSUM SHEATHING A. General: Install gypsum sheathing board according to manufacturer's instructions, ASTM C 1280, and GA -253 "Application of Gypsum Sheathing" Where conflicts arise the more stringent shall be required. B. Install gypsum sheathing board, gold side facing building exterior, with long lengths oriented parallel to grade. Locate edge joints parallel to and with vertical orientations on cold formed steel stud flanges. Stagger intermediate end joints of adjacent lengths of sheathing board. Install cold formed steel stud blocking where end joints do not bear against steel stud flanges. Butt boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16" of open space between panels. Do not force into place. Begin fastening from center of sheathing board and proceed toward edges and comers. Fasten gypsum sheathing board to perimeter framing and to each stud with sheathing fasteners, located a minimum of 3/8 inch from ends and edges of board units, as follows: 1. Space fasteners not more than 8 inches apart around perimeter at edge and end supports and 8 inches apart at intermediate (field) supports. 2. Sheathing fasteners shall be applied with a positive clutch electric power driven screwdriver equipped with an adjustable screw depth control head and a phillips bit. Apply pressure on surface of sheathing board adjacent to fasteners being driven to ensure that sheathing will be secured tightly to supporting framing. Drive fasteners to bear tight against and flush with surface of sheathing. Do not countersink. Drive fastener with shank perpendicular to face of board. C. Provide joint treatment in accordance with the sheathing manufacturers instructions at inside and outside corners, board to board butt joints, board field perimeters where sheathing butts to steel angles and channels (if any), and at penetrations. 1. Apply approximately a 3/8 -inch bead of silicone joint sealant along joints, comers, board to board butt joints, field perimeters and penetrations along their entire surface with a trowel. 2. Apply silicone joint sealant with a trowel to each exposed fastener head so that fastener heads are completely covered. D. Metal Flashings: Install stainless steel flashings as shown, or if not shown as indicated, and as specified in accordance with Section 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHINGS AND TRIM. E. Flexible Flashing Installation: See Section 07272 FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS. MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105-6 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review 3.5 PANEL PRODUCT INSTALLATION Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No. E30K, "APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial," and local utility company requirements, if any, for plywood backing panel applications indicated. B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: 1. Plywood Backing Panels: Secure to wall using proper fastening devices for substrates encountered spaced 12" o.c. maximum at perimeter `/2" from corners and three rows of 3 fasteners each in the backing panel field. Countersink fasteners flush with plywood surface. Butt adjacent panels without lapping. 2. Plywood Sheathing Application: Cover sheathing support framing with plywood sheathing and fasten to supports with power driven, winged reamer screw fasteners spaced 6" o.c. along supported panel edges and 12" o.c. for intermediate supports. END OF SECTION 06105 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105-7 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review 411 SECTION 06185 - GLUED -LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY • • A. Section includes framing using structural glued -laminated timber. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA B. Certificates of Conformance: Issued by a qualified testing and inspecting agency indicating that structural glued -laminated timber complies with requirements in AITC A190.1. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide factory -glued structural units produced by an AITC- or APA -licensed firm. 1. Factory mark each piece of structural glued -laminated timber with AITC Quality Mark or APA-EWS trademark. Place mark on surfaces that will not be exposed in the completed Work. B. Quality Standard: Comply with AITC A190.1. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with provisions in AITC 111. B. Individually wrap members using plastic -coated paper covering with water-resistant seams. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL GLUED -LAMINATED TIMBER A. General: Provide structural glued -laminated timber that complies with AITC 117 or research/evaluation reports acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide structural glued -laminated timber made from solid lumber laminations; do not use laminated veneer lumber. 2. Provide structural glued -laminated timber made with wet -use adhesive complying with AITC A190.1. GLUED -LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION 06185 - 1 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA a. Use adhesive that contains no urea -formaldehyde resins. B. Species and Grades for Structural Glued -Laminated Timber: Douglas fir -larch. C. Species and Grades for Beams and Purlins: 1 Species and Beam Stress Classification: Douglas fir -larch, 24F -1.8E. 2. Lay-up: Balanced. D. Appearance Grade: Industrial, complying with AITC 110. E. End Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, transparent, colorless wood sealer that is effective in retarding the transmission of moisture at cross -grain cuts and is compatible with indicated finish. F. Penetrating Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, transparent, penetrating wood sealer that is compatible with indicated finish. 2.2 TIMBER CONNECTORS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from the following materials: 1. Structural -steel shapes, plates, and flat bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Round steel bars complying with ASTM A 575, Grade M 1020. 3. Hot -rolled steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Structural Steel, Type SS, Grade 33. B. Finish steel assemblies and fasteners with rust -inhibitive primer, 2 -mil (0.05 -mm) dry film thickness. C. Hot -dip galvanize steel assemblies and fasteners after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Shop fabricate for connections to greatest extent possible, including cutting to length and drilling bolt holes. B. Camber: Fabricate horizontal and inclined members of less than 1:1 slope with either circular or parabolic camber equal to 1/500 of span. C. End -Cut Sealing: Immediately after end cutting each member to final length, apply a saturation coat of end sealer to ends and other cross -cut surfaces, keeping surfaces flood coated for not less than 10 minutes. D. Seal Coat: After fabricating, sanding, and end -coat sealing, apply a heavy saturation coat of penetrating sealer on surfaces of each unit. GLUED -LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION 06185 - 2 • • Gensler 32.2177.089 411 PART 3 - EXECUTION • 3.1 INSTALLATION April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. General: Erect structural glued -laminated timber true and plumb, and with uniform, close - fitting joints. Provide temporary bracing to maintain lines and levels until permanent supporting members are in place. 1. Lift with padded slings and protect corners with wood blocking. B. Fit structural glued -laminated timber by cutting and restoring exposed surfaces to match specified surfacing. 1. Predrill for fasteners using timber connectors as templates. 2. Dress exposed surfaces as needed to remove planing and surfacing marks. 3. Coat cross cuts with end sealer. C. Cutting: Avoid cutting after fabrication. Where field fitting is unavoidable, comply with requirements for shop fabrication. D. Repair damaged surfaces after completing erection. Replace damaged structural glued - laminated timber if repairs are not approved by Architect. E. Do not remove wrappings on individually wrapped members until they no longer serve a useful purpose including protection from weather, sunlight, soiling, and damage from work of other trades. 1. Slit underside of wrapping to prevent accumulation of moisture inside the wrapping. END OF SECTION 06185 GLUED -LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION 06185 - 3 • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes interior architectural woodwork. 1.2 SUBMITTALS Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing locations of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. Elevations shall be drawn at a scale of not less than 1/2" = 1'-0". Details shall be drawn at a scale of not less than 3" _= 1'-0". 1. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 2. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing, electrical, computer and telephone equipment and other items installed in architectural woodwork. 3. Show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and identification numbers indicating the flitch and sequence within the flitch for each leaf. B. Samples: Submit samples of the following: 1. Three 12" x 12" sample sets containing a minimum of 2 or more samples of transparent finished wood -veneer and plastic laminate veneered panel products, fabricated from each core product, for each veneer specified and demonstrating the proposed full range of appearance characteristics to be expected in completed work. Include at least one face - veneer seam in each sample. 2. Three (3) veneer leaves representative of and selected from each flitch to be used for transparent -finished woodwork. 3. Submit samples of each type of door specified showing construction and finishes selected. Samples shall be 12" x 12" corner section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single -Source Manufacturing and Installation Responsibility: Engage a qualified Manufacturer - acceptable to the Architect - to assume undivided responsibility for woodwork specified in this section, including fabrication, finishing, and installation. The manufacturer shall have had a history of successful experience in the custom fabrication and installation of architectural INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-1 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA woodwork comparable to that shown and specified, and who retains facilities with sufficient capacity and quality to produce the required architectural woodwork without causing delay to the project. B. Quality Standard: Fabricate and install all architectural woodwork in accordance with the applicable requirements of "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" 7th Edition, Version 1.2 1999, published by the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soilage, and deterioration. Do not deliver woodwork until painting, wet work, grinding, and similar operations that could damage, soil, or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas whose environmental conditions meet requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Obtain and comply with Woodwork Manufacturer's advice for optimum temperature and humidity conditions for woodwork during its storage and installation. Do not install woodwork until these conditions have been attained and stabilized so that woodwork is within plus or minus 1.0 percent of optimum moisture content from date of installation through remainder of construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-2 1 1 • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA • 2.1 MATERIALS A General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. • • B. Lumber Standards: Comply with applicable provisions for grading and workmanship of AWI Quality Standards, Sections 100-S-1, 100-S-4, 100-S-5, Grade I and the requirements shown ancl specified, where standards conflict the more stringent shall apply. Provide lumber surfaced 4 sides (S4S) and fabricated to profiles shown. All lumber shall be kiln dried to the moisture content indicated in AWI Section 100-S-11. 1. Furring, Blocking, Shims: No. 1 Common; Southern Pine. 2. Door and Sidelight Subframes: No. 1 Common Southern Pine, fire retardent treated to reduce combustibility. 3. Solid Hardwood for Veneer Finish: Plain sawn Yellow Poplar, free from checks, splits, sound knots. C. Wood Veneers: 1. Species, Matching, and Cut for Transparent Finish: Complying with AWI 1500 and the following: a. WD -1: Select Plain sliced American Black Cherry, book matched, minimum 5"width leaves, complying with HPVA HP -1, Grade A, matching plastic laminate color PL -3 D. Medium Density Fiberboard and Particleboard: One of the following: 1. Industrial Grade Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF): Comply with ANSI A208.2, Density Classification Interior MD, minimum 769 kg/m3 density except that minimums for modulus of elasticity and screw -holding capacity on face and edge shall be 36,600 kg/m2, 148 kg., and 125 kg., respectively.; minimum 3/4" thick, edged and faced as specified, fabricated with resins which result in a board product having a maximum formaldehyde emission of 0.05 ppm at a loading ratio of 0.43 m2/m3 when conducted in accordance with ASTM E1333. 2. Medium Density Particleboard: Comply, with ANSI A208.1, 2-M-1 or 2-M-3, minimum 720 kg/m3 density; minimum 3/4" thick, edged and faced as specified, fabricated with phenol formaldehyde resins which result in a board product having a maximum formaldehyde emission of 0.05 ppm at a loading ratio of 0.43 m2/m3 when conducted in accordance with ASTM E1333. E. Thermoset Decorative Overlay (Melamine): Particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, or medium -density fiberboard complying with ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, with surfice of thermally fused, melamine -impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT -1. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-3 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA F. High -Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, general purpose grade plastic laminate GP50 0.050" +1- 0.005" thick typically. 1. Types: As scheduled on the drawings. 2. Backing sheets: Non -decorative, high pressure laminate, NEMA LD3, Grade, types and thickness to match face sheets and equalize pull. G. Adhesives: Use only low emitting VOC and low formaldehyde crosslinked polyvinyl acetate (PVA) type adhesives which leave no glue lines on finished surfaces of architectural woodwork. 2.2 FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where indicated, use materials impregnated with fire -retardant chemical formulations indicated by a pressure process or other means acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction to produce products with fire -test -response characteristics specified. 1. Do not use treated material that does not comply with requirements of referenced woodworking standard or that is warped, discolored, or otherwise defective. 2. Use fire -retardant -treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants in solution to distinguish treated material from untreated material. 3. Treat only blocking and furring items. B. Fire -Retardant -Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Comply with AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood), for woodwork items indicated as fire -retardant treated. Use the following treatment type: 1. Interior Type A: Low -hygroscopic formulation. 2. Mill lumber after treatment, within limits set for wood removal that does not affect listed fire -test -response characteristics, using a woodworking plant certified by testing and inspecting agency. 3. Kiln -dry woodwork after treatment to levels required for untreated woodwork. 4. Discard treated lumber that does not comply with requirements of referenced woodworking standard. Do not use twisted, warped, bowed, discolored, or otherwise damaged or defective lumber. C. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide materials identical to those tested for the following fire performance characteristics per ASTM test methods indicated by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify treated lumber with classification marking of inspecting and testing organization in the form of separable paper label or, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, of imprint on lumber surfaces that will be concealed from view after installation.Surface Burning Characteristics: Not exceeding a INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-4 • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA flame spread of 25, and smoke developed of 50 when tested per ASTM E84 for 30 minutes. 2.3 CABINET HARDWARE A. Calbinet Door Hinges: Concealed all -metal furniture hinge type similar to Grass 3000, or equal, hinges, adaptable or engineered for 35 mm hinge cup boring pattern, with minimum 165 degree opening angle, 3- dimensional hinge having adjustments located in the steel hinge arm, steel height adjustment baseplates, steel or die-cast zinc hinge cups, and plastic insertion dowels to receive hinge screws . Automatic closing shall engage only in the last 10 degrees of swing. All hinge pins and linkages shall be hardened. Bright nickel finish (US15). 1. Hinge Quantity: Provide hinge quantity as recommended by hinge manufacturer based on cabinet door width, weight, thickness, door material, and hinge cup selection. B. Pulls: Baer Supply Company, 96mm C/C, FE14896-4 1, dull brass. C. Drawer Slides: All drawer slides shall permit the drawer to which they are attached to be removed by the occupant. 1. Pencil Drawers: Similar to Accuride 2006 having 3/4 extension carburized steel ball bearing, side mounting, 45 lbs. capacity medium duty load rating, cold rolled steel slide members and ball retainers, cushioned in and outstops, single movement action, positive stop, bright electro zinc plate finish. 2. Drawers less than 4" deep: Similar to Accuride 3832 having full extension carburized steel ball bearing, side mounting, 50 lb. capacity medium duty load rating, cold rolled steel slide members and ball retainers, cushioned in and outstops, detent-in, progressive action, positive stop, bright electro zinc plate finish. 3. Drawers greater than 4" but less than 8" deep: Similar to Accuride 3832 having full extension carburized steel ball bearing, side mounting, 100 Ib. capacity medium duty load rating, cold rolled steel slide members and ball retainers, cushioned in and outstops, detent-in, progressive action, positive stop, bright electro zinc plate finish. 4. Drawers greater than 8" deep: Similar to Accuride 4032 having full extension carburized steel ball bearing, rail mounting, 1501b. capacity heavy duty load rating, cold rolled steel slide members and ball retainers, cushioned in and outstops, detent-in, progressive action, positive stop, bright electro zinc plate finish. D. Silencers: Provide felt silencers on jamb and/or head and sill strike areas of all cabinet doors; 2 for :paired doors, 3 for single doors. E. Cabinet Shelving Supports: 1. Peg Type: Nickel plated shelf support pegs in brass sockets (Hafele 282.01.701 x 282.50.704). INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-5 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 2. In Cabinet Mounted, Mortised, Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests. F. Wall Mounted Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04102; with shelf brackets, B04112, capacity as required to suit purpose indicated. G. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2 -inch (51 -mm) OD unless otherwise indicated, color as selected by Architect from manufacturers standards unless otherwise shown, molded -plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage. H. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide fmish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA fmish number indicated. 1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base. I. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9. J. Door Hardware: At full sized doors, provide door hardware as scheduled under Section 08711 DOOR HARDWARE. K. Glass and Glazing: Refer to Section 08800, GLAZING L. Locks: Comply with BHMA A156.11 and the following: 1. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041; unless noted otherwise, provide 2 keys with each drawer lock, master keyed as directed by Owner. (CompX security Product Timberline 280 series with lock plug C200LP-08) 2. Cabinet Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121; unless noted otherwise, provide 2 keys with each cabinet door lock, master keyed as directed by Owner. (CompX Security Product Timberline 290 series with Lock plug C200LP-8.) 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide Custom grade interior woodwork complying with the referenced quality standard. B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas. C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. 1. Reinforcing shown is minimum. Provide additional steel and lumber reinforcing as required to sustain imposed loads and to ensure a rigid assembly. 2. Exposed surfaces shall be free from dents, tool marks, warpage, buckle, glue and open joints, or other defects affecting serviceability or appearance. Accurately fit all joints, INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-6 • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA corners and miters. Conceal all fasteners. Make threaded connections up tight so that threads are entirely concealed. D. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. The width of scribe and filler panels shall not exceed ''A", or Y2" clear dimension from adjacent wall to outside face of cabinet door in a 90 degree position, which ever is greater. E. Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing -in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. 2.5 PLASTIC -LAMINATE CABINETS A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for laminate cabinets. B. Grade: Custom. C. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay, unless otherwise indicated. D. Larninate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements: 1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: HGS. 2. Postformed Surfaces: HGP. 3. Vertical Surfaces: HGS. 4. Edges: HGS. E. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS . 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS. 3. Drawer Bottoms: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS. F. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As shown and scheduled on the drawings. G. Provide dust panels of 1/4 -inch (6.4 -mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers, unless located directly under tops. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-7 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review 2.6 PLASTIC -LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for high-pressure decorative laminate countertops. B. Grade: Custom. C. High -Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS. D. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As shown and scheduled on the drawings. E. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. F. Core Material: Particleboard or medium -density fiberboard. G. Core Material at Sinks: Particleboard made with exterior glue. 2.7 CLOSET & UTILITY SHELVING A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 600 requirements. B. Grade: Custom. C. Medium density fiberboard where indicated to be painted; medium density particle board where indicated for plastic laminate or melamine veneer. 1. Finishes: As shown and scheduled on the drawings. 2.8 WOOD DOOR FRAMES FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Frames and sidelights shall be constructed in accordance with AWI Premium Grade requirements for interior Grade I standards, provided in sizes as shown. In addition, comply with the following: 1. Construct in accordance with AWI Sections 100, 300, 700 and 900. 2. Frames shall be provided in single piece lengths of solid stock hardwood lumber. Form frames with dadoes or rabbeted joints, plant assembled for transparent veneer fmish. 3. Subframing shall be fabricated from solid lumber stock as hereinbefore specified; fire retardant treated. 4. Wood Beads for Light Openings: Manufacturer's standard flush designed, solid wood, rectangular shaped, back beveled or quirked, beads matching veneer species of door faces. Include glazing compounds or tapes sized for back bevel or quirk provided. Include finish nails for removable stops. 2.9 FLUSH WOOD DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 1300 requirements. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-8 • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 B. Grade: Premium. April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA C. Construction: PC -5 ME particleboard core doors with minimum 1/16" thick, properly dried low density hardwood or high density hardboard crossbanding and transparent finished wood face veneers of the specie and cut indicated. 1. Vertical Edges: Same species as face, lumber or veneer, sanded eased edges, without visible joints in lock or hinge edges and free of knife and saw marks. 2. Core: Single thickness slab of particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, 1 -LD -2, hot pressed with synthetic resin glue. 3. Bonding: Stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before veneering. Glue lines between the stiles and rails shall be minimum Type H complying with the performance requirements of WDMA TM -6. 4. Crossbanding materials shall extend full width of door with grain running horizontally, tapeless spliced without voids or show through (telegraphing), and directly glued to core and blocking. Sand crossbanding before application of face veneer. Face veneer shall extend full height of door with grain running vertically, tapeless spliced without voids or show through (telegraphing), and directly glued to crossband. Glue lines between the face veneer, crossbanding and blocking shall be of a type to comply with specified warranty using the hot plate process. D. Wood Beads for Light Openings: Manufacturer's standard flush designed, solid wood, rectangular shaped, back beveled or quirked, beads matching veneer species of door faces. Include glazing compounds or tapes sized for back bevel or quirk provided. Include finish nails for removable stops. E. Prefitting: Fit wood doors to suit frame opening sizes indicated. Comply with the following: 1. Jamb and Head Clearance: 1/8". 2. Sill Clearance: 1/4" from finished floor. F. Machining: Machine wood doors and frames, for hardware. Comply with final hardware schedules, shop drawings, and hardware templates. 1. Hardware Location: +/- 1/32". 2. Pulls and Pivots: +1/32", - 0". G. Door Thickness: 1-3/4". 2.10 FASTENERS, ANCHORS, AND MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Screws: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF -S-111 for applicable requirements. B. Nails: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF -N-105 for applicable requirements. C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required by each substrate for secure anchorage. • Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled -in-place anchors. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-9 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA D. Blind Splines: Specialty devices, as required for tight butt joining, types and size as recommended by woodwork fabricator. 2.11 SHOP FINISHING A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 1500, unless otherwise indicated. B. Production finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation. 1. Gluing of face veneers shall, where possible, be by the hot plate method; glued surfaces shall be in close contact throughout. Glue stains will not be permitted. 2. Gram of all transparent fmished wood shall run in the direction shown, or if not shown, as accepted on the shop drawings. C. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work. D. Exposed Surfaces: 1. Plastic Laminate Finishes: Gluing of plastic laminate surfacing materials shall be by the hot plate method, glued surfaces shall be in close contact throughout. Glue stains shall not be permitted. 2. Transparent Finish: a. Grade: Premium. b. AWI Finish System: Low VOC emitting, zero to low formaldehyde, Catalyzed Vinyl exceeding the performance requirements of AWI Finish System TR -5 for closed grain woods. c. Staining: Natural to match Architect's sample. d. Sheen: Match Architect's samples. E. Unexposed Wood Finish: Alkyd type primer -sealer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation. B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop -fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 INSTALLATION INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-10 • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA • A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved. • • 1. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight with no distortions, and with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces. Shim as required with concealed shims. 2. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged finish at cuts. B. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork Install light beads at doors and sidelites with fasteners spaced for opening size indicated. Install wood bead moldings with finish nails and countersink without striking bead. Fill countersunk heads with putty matching wood bead color. C. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets without sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer -head sheet metal screws through metal sheet backing, plywood backing, or metal framing behind wall finish. D. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. 1. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and to walls with adhesive. 2. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." E. Cornplete the finishing work specified in this Section to extent not completed at shop or before installation of woodwork. F. Doors: 1. Coordinate installation with the work of other trades to ensure exact fit and perfect alignment. Verify dimensions before proceeding and obtain measurements at job site for work required to be accurately fitted to other construction. 2. Do not install wood doors until interior wallboard work is complete and dried in the areas to receive the wood doors. 3. Do not subject wood doors to abnormal humidity, dryness or heat. Do not expose doors to sudden changes in temperature such as forced heat. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-11 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 4. Hang wood doors within frames. Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge matching clearances specified for factory prefitting. 5. Field cutting, fitting or trimming, if required, shall be executed in a workmanlike manner. Cuts made at the job site shall be sealed immediately after cutting, using a clear varnish or sealer. Restore finish before installation, if fitting or machining is required at the job site for factory fmished doors. 6. Hardware Installation: Install hardware in accordance with the instructions of the door hardware manufacturer; refer to Section 08711 DOOR HARDWARE. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop -applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer that ensures that woodwork will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-12 • • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes building insulation. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit product data for each product indicated. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source. B. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire -test - response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 for surface -burning characteristics by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. B. Protect plastic insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site before installation time. 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. BUILDING INSULATION 07210-1 Gensler 32.2177.089 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2A INSULATING MATERIALS April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards and, for preformed units, in sizes to fit applications indicated, selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. B. Extruded -Polystyrene Board Insulation: Extruded -polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, square edged; of type, density, and compressive strength indicated below: 1. Type IV, 1.6-lb/cu. ft. (26-kg/cu. m) minimum density and 25 -psi (173 -kPa) minimum compressive strength. a. Styrofoam Square Edge; Dow Chemical Co. b. Formular 250; Owens-Corning. C. Foil -Faced, Flexible Glass -Fiber Batt Insulation: Complying with ASTM C 665, Type III; faced on one side with foil -scrim -kraft vapor retarder; with maximum flame -spread and smoke - developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively; and of the following properties: 1. Nominal density of not less than 1.5 lb/cu. ft. (24 kg/cu. m) nor more than 1.7 lb/cu. ft. (26 kg/cu. m), thermal resistivity of 4 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F (27.7 K x m/W at 24 deg C). 2.2 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates. B. Vapor Retarder Tape: Minimum 5 mil tri -directional, reinforced, dead soft, aluminum foil faced tape with minimum 2 mil rubber or acrylic based adhesive, flame spread rated class A (25 or Less) per ASTM E84 and Classified to UL STD 723 General Use Tape. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. BUILDING INSULATION 07210-2 • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 3.2 PREPARATION A Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Install insulation to comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to project conditions, consult manufacturers technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with installation of insulation. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice and snow. C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER AND UNDER -SLAB INSULATION A. On vertical surfaces, set 2" thick extruded polystyrene boards in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer. 1. If not indicated, extend insulation to the full depth of the frost line below exterior grade level. Frost line depth shall be dictated by the applicable County or municipal codes, regulations and ordinances having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. B. Slab on Grade Insulation: Apply a single layer of 2" thick extruded polystyrene board insulation in a 48" wide band under the slab on grade as indicated around the entire perimeter of the building. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install extruded polystyrene boards at exterior of sheathing, according to Drawings. C. Set vapor -retarder -faced blanket units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces. 1. Maintain integrity of insulation with vapor retarders by taping joints, ruptures and edges 4111) of units adjoining other surfaces. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes BUILDING INSULATION 07210-3 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA and similar items penetrating vapor retarders by taping to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor barrier. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work using tape. D. Install glass fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. For metal -framed wall cavities support faced blankets by taping stapling flanges to flanges of metal studs. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION 07210-4 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review SECTION 07261- UNDERSLAB VAPOR RETARDING MEMBRANE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes underslab vapor -retarding membrane and accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Product test reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Provide vapor barrier and accessories from a single source. Provide accessories manufactured or approved by vapor barrier manufacturer for application indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Vapor Barrier: Fiber -reinforced or laminated membrane. 1. Properties: a. WVTR less than or equal to 0.006 gr/ftz/hr as tested by ASTM E 96 b. ASTM E 1745 Class A (Plastics) 2. Products: a. Fortifiber Building Systems Group; Moistop Ultra 15. b. Reef Industries; Griffolyn 15 Mil Green. c. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap (15 -mil) Vapor Barrier. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Vapor Retarding Seam Tape: 1. Water Vapor Transmission Rate: 0.3 perms or lower per ASTM E 96. B. Vapor Proofing Mastic: UNDERSLAB VAPOR RETARDING MEMBRANE 07261 - 1 Copyright 2008 Gensler Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review 1. Water Vapor Transmission Rate: 0.3 perms or lower per ASTM E 96. Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA C. Pipe Boots: Construct pipe boots from vapor barrier material, pressure sensitive tape and/or mastic per manufacturer's instructions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install according to ASTM E-1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install vapor retarder on leveled, compacted and tamped concrete base. Install with longest dimension parallel to direction of the pour of the concrete. C. Lap seams not less than 6 inches. Tape seams. D. Seal penetrations with manufactured or field -fabricated boots and with tape. END OF SECTION 07261 UNDERSLAB VAPOR RETARDING MEMBRANE Copyright 2008 Gensler 07261 - 2 • • 411 • 410 • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review SECTION 07 27 26 - FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Fluid -applied membrane air barrier, vapor retarding. 2. Fluid -applied membrane air barrier, vapor permeable. B. Related Sections include the following: Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1. Division 01 Section "Allowances" for testing and inspecting allowances. 2. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for embedded flashings. 3. Division 06 Section "Sheathing" for wall sheathings, wall sheathing joint -and -penetration treatments, building paper, and building wraps. 4. Division 07 low -slope roofing Sections for roof air barriers. 5. Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation" for foam -plastic board insulation. 6. Division 07 Section "Modified Bituminous Sheet Air Barriers." 7. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for sheet metal flashings. 8. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint -sealant materials and installation. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. ABAA: Air Barrier Association of America. B. Air Barrier Assembly: The collection of air barrier materials and auxiliary materials applied to an opaque wall, including joints and junctions to abutting construction, to control air movement through the wall. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Air barrier shall be capable of performing as a continuous vapor- permeable air barrier and as a liquid -water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental condensation or water penetration. Air barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits. B. Air Barrier Assembly Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0.02 cfm x sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (0.1 L/s x sq. m of surface area at 75 Pa); ASTM E 283. FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS Copyright 2008 Gensler 07 27 26 - 1 Gensler 32.2177.089 1.4 SUBMITTALS April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate; technical data; and tested physical and performance properties of air barrier. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of air barrier. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, counterflashing strip, penetrations, inside and outside comers, terminations, and tie- ins with adjoining construction. 1. Include details of interfaces with other materials that form part of air barrier. 2. Include details of mockups. C. Product Certificates: For air barriers, certifying compatibility of air barrier and accessory materials with Project materials that connect to or that come in contact with the barrier; signed by product manufacturer. D. Qualification Data: For Applicator. E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for air barriers. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm experienced in applying air barrier materials similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance . B. Single -Source Responsibility: Obtain air barrier materials, including primer and flashing from a single manufacturer regularly engaged in manufacturing the product. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with all federal, state, and local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Include installers of other construction connecting to air barrier, including roofing, waterproofmg, masonry, sealants, flashing and sheet metal trim, storefront systems, windows, glazed curtain walls, and door frames. 2. Review air barrier requirements including surface preparation, substrate condition and pretreatment, minimum substrate curing period, forecasted weather conditions, special details and sheet flashings, mockups, installation procedures, sequence of installation, testing and inspecting procedures, and protection and repairs. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged packages in a clean, dry, protected location and within temperature range required by air barrier manufacturer. FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS Copyright 2008 Gensler 072726-2 • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA B. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life. C. Store rolls according to manufacturer's written instructions. D. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Apply air barrier within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by air barrier manufacturer. Protect substrates from environmental conditions that affect performance of air barrier. Do not apply air barrier to a damp or wet substrate or during [snow, ]rain, fog, or mist. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIER A. Fluid -Applied, Vapor -Permeable Membrane Air Barrier: Synthetic polymer membrane. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Synthetic Polymer Membrane: 1) Grace, W. R. & Co.; Perm -A -Barrier VP. http://www.na.graceconstruction.com/ 2) Henry Company; Air -Bloc 31 or 33. www.henry.com/ 3) <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> 2. Physical and Performance Properties: a. Membrane Air Permeance: Not to exceed 0.004 cfm/ sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57-lbf/sq. ft. (0.02 L/s x sq. m of surface area at 75 -Pa) pressure difference; ASTM E 2178. b. Membrane Vapor Permeance: Not less than 10 perms (580 ng/Pa x s x sq. m); ASTM E 96. 2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by air barrier manufacturer for intended use and compatible with air barrier membrane. Liquid -type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Primer: Liquid primer recommended for substrate by manufacturer of air barrier material. C. Counterflashing Strip: Modified bituminous, 40 -mil- (1.0 -mm-) thick, self -adhering sheet consisting of 32 mils (0.8 mm) of rubberized asphalt laminated to an 8 -mil- (0.2 -mm-) thick, crosslaminated polyethylene film with release liner backing. FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS Copyright 2008 Gensler 072726-3 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA D. Butyl Strip: Vapor -retarding, 30- to 40 -mil- (0.76- to 1.0 -mm-) thick, self -adhering; polyethylene -film -reinforced top surface laminated to layer of butyl adhesive with release liner backing. E. Joint Reinforcing Strip: Air barrier manufacturer's glass -fiber -mesh tape. F. Substrate Patching Membrane: Manufacturer's standard trowel -grade substrate filler. G. Adhesive and Tape: Air barrier manufacturer's standard adhesive and pressure -sensitive adhesive tape. H. Stainless -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 0.0187 inch (0.5 mm) thick, and Series 300 stainless-steel fasteners. Sprayed Polyurethane Foam Sealant: 1- or 2 -component, foamed -in-place, polyurethane foam sealant, 1.5 to 2.0 lb/cu. ft (24 to 32 kg/cu. m) density; flame spread index of 25 or less according to ASTM E 162; with primer and noncorrosive substrate cleaner recommended by foam sealant manufacturer. J. Adhesive -Coated Transition Strip: Vapor -permeable, 17 -mil- (0.43 -mm-) thick, self -adhering strip consisting of an adhesive coating over a permeable laminate with a permeance of 37 perms (2145 ng/Pa x s x sq. m). K. Elastomeric Flashing Sheet: ASTM D 2000, 2BC415 to 3BC620, minimum 50- to 65 -mil- (1.3 - to 1.6 -mm-) thick, cured sheet neoprene with manufacturer's recommended contact adhesives and lap sealant with galvanized steel termination bars and fasteners. L. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, single -component, neutral -curing silicone; Class 100/50 (low - modulus), Grade NS, Use NT related to exposure, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, Use O. Comply with Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that substrates are sound and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar, or other contaminants. 2. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by air barrier manufacturer. 3. Verify that concrete is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263. 4. Verify that masonry joints are flush and completely filled with mortar. 5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS Copyright 2008 Gensler 072726-4 • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Clean, prepare, treat, and seal substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust -free, and dry substrate for air barrier application. B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction. C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form -release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film -forming coatings from concrete. D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids in concrete with substrate patching membrane. E. Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles, and other obstructions. F. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads at sharp comers and edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another. G. Cover gaps in substrate plane and form a smooth transition from one substrate plane to another with stainless-steel sheet mechanically fastened to structural framing to provide continuous support for air barrier. 3.3 JOINT TREATMENT A. Concrete and Masonry: Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to ASTM C 1193 and air barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks complying with ASTM D 4258 before coating surfaces. 1. Prime substrate and apply a single thickness of preparation coat strip extending a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm) along each side of joints and cracks. Apply a double thickness of air barrier membrane and embed a joint reinforcing strip in preparation coat. B. Gypsum Sheathing: Fill joints greater than 1/4 inch (6 mm) with sealant according to ASTM C 1193 and with air barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Apply first layer of fluid air barrier membrane at joints. Tape joints with joint reinforcing strip after first layer is dry. Apply a second layer of fluid air barrier membrane over joint reinforcing strip. 3.4 TRANSITION STRIP INSTALLATION A. Install strips, transition strips, and auxiliary materials according to air barrier manufacturer's written instructions to form a seal with adjacent construction and maintain a continuous air barrier. 1. Coordinate the installation of air barrier with installation of roofing membrane and base flashing to ensure continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane. 2. Install butyl strip on roofing membrane or base flashing so that a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm) of coverage is achieved over both substrates. FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS Copyright 2008 Gensler 072726-5 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by air barrier sheet in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. 1. Prime glass -fiber -surfaced gypsum sheathing with number of prime coats needed to achieve required bond, with adequate drying time between coats. C. Connect and seal exterior wall air barrier membrane continuously to roofing membrane air barrier, concrete below -grade structures, floor -to floor construction, exterior glazing and window systems, glazed curtain -wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exterior door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using accessory materials. D. At end of each working day, seal top edge of strips and transition strips to substrate with termination mastic. E. Apply joint sealants forming part of air barrier assembly within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. F. Wall Openings: Prime concealed perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors. Apply adhesive -coated transition strip or elastomeric flashing sheet so that a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm) of coverage is achieved over both substrates. Maintain 3 inches (75 mm) of full contact over firm bearing to perimeter frames with not less than 1 inch (25 mm) of full contact. 1. Adhesive -Coated Transition Strip: Roll firmly to enhance adhesion. 2. Elastomeric Flashing Sheet: Apply adhesive to wall, frame, and flashing sheet. Install flashing sheet and termination bars, fastened at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c. Apply lap sealant over exposed edges and on cavity side of flashing sheet. G. Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors, and miscellaneous penetrations of air barrier membrane with foam sealant. H. Seal strips and transition strips around masonry reinforcing or ties and penetrations with termination mastic. I. Seal top of through -wall flashings to air barrier with an additional 6 -inch- (150 -mm-) wide, counterflashing strip. J. Seal exposed edges of strips at seams, cuts, penetrations, and terminations not concealed by metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with termination mastic. K. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in strips and transition strips. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with transition strips extending 6 inches (150 mm) beyond repaired areas in strip direction. 3.5 AIR BARRIER MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Apply air barrier membrane to form a seal with strips and transition strips and to achieve a continuous air barrier according to air barrier manufacturer's written instructions. FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS Copyright 2008 Gensler 072726-6 • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 411 B. Apply air barrier membrane within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges. • C. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by air barrier sheet in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. 1. Prime glass -fiber -surfaced gypsum sheathing with number of prime coats needed to achieve required bond, with adequate drying time between coats. D. Apply a continuous unbroken air barrier to substrates according to the following minimum thickness. Apply membrane in full contact around protrusions such as masonry ties. 1. Vapor -Permeable Membrane Air Barrier: Minimum wet film thickness stated in manufacturer's product data. E. Apply strip and transition strip according to air barrier manufacturer's written instructions. F. Do not cover air barrier until it has been tested and inspected by Owner's testing agency. G. Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates and reapply air barrier components. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Inspections: Air barrier materials and installation are subject to inspection for compliance with requirements. Inspections may include the following: 1. Continuity of air barrier system has been achieved throughout the building envelope with no gaps or holes. 2. Continuous structural support of air barrier system has been provided. 3. Masonry and concrete surfaces are smooth, clean and free of cavities, protrusions, and mortar droppings. 4. Site conditions for application temperature and dryness of substrates have been maintained. 5. Maximum exposure time of materials to UV deterioration has not been exceeded. 6. Surfaces have been primed, if applicable. 7. Laps in strips and transition strips have complied with minimum requirements and have been shingled in the correct direction (or mastic has been applied on exposed edges), with no fishmouths. 8. Termination mastic has been applied on cut edges. 9. Strips and transition strips have been firmly adhered to substrate. 10. Compatible materials have been used. 11. Transitions at changes in direction and structural support at gaps have been provided. 12. Connections between assemblies (membrane and sealants) have complied with requirements for cleanliness, preparation and priming of surfaces, structural support, integrity, and continuity of seal. 13. All penetrations have been sealed. FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS Copyright 2008 Gensler 072726-7 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA C. Tests: Testing to be performed will be determined by Owner's testing agency from among the following tests: 1. Qualitative Testing: Air barrier assemblies will be tested for evidence of air leakage according to ASTM E 1186, smoke pencil with pressurization or depressurization. D. Remove and replace deficient air barrier components and retest as specified above. 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect air barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction period, according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as required by manufacturer. Remove and replace air barrier exposed for more than 30 days. 2. Protect air barrier from contact with creosote, uncured coal -tar products, TPO, EPDM, flexible PVC membranes, and sealants not approved by air barrier manufacturer. B. Clean spills, stains, and soiling from construction that would be exposed in the completed work using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. C. Remove masking materials after installation. END OF SECTION 07 27 26 072726/01-08/pbb FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 07 27 26 - 8 Copyright 2008 Gensler • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review SECTION 07430 - COMPOSITE METAL PANEL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1. Aluminum faced composite panels with mounting system, including anchorages, shims, furring, fasteners, gaskets and sealants, related flashing adapters, and masking as required for a complete watertight installation. 2. Parapet coping, soffits, sills, border, and filler items indicated as integral components of the panel system indicated on the drawings as ACM. 3. Supports, devices, and attachments. 4. Caulking of intermediate and perimeter joints. 1.02 REFERENCES A. AAMA 2605 - Specification for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels. B. ASTM B117 - Standard Test Method of Salt Spray (Fog) Testing. C. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. D. ASTM D822 - Standard Practice for Conducting Tests on Paint and Related Coatings and Materials using Filtered Open -Flame Carbon -Arc Light and Water Exposure Apparatus. E. ASTM D1308 - Standard Test Method for Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Organic Finishes. F. ASTM D2244 - Standard Test Method for Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates. G. ASTM D2247 - Standard Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100% Relative Humidity. H. ASTM D2794 - Standard Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact). I. ASTM D3359 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test. J. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. K. ASTM E 162 - Standard Test Method for Surface Flammability of Materials Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. L. Am' E 283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. COMPOSITE METAL PANEL SYSTEMS 07430-1 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA M. ASTM E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. N. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Engineer and fabricate panels providing a watertight and structurally sound wall panel system that allows no uncontrolled water penetration on the inside face of the panel system as determined by ASTM E331. Systems not utilizing a construction sealant at the panel joints (i.e., Dry System) shall provide a means of concealed drainage with baffles and weeps for water which may accumulate in members of the system. B. Design units under direct supervision of a Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the state in which the project is located. C. Design units to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members and clearances of intended openings. D. Design and size components to withstand seismic loads and sway displacement as calculated in accordance with criteria indicated on the structural drawings. E. Design component connections to accommodate building movement and thermal movement. Provide adjustment to accommodate misalignment of structure without unit distortion or damage. F. Drainage: Provide positive drainage to exterior for moisture entering or condensation occurring within panel system. G. Vapor Retarder: Provide continuity of vapor retarder at building enclosure elements in conjunction with vapor retarders specified. H. Air Seal: Provide continuity of air barrier seal at building enclosure elements in conjunction with air seal materials specified. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate layout, configuration, unit identification marks, connection details, support items, dimensions, openings, edge details and relationship to adjacent components. 2. Indicate locations for blocking and imbedded items. B. Samples: Submit 12" square samples of the panel finished as specified. C. Documents showing product compliance with applicable building codes. These documents shall include documents such as appropriate Evaluation Reports and/or test reports supporting the use of the product. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator/installer: Company approved by the panel manufacturer, and having a minimum of five years satisfactory experience installing panels made by the specified manufacturer. COMPOSITE METAL PANEL SYSTEMS 07430-2 • • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review 1.06 PR.E-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Convene a pre -installation conference one week prior to commencing work of this Section. 1.07 HANDLING A. Protect and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Protect units from staining, denting or oil canning. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Fabricate to profiles indicated. B. Exterior sheet: Pre -coated stock; fabricated to prevent oil -canning. Internal and external corners: same material as face of panels. C. Provide trim, closures, pieces, caps and flashings as required for a finished watertight application. Provide gaskets as required to prevent reactions with dissimilar materials. 2.02 PANELS A. Composite Panels: 1. .ALPOLIC aluminum composite material manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical America, Inc., (800) 422-7270. 2. Centria Architectural Systems - CENTRIA FormaBond Metal Composite Wall System , 1.800.759.7474 3. Industrial Building Panels - TECH -CLAD, 248.588.4710 B. Thickness: 4mm (0.157"). C. Product Test Performance: 1. Composite Panels shall be capable of withstanding building movements and weather exposures based on the specified performance requirements. 2. Wind Load: a. Panels shall be designed to withstand the Design Wind Load specified in Section 08911 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall. b. Normal to the plane of the wall between supports, deflection of the secured perimeter framing members shall not exceed L/175 or 3/4", whichever is less. c. Normal to the plane of the wall, the maximum panel deflection shall not exceed L/90 of the full span. cl. Maximum anchor deflection shall not exceed 1/16". COMPOSITE METAL PANEL SYSTEMS 07430-3 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA e. At 1-1/2 times design pressure, permanent deflections of framing members shall not exceed L/100 of span length and components shall not experience failure or gross permanent distortion. At connection points of framing members to anchors, permanent set shall not exceed 1/16". 3. Air/WaterPerformance: a. Air Infiltration - When tested in accordance with ASTM E283, air infiltration at 1.57 psf must not exceed 0.06 cfm/ftof wall area. b. Water Infiltration - Water infiltration is defined as uncontrolled water leakage through the exterior face of the assembly. Systems not using a construction sealant at the panel joints (i.e., Dry Systems) shall be designed to drain any water leakage occurring at the joints. No water infiltration shall occur in any system under a differential static pressure of 6.24 psf after 15 minutes of exposure in accordance with ASTM E331. c. Bond integrity (simulating resistance to panel delamination): No adhesive failure of the bond between the core and skin or cohesive failure of the core itself below the following values. 1) Bond Strength: 214 psi (Vertical Pull) 2) Peel Strength: 115 N mm/mm (22.5 in lb./in.) as manufactured 3) 115 N mm/mm (22.5 in lb./in.) after 8 hours in water at 200°F 4) 115 N mm/mm (22.5 in Ib./in.) after 21 days soaking in water at 70°F 4. Fire Performance: a. ASTM E84: Flame Spread 0, Smoke Developed O. b. ASTM E162: No surface flaming. D. Finishes: 1. Coil coated KYNAR® 500 or HYLAR® 5000 based polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) resin in conformance with the following general requirements of AAMA 2605. a. Color: Two custom colors to match Architect's sample. b. Coating Thickness: 1.0 mil (±0.2 mil). c. Hardness: F minimum using Eagle Turquoise Pencil. d. Impact: 1) Test Method: ASTM D2794; Gardner Variable Impact Tester with 5/8" mandrel. 2) Coating shall withstand reverse impact of 1.5"/pounds per mil substrate thickness. 3) Coating shall adhere tightly to metal when subjected to #600 Scotch Tape pick -off test. 4) Slight minute cracking permissible. No removal of film to substrate. e. Adhesion: 1) Test Method: ASTM D3359. 2) Coating shall not pick off when subjected to an 11" x 11" x 1/16" grid and taped with #600 Scotch Tape. COMPOSITE METAL PANEL SYSTEMS 07430-4 • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 f. Humidity Resistance: 1) Test Method: ASTM D2247. 2) No formation of blisters when subjected to condensing water fog at 100% relative humidity and 100°F for 3000 hours. Salt Spray Resistance: 1) Test Method: ASTM B117; expose coating system to 3000 hours, using 5% NaCI solution. 2) Corrosion creepage from scribe line: 1/16" max. (1.6mm). 3) Minimum blister rating of 8 within the test specimen field. h. Weather Exposure: 1) Outdoor: Five year exposure at 45° angle facing south Florida exposure. Maximum color change of 5 Delta E units as calculated in accordance with ASTM D2244. Maximum chalk rating of 8, with no checking, crazing or adhesion loss. 2) Accelerated: ASTM D822, 5000 hours in Atlas Type Weatherometer; using cycle of 102 minutes light and 18 minutes diminished light and demineralized water. No checking, crazing, adhesion loss or objectionable color change or chalking. g. April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA i:. Chemical Resistance: 1) ASTM D1308 utilizing 10% Muriatic Acid for an exposure time of 15 minutes. 2) ASTM D1308 utilizing 20% Sulfuric Acid for an exposure time of 18 hours. 3) No loss of adhesion or gloss and no color change. E. Composition: Two sheets of aluminum sandwiching a solid core of extruded thermoplastic material foamed in a continuous process with no glues or adhesives between dissimilar materials. The core material shall be free of voids and/or air spaces and not contain foamed insulation material. Products laminated sheet by sheet in a batch process using glues or adhesives between materials shall not be acceptable. F. Aluminum Face Sheets: 1. Thickness: 0.50mm (0.0197"), minimum. a. Alloy: 3105-H14, or AA3003 Painted material. G. Panel Weight: 1. 3 mm (0.118"): 0.92 lbs./ft2. 2. 4mm (0.157"): 1.12 lbs./ft2 3. 6rtim (0.236"): 1.59 lbs./112 H. Tolerances: 1. Panel Bow: Maximum 0.5% of panel dimension in width and length. COMPOSITE METAL PANEL SYSTEMS 07430-5 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 2. Panel Dimensions: Field fabrication shall be allowed where necessary, but shall be kept to an absolute minimum. All fabrication shall be done under controlled shop conditions when possible. 3. Panel lines, breaks, and angles shall be sharp, true, and surfaces free from warp and buckle. 4. Maximum deviation from panel flatness shall be 1/8" in 5'0" panel in any direction for assembled units (non -accumulative). I. System Characteristics: 1. System must provide a wet seal (caulked) routed and returned sealed reveal joint or an aluminum extrusion with integral weatherstripping unless otherwise indicated on drawings. If a wet seal is used, the sealant type shall be specified in Joint Sealers Section and with foamed type backer rod as indicated on drawings. 2. System must not have any visible fasteners, telegraphing or fastening on the panel faces or any other compromise of a neat and flat appearance. 3. System shall comply with the applicable provisions of the "Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Storefront, and Entrance Guide Specifications Manual" by AAMA. 4. Fabricate panel system to dimension, size, and profile indicated on the drawings based on a design temperature of 70°F. 5. Fabricate panel system so that no restraints can be placed on the panel which might result in compressive skin stresses. The installation detailing shall be such that the panels remain flat regardless of temperature change and at all times remain air and water tight. 6. The fmish side of the panel shall have a removable plastic film applied prior to fabrication which • shall remain on the panel during fabrication, shipping, and erection to protect the surface from damage. • 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Extrusions, formed members, sheet, and plate shall conform with ASTM B209 and the recommendations of the manufacturer. B. Panel stiffeners, if required, shall be structurally fastened or restrained at the ends and shall be secured to the rear face of the composite panel with silicone of sufficient size and strength to maintain panel flatness. Stiffener material and/or finish shall be compatible with the silicone. C. Sealants and gaskets within the panel system shall be as per manufacturer's standards to meet performance requirements. D. Fabricate flashing materials from 0.030" minimum thickness aluminum sheet painted to match the adjacent curtain wall/panel system where exposed. Provide a lap strap under the flashing at abutted conditions and seal lapped surfaces with a full bed of non -hardening sealant. E. Fasteners (concealed/exposed, non-corrosive/concealed and exposed, non -corrosive): Fasteners as recommended by panel manufacturer. Do not expose fasteners except where unavoidable and then match fmish of adjoining metal. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. COMPOSITE METAL PANEL SYSTEMS 07430-6 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Verify that building structure, anchors, devices, and openings are ready to receive work of this Section. B. Surfaces to receive panels shall be even, smooth, sound, clean, dry and free from defects detrimental to work. Notify contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with erection until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. Verify that building structure, anchors, devices, and openings are ready to receive work of this Section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide for erection procedures and induced loads during erection. Maintain temporary bracing in place until final support is provided. B. Provide necessary hoisting equipment. 3.03 ERECTION A. Erect units without damage to shape or fmish. Replace or repair damaged panels. B. Erect members level and plumb within allowable tolerances. C. Align and maintain uniform horizontal and vertical joints, as erection progresses. D. When members require adjustment beyond design or tolerance criteria, discontinue affected work; advise Architect. E. Fasten units in place. Use concealed fastening systems. F. Seal and place gaskets to prevent weather penetration. Maintain neat appearance. G. Attachment system shall allow for the free and noiseless vertical and horizontal thermal movement due to expansion and contraction for a material temperature range of -5°F to +180°F. Buckling of panels, opening of joints, undue stress on fasteners, failure of sealants or any other detrimental effects due to thermal movement will not be permitted. Fabrication, assembly, and erection procedure shall account for the ambient temperature at the time of the respective operation. H. Panels shall be erected in accordance with an approved set of shop drawings. I. Anchor panels securely per engineering recommendations and in accordance with approved shop drawings to allow for necessary thermal movement and structural support. J. Conform to panel fabricator's instructions for installation of concealed fasteners. K. Do not install component parts which are observed to be defective, including warped, bowed, dented, abraised, and broken members. L. Do not cut, trim, weld, or braze component parts during erection in a manner which would damage the finish, decrease strength, or result in visual imperfection or a failure in performance. Return component parts which require alteration to shop for refabrication, if possible, or for replacement with new parts. M. Separate dissimilar metals and use gasketed fasteners where needed to eliminate the possibility of galvanic action. COMPOSITE METAL PANEL SYSTEMS 07430-7 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plane of Location: 1/4" in 10' and 3/8" in 100', non -cumulative. B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment Between Two Connecting Units: 1/4". C. Joint Tolerance: Plus or minus 1/4". 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Remove and replace panels damaged beyond repair as a direct result of the panel installation. After installation, panel repair and replacement shall become the responsibility of the General Contractor. B. Adjust units so that joint dimensions are within tolerances. C. Remove masking (if used) as soon as possible after installation. Masking intentionally left in place after panel installation on an elevation shall become the responsibility of the Contractor. D. Make sure weep holes and drainage channels are unobstructed and free of dirt and sealants. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect units from damage. END OF SECTION 07430 COMPOSITE METAL PANEL SYSTEMS 07430-8 • • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review SECTION 07540 — THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes thermoplastic membrane roofing. 1.2 DEFINITIONS Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definition of terms related to roofing work in this Section. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide installed roofing membrane and base flashings that remain watertight; do not permit the passage of water; and resist specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, andexposure to weather without failure. B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofmg membrane manufacturer based on testing and field experience. C. Roofing System Design: Provide a membrane roofing system that is identical to systems that have been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist uplift pressure specific to the geographic location of the building as required by the building code authorities having jurisdiction and calculated according to ASCE 7. D. FMG Listing: Provide roofing membrane, base flashings, and component materials that comply with requirements in FMG 4450 and FMG 4470 as part of a membrane roofmg system and that are listed in FMG's "Approval Guide" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FMG markings. 1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-90 minimum classification unless higher classification is required for the geographic location of the building by the building code authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Hail Resistance: SH. 1.4 SUI3MITTALS A. Manufacturer's Review of Roofing: Before purchasing and delivering roofmg materials to the project site, submit written statement signed by the Contractor and roofmg installer, stating that the Contract Documents have been reviewed with a qualified representative of the manufacturer of the primary roofing materials, and that the manufacturer has not indicated any further precautions or additional requirements to be fulfilled in connection with the use of the selected THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07540-1 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA materials on this project and that the selected materials, conditions and details are not in conflict with the manufacturers warranty. Distribute one copy of statement to the manufacturer. B. Product Data: Submit product data for each type of product indicated. C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for the roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. 1. Base flashings and membrane terminations. 2. Insulation and tapered insulation, including slopes. 3. Insulation fastening patterns. D. Installer Certificates: Submit installer certificates signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that Installer is approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install roofing system. E. Product Test Reports: Submit product test reports based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of roofing system. F. Research/Evaluation Reports: Submit research/evaluation reports for components of membrane roofing system as required by authorities having jurisdiction. G. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data for roofing system to include in maintenance manuals. H. Warranties: Submit special warranties specified in this Section. I. Inspection Report: Submit copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection report of completed roofing installation. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer (Roofer), recognized and approved by the roofing manufacturer, who has completed a minimum of three (3) roofmg applications over the last five years which were similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for the project — as determined by the Architect — and which have resulted in construction with a record of successful in service performance. Include major items of roofmg related work (i.e. flashing and roofing) in the roofing installer's scope of work (herein referred to as "roofmg work") for undivided responsibility. The Installer shall maintain a full-time supervisor/foreman who is on job site during times that roofing work is in progress and who is experienced in installing roofing systems similar to type and scope required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain components for membrane roofing system from roofing membrane manufacturer. C. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide membrane roofing materials with the fire -test - response characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL, FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07540-2 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 411 jurisdiction. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. • • 1. Exterior Fire -Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes indicated. D. Preinstallation Conference: As soon as possible after award of roofing work, but no later than 2 weeks before the installation of the roofing system, meet with Installer (Roofer), installers of substrate construction, such as decks, and other work adjoining roof system including penetrating work and rooftop units, Owner, and representatives of other entities directly concerned with roofmg system performance, including Owner's property insurer (if any). 1. Review foreseeable methods and procedures related to roofing work, including, but not necessarily limited to, the following: a. Tour representative areas of roofing substrates (decks), inspect and discuss condition of substrate, substrate pretreatment, roof slope, drainage, system application, curing periods, flashing details, roof drains, curbs, penetrations, and other preparatory work performed by other trades. b. Review roofing system requirements: drawings, specifications, and other contract documents. c. Review required submittals, both complete and incomplete. d. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures for coping with unfavorable conditions. e. Discuss roofing system protection requirements for construction period extending beyond roofing installation. 2. Record discussion and furnish copy of recorded discussions to each participant. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofmg system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight. C. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life. D. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. E. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck. THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07540-3 Gensler 32.2177.089 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofmg system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofmg system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes roof leaks. 1. Special warranty includes roofmg membrane, base flashings, roofing membrane accessories, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate board, walkway products and other components of membrane roofing system. 2. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.9 MANUFACTURERS INSPECTION A. The Contractor shall provide for the manufacturer of the roofing to inspect, test and report all work pertaining thereto. The Contractor shall arrange for the manufacturer to perform the above duties on a continuous basis throughout the roofing work as recommended by the manufacturer. The Contractor shall be responsible for carrying out all recommendations of the manufacturer to ensure a total and complete installation of the roofing work. The issuance of the manufacturer's final inspection report shall be made prior to the acceptance of the work by the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN ROOFING MEMBRANE A. Fabric -Reinforced Thermoplastic Polyolefin Sheet: Uniform, flexible sheet formed from a thermoplastic polyolefin, internally fabric or scrim reinforced, and as follows: 1. Manufacturer: a. Firestone Building Products Company. 2. Product: a. Firestone: UltraPly TPO Scrim Reinforced Thermoplastic Roofmg System. 3. Thickness: 60 mils (1.5 mm), nominal. 4. Exposed Face Color: White. 5. Physical Properties: THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07540-4 ID • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA a. Breaking Strength: 225 lbf (1 kN); ASTM D 751, grab method. b. Elongation at Break: 15 percent; ASTM D 751. c. Tearing Strength: 55 lbf (245 N) minimum; ASTM D 751, Procedure B. d. Brittleness Point: Minus 22 deg F (30 deg C). e. Ozone Resistance: No cracks after sample, wrapped around a 3 -inch- (75 -mm-) diameter mandrel, is exposed for 166 hours to a temperature of 104 deg F (40 deg C) and an ozone level of 100 pphm (100 mPa); ASTM D 1149. f. Resistance to Heat Aging: 90 percent minimum retention of breaking strength, elongation at break, and tearing strength after 166 hours at 240 deg F (116 deg C); ASTM D 573. g. Water Absorption: Less than 4 percent mass change after 166 hours' immersion at 158 deg F (70 deg C); ASTM D 471. h. Linear Dimension Change: Plus or minus 2 percent; ASTM D 1204. 2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing. 1. Liquid -type auxiliary materials shall meet VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced thermoplastic polyolefin sheet flashing, 55 mils (1.4 mm) thick, minimum, of same color as sheet membrane. • C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard solvent -based bonding adhesive for membrane, • and solvent -based bonding adhesive for base flashings. D. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch (25 by 3 mm) thick; with anchors. E. Fasteners: Factory -coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion - resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer. F. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T -joint covers, termination reglets, cover strips, and other accessories. 2.3 ROOF INSULATION A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type I, Class 1 aluminum foil facer on both major surfaces. 1. Manufacturer: Firestone Building Products Company. B. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory -tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches (1:48), unless otherwise indicated. THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07540-5 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA C. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated. 2.4 INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofmg. B. Fasteners: Factory -coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion - resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. C. Cold Fluid -Applied Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard cold fluid -applied adhesive formulated to adhere roof insulation to substrate. D. Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass -mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Dens -Deck" by Georgia- Pacific Corporation. 2.5 WALKWAYS A. Flexible Walkways: Factory -formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, solid -rubber, slip -resisting, surface -textured walkway pads or rolls, approximately 3/16 inch (5 mm) thick, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer. Walkways will be located around all RTUs. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system: 1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced and that roof • drains are securely clamped in place. 2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation. The wood shall be attached in a manner that will resist a minimum force of 200 lbs. Per foot in any direction. 3. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck comply with requirements in Division 5 Section "Steel Deck." 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07540-6 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA • 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections. B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof -drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast. • • C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofmg system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. 3.3 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. B. Cornply with membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation. C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated. D. Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 2 inches (50 mm) or greater, install 2 or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction. E. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water. F. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch (6 mm) with insulation. 1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch (6 mm) of nailers, projections, and penetrations. G. Mechanically Fastened and Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure first layer of insulation to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board -type roof insulation to deck type. 1. Fasten first layer of insulation according to requirements in FMG's "Approval Guide" for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification. 2. Install subsequent layers of insulation in a cold fluid -applied adhesive. H. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Stagger joints from joints in insulation below a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof deck. THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07540-7 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1. Fasten according to requirements in FMG's "Approval Guide" for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification. 3.4 ADHERED ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install roofing membrane over area to receive roofing according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll roofing membrane and allow to relax before installing. B. Start installation of roofing membrane in presence of membrane roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel. C. Accurately align roofing membrane and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps. D. Bonding Adhesive: Apply solvent -based bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of roofing membrane at rate required by manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing roofing membrane. Do not apply bonding adhesive to splice area of roofing membrane. E. Mechanically or adhesively fasten roofing membrane securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of roofmg. F. Apply roofing membrane with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible. G. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roofing membrane, and hot-air weld side and end laps of roofing membrane according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. 1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges of roofing membrane. 2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily and repair seam sample areas. 3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing membrane that does not meet requirements. H. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck drain flange at deck drains and securely seal roofing membrane in place with clamping ring. 3.5 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Apply solvent -based bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing. C. Flash penetrations and field -formed inside and outside corners with sheet flashing. THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07540-8 • • • • • • Gensler April 30, 2008 32.2177.089 CD Owner Review D. Clean seam areas and overlap and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adh encl laps to ensure a watertight seam installation. E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor termination bars. 3.6 A. WALKWAY INSTALLATION Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA esive. Weld side and to substrate through Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofmg system . manufacturer's written instructions. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform roof tests and inspections and to prepare test reports. B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofmg installation on completion and submit report to Architect. C. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where test results or inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.8 PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofmg, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner. B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofmg system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION 07540 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07540-9 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes sheet metal flashing and trim. Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1. Single Subcontract Responsibility: Refer to Section 07540 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing for the requirements of single subcontract responsibilities for sheet metal flashing and trim. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement. B. Fabricate and install copings capable of resisting wind forces specific to the geographic location of the building using the wind loads as required by the building code authorities having jurisdiction in accordance with the applicable recommendations of FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49. C. Thermal Movements: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that allow for thermal movements as will be caused by a maximum change (range) in ambient temperature of 120 deg F (67 deg C) and a maximum surface temperature of +180 deg F (+82 deg C), to prevent buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of sheet metal and trim thermal movements. 1. Dimensions shown on Drawings are based on an assumed design temperature of +70°F (+21 deg C). Fabrication and installation procedures shall take into account the ambient temperature range at the time of the respective operations. D. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that do not allow water infiltration to building interior. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit product data for each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Samples: Submit samples for each type of exposed aluminum coping, downspout and conductor head finish required, prepared on 12" square sized Samples. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-1 Gensler 32.2177.089 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Installer Qualifications: Subcontract the sheet metal flashing and trim work to a firm which is specialized in the fabrication and installation of sheet metal flashing and trim and who has successfully installed work similar in design and extent to that required for the project, in not less than three projects of similar scope to the satisfaction of the Architect, and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance for a period of 5 years. B. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Reference Standards: Comply with the industry standard sources below. Where sheet metal flashing and trim work details have not been specifically detailed on the drawings or specified the Contractor shall submit, for the Architect's approval, proposed sheet metal detailing. The primary source for proposed sheet metal detailing shall come from the industry standard sources below. 1. SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." 2. NRCA's "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." C. Design Modifications: Submit design modifications necessary to meet the performance requirements and field coordination. Variations in details or materials which do not adversely affect the appearance, durability or strength of components shall be submitted to the Architect for review. Maintain the general design concept without altering size of members, profiles and alignment. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of sheet metal flashing and trim with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Furnish written warranty against water leakage resulting from defects of materials or workmanship. Upon notification of such defects, within the warranty period, make the necessary repairs and replacements at the convenience of, and no cost to, the Owner. This warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents. 1. Warranty period shall be 3 years after the date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METALS A. Stainless -Steel Sheet (Typical): ASTM A 240/A 240M, soft annealed, Type 304, with No. 2D finish, except where harder temper is required for forming or performance. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-2 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA B. Aluminum Sheet (For Copings, Downspouts and Conductor Heads): ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3004, 3105, or 5005, Temper suitable for forming and structural performance required, but not less than H14, finished as follows: 1. High -Performance Organic Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid -chromate -fluoride -phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. a. Fluoropolymer 2 -Coat System: Manufacturer's standard 2 -coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat .containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 2605. One custom color to match Architect's samples. 2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Felts: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt -saturated organic felt, nonperforated. B. Slip Sheet: Rosin -sized paper, minimum 3 lb/100 sq. ft. (0.16 kg/sq. m), complying with FS UU-B-790A. C. Self -Adhering, High -Temperature Sheet: 0.76 mm thick, self adhering, self sealing, underlayment consisting of slip -resisting high density cross laminated polyethylene -film top surface laminated to layer of butyl rubber based adhesive, with release -paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 1. Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 116 deg C; ASTM D 1970. 2. Product Reference: Grace, W. R. & Co.; Vycor Ultra. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation. B. Fasteners: Wood screws, same metal as flashing/sheet metal, annular threaded nails, self - tapping screws, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. C. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer, use a noncorrosive rosin flux over tinned surfaces. D. Sealing Tape: Pressure -sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with release -paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape. E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane or silicone polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-3 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single -component, solvent -release butyl rubber sealant, polyisobutylene plasticized, heavy bodied for hooked -type expansion joints with limited movement. G. Bituminous Coating: Cold -applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15 -mil (0.4 -mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert -type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. H. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application. Wood Nailer Strips: Provide wood nailer strips, fabricated to sizes indicated, from lumber complying with the requirements of Section 06105, MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY, and fire retardant treated by pressure process using chemical solution which is non -hygroscopic and non -corrosive to sheet metal used. 2.4 MANUFACTURED SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM A. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated. 1. Material: Stainless steel, 0.0187 inch (0.5 mm) thick. 2. Surface -Mounted Type: Provide with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top edge. 3. Stucco Type: Provide with upturned fastening flange and extension leg of length to match thickness of applied finish materials. 4. Counterflashing Wind -Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing lower edge. 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with the referenced standards that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. Shop fabricate items where practicable. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. C. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 1. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat -lock seams. For stainless steel items tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. D. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-4 • • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA E. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in the Work cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. F. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed -to -view sheet metal flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated. G. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored. Cleats shall be 2 inches (50 mm) wide by nominal 3 inches (75 mm) long typically, minimum 0.0187 inch (0.5 mm) thick, punch for minimum 2 nail or screw holes. One end shall be locked into seams, or into folded edge of sheet metal sheets, the other end shall be secured with nails or screws and folded back over nail or screw heads. 2.6 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors. 1. Manufactured Hanger Style: As indicated. 2. Fabricate downspouts from the following material: a. Aluminum: 0.024 inch (0.6 mm) thick. B. Parapet Scuppers: Fabricate scuppers of dimensions shown, or if not shown not less than 6" x 6" cross sectional throat dimensions, with scupper throat on exterior side having an exposed 1" wide hemmed flange with the junction between the flange and the exterior face of the parapet wall surface sealed, 4 -inch- (100 -mm-) wide wall flanges to interior soldered to the scupper before the scupper's insertion through the parapet with the junction between the closure flange and the interior face of the parapet sealed, and base extending 4 inches (100 mm) beyond cant or tapered strip into field of roof, unless otherwise detailed. Solder notched or perforated gravel stop angles to base of scupper to prevent windborne roof debris accumulations from migrating through scupper throat. 1. Fabricate parapet scuppers from the following material: a. Stainless Steel: 0.0187 inch (0.5 mm) thick. C. Conductor Heads: Fabricate conductor heads with flanged back and stiffened top edge and of dimensions and shape indicated complete with outlet tubes, exterior flange trim, and built-in overflows. 1. Fabricate conductor heads from the following material: a. Aluminum: 0.0320 inch (0.8 mm) thick. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-5 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review 2.7 LOW -SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96 -inch- (2400 -mm-) long, but not exceeding 10 -foot- (3-m-) long, sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support edge of extemal leg and drill elongated holes for fasteners on interior leg. Miter corners and solder watertight. 1. Joint Style: Butt, with 6 -inch- (150 -mm-) wide exposed cover plates. 2. Fabricate copings from the following material: a. Aluminum: 0.050 inch (1.2 mm) thick. B. Roof and Roof to Wall Transition Roof to Sheet Metal Roof Edging Transition Expansion -Joint Cover: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Stainless Steel: 0.0250 inch (0.65 mm) thick. C. Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Stainless Steel: 0.0187 inch (0.5 mm) thick. D. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Stainless Steel: 0.0187 inch (0.5 mm) thick. E. Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Stainless Steel: 0.0156 inch (0.4 mm) thick. F. Roof -Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Stainless Steel: 0.0187 inch (0.5 mm) thick. 2.8 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. See Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for flashing associated with veneer brick assemblies. B. Through -Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96 -inch- (2400 -mm-) long, but not exceeding 12 foot (3.6 m) long, sections, under copings, at shelf angles, and where indicated. Fabricate discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches (150 nun) beyond each side of wall openings. Form with 2 -inch- (50 -mm-) high end dams. Fabricate from the following material: 1. Stainless Steel: 0.0156 inch (0.4 mm) thick. C. Openings Flashing in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches (100 mm) beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2 -inch- (50- mm-) high end dams. Fabricate from the following material: SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-6 • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review 1. Stainless Steel: 0.0156 inch (0.4 mm) thick. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Stainless Steel: 0.0187 inch (0.5 mm) thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing andtrim work. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by fabricator or manufacturers of dissimilar metals. 1. Coat side of aluminum and stainless-steel sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet. 3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required for waterproof performance. C. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks. D. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, and butyl sealant. E. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. • Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-7 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1. Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. F. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (600 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. G. Fasteners: Use stainless-steel fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for nails and not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) for wood screws. H. Seal joints with butyl sealant as required for watertight construction. Where sealant -filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch (25 mm) into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. Soldered Joints: Edges of sheets to be soldered shall be in close contact at every point along the joint before soldering. Edges of all sheets of sheet metal to be soldered shall be tinned with solder on both sides for a minimum width of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Where specified, all seams shall be thoroughly soldered to produce watertight joints. All soldering shall be done slowly with well heated metal - to heat sheet thoroughly and to sweat solder completely through full width of seam. Ample solder shall be used and seam shall show at least one full inch of evenly flowed solder. Wherever possible all soldering shall be done in flat position. Remove every trace of flux residue from metal promptly after tinning. Comply with manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaning and neutralization. Clean exposed surfaces of sheet metal flashing and trim of every substance which is visible or might cause corrosion of metal surfaces. Use soldering irons (3 lb. Minimum each). Do not use abrasives in preparing the sheet metal surfaces for soldering. All exposed parts of finished soldered joints shall be smooth and free of smeared solder. 1. Do not solder prepainted aluminum items. 3.3 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system according to the referenced standards and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system. B. Downspouts: Join sections with 1 -1/2 -inch (38 -mm) telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely 1 inch (25 mm) away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches (1500 mm) o.c. in between. 1. Provide elbows at base of downspout to direct water away from building where indicated. Provide precast splash blocks where downspouts discharge onto unpaved surfaces. 2. Connect downspouts to underground drainage system where indicated. C. Parapet Scuppers: Install scuppers through parapet where shown. Continuously support scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges to interior and exterior wall faces, over cants or tapered edge strips, and under roofing membrane. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-8 • • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1. Anchor scupper closure trim flange to exterior wall and seal or solder to scupper. 2. Loosely lock front edge of scupper with conductor head. 3. Seal exterior wall scupper flanges into back of conductor head. D. Conductor Heads: Anchor securely to wall with elevation of conductor head rim 1 inch (25 mm) below scupper discharge. 3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal roof flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and the referenced standards. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight. B. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone and as indicated. C. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close -fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten. D. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Lap seam counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm). 1. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of anchor and washer at 36 -inch (900 -mm) centers. 2. Fill the reglet with elastomeric sealant. 3. Form a slight bend in the counterflashing to cause a spring action pressure of the lower edge of the sheet to be applied onto the base flashing. 3.5 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall -opening components such as windows and doors. B. Openings Flashing in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches (100 mm) beyond wall openings. 3.6 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with installation of roofing and equipment. Seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to equipment support member. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-9 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants. Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA B. On completion of installation, clean fmished surfaces, including removing unused fasteners, metal filings, and pieces of flashing. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. C. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-10 • • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 SECTION 07720 - ROOF ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review A. This Section includes roof accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Indicate dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, and components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent -type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur and containing no asbestos fibers, compounded for 15 -mil (0.4 -mm) dry film thickness per coating. B. Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by manufacturer. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. C. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, nonasbestos, fibrated asphalt cement designed for trowel application or other adhesive compatible with roofing system. 2.2 ROOF HATCHES AND LADDER MOUNTED SAFETY POSTS A. General: Fabricate to sizes, shapes and profiles shown. Cover shall be 14 gauge paint bond G- 90 galvanized steel with 3" beaded welded flange with formed reinforcing members and fully welded, covering 1" thick fiberglass insulation with an 22 gauge paint bond G-90 galvanized steel interior liner. Cover shall have a heavy extruded thermoplastic rubber gasket fitted into a retainer that is mechanically fastened to the cover interior to assure a continuous seal when compressed to the top surface of the curb. Curb shall be a 12" high 14 gauge paint bond G-90 galvanized steel covering 1" thick fiberboard insulation. Curb shall be formed with a 3-1/2" wide flange with holes provided for securing to the roof deck. Provide curb with an integral cap flashing of the same gage and material as the curb fully welded at the corners. Provide pitch on curb to deck to allow for moisture runoff. Provide cadmium plated hardware, including a positive hold/release mechanism, heavy pintle hinges, compression spring operators, heavy duty shock absorbers, pull rings for inside and outside operation, neoprene draft seals and inside and outside padlock hasps. Bilco Roof Scuttle "Type S -20C"; The Bilco Co. ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720-1 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1. Factory Finish for Galvanized Steel Components: Alkyd based red oxide primed steel. B. Ladder Mounted Safety Post: Furnish a ladder mounted safety post at each ladder leading to a roof hatch. The post shall be manufactured with high strength tubing. A pull up loop shall be provided at the upper end of the post to facilitate raising the post. Tubular post shall have spring balanced controlled upward and downward movement and shall lock automatically when fully extended. A release lever shall disengage the post to allow it to be returned to its lowered position. Bilco "Ladder Safety Post"; The Bilco Co. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate installation of roof accessories with installation of roof deck, flashing, roofing system, penetrations, equipment, and other construction to ensure that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight. Anchor roof accessories securely to supporting structural substrates so they are capable of withstanding lateral and thermal stresses, and inward and outward loading pressures. B. Install roof accessory items according to construction details of NRCA's "Roofmg and Waterproofing Manual," unless otherwise indicated. C. Separation: Separate metal from incompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including wood, by coating concealed surfaces, at locations of contact, with bituminous coating. D. Flange Seals: Unless otherwise indicated, set flanges of accessory units in a thick bed of roofing cement to form a seal. E. Cap Flashing: Install cap flashing to provide waterproof overlap with roofing or roof flashing (as counterflashing). F. Operational Units: Test -operate units with operable components. Clean and lubricate joints and hardware. Adjust for proper operation. END OF SECTION 07720 ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720-2 • • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes sealants for the following applications: 1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces: a. Control and expansion joints in cast -in-place concrete. b. Joints in Portland cement (stucco) plaster systems. c. Joints between different materials listed above. d. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows. e. Other joints as indicated. 2. Exterior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces: a. Control, expansion, and isolation joints in cast -in-place concrete slabs. b. Joints between different materials listed above. c. Other joints as indicated. 3. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces: a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. c. Tile control and expansion joints. d. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, and windows. e. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. f. Other joints as indicated. 4. Interior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces: a. Control and expansion joints in cast -in-place concrete slabs. b. Other joints as indicated. B. Single Subcontract Responsibilities: Refer to Division 8 Section `Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls', for requirements applicable to single subcontract responsibility. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit product data for each joint -sealant product indicated and the following: 1. Written certification from manufacturers of joint sealants attesting that their products comply with specification requirements and are suitable for the use indicated as verified through manufacturers in-house testing laboratory. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 1 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA a. Test results for all job specific concealed and exposed (custom colored) sealants confirming compatibility and adhesion are mandatory for all materials in contact with exterior glazing, curtain wall components prior to installation. b. Complete instructions for handling, storage, mixing, priming, installation, curing and protection of each type of sealant. 2. Field test results confirming adhesion for specific materials proposed for application. B. Samples: Submit samples of each type and color of exposed joint sealant required. Provide fully cured joint sealant samples in 3/4 -inch (19 -mm-) wide joints formed between two 12 -inch (300 -mm-) long strips of materials to be sealed. C. Warranties: Submit specified warranties. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Exposed sealant work (sealants used for air and weatherseals which are external to curtain wall systems at their perimeter, Portland cement (stucco) plaster joints) shall be performed by a single (i.e. one) firm specializing in the installation of sealants who has successfully produced work comparable to this project, in not less than three projects of similar scope to the satisfaction of the Architect, and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance for a period of 5 years. Concealed sealant work (sealants which are internal to curtain wall systems, and providing an air seal) shall be the responsibility of the subcontractor providing erection of the respective system. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant from a single manufacturer. C. Preconstruction Adhesion Testing (All Exterior Wall Sealants Only): Prior to installation, conduct preconstruction adhesion testing of materials that will contact or affect exterior wall joint sealants for adhesion as described below. 1. General: Test results confirming adhesion are mandatory for all exposed sealant materials in contact with exterior glazing, Portland cement plaster (stucco), other sealants, flashings, metal framing. a. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analysis of results to prevent delay in the progress of the work. b. Investigate materials that fail adhesion testing and obtain sealant manufacturer's written recommendations for corrective measures, including use of primers, cleaners, cleaning measures, curing time, temperature limitations (surface and air), humidity conditions, moisture content of substrate, etc. c. Definition: 1) Adhesion: The mechanical or chemical ability of the sealant materials and substrates to adhere or bond together at their interface. 2. Tests Required: JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 2 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA a. Preconstruction Field -Adhesion Testing: Before installing exposed exterior elastomeric sealants, field test their adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1) Locate test joints where indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2) Conduct field tests for each type of exposed exterior elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated. 3) The manufacturer's technical representative, shall be present when joints are tested. 4) Test Method: Test exterior elastomeric joint sealants by hand -pull method described below: a) Install joint sealants in 60 -inch (1500 -mm-) long joints using same materials and methods for joint preparation and joint -sealant installation in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. Allow sealants to cure. b) Make knife cuts from one side of joint to the other, followed by two cuts approximately 3 -inch (75 mm) long at sides of joint and meeting cross cut at one end. Place a mark 1 -inch (25 mm) from cross -cut end of 3 -inch (75 -mm) piece. c) Use fingers to grasp 3 -inch (75 -mm) piece of sealant between cross- cut end and 1 -inch (25 -mm) mark; pull firmly down at a 90 -degree angle to the joint and hold sealant in this position for ten seconds; following the ten second time duration pull sealant at a 180 degree angle parallel to the joint and hold the sealant in this position for ten seconds. Pull sealant away from joint to the distance recommended by sealant manufacturer for testing adhesion. d) Repair joint as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. 5) Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure with substrate during testing will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing. 3. Report: Provide written summary of each adhesion test. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 3 Gensler 32.2177.089 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). 2. When joint substrates are wet. B. Joint -Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. C. Joint -Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by Installer agreeing to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealant work which has failed to provide a weathertight system within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Manufacturer's Warranties: Written warranties (weatherseal and stain resistance), signed by elastomeric sealant manufacturer agreeing to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that fail to provide airtight and watertight joints, or fail in adhesion, cohesion, abrasion -resistance, stain -resistance, weather resistance, or general durability or appear to deteriorate in any other manner not clearly specified in the manufacturer's data as an inherent quality of the material within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as stated by sealant manufacturer's published data, and as substantiated by the manufacturer for each application through testing. B. Colors: For fully concealed joints, provide manufacturer's standard color of sealant which has the best overall performance characteristics for the application shown. For exposed joints provide custom colors to match Architect's samples of the following: 1. Exterior window and curtain wall framing, each color. 2. Portland cement (stucco) plaster, each color. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 4 • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA C. Manufacturer's Representative: Do not use elastomeric sealant produced by any manufacturer who will not agree to send a qualified technical representative to the project site when requested, for the purpose of rendering advice concerning the proper installation of manufacturer's materials. 2.2 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. General:. Use polyurethane compounds for horizontal joints in pavements and silicone cornpounds for all other areas except as shown or specified. B. Silicone Sealants (Non -Sag): 1. Typical Exterior Wall Joints (One -part Silicone Sealants): a. Properties: 1) Standards: Comply with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25; use NT, M, A and 0. 2) Performance: Non -stain, non -bleed, non -streaking to sealed and adjacent substrates. The minimum pli value after 7 day immersion shall not be less than 13 when tested in strict accordance with ASTM C794 Adhesion in Peel. 3) Cure System and Oil Content: Neutral -Cure System specifically manufactured with controlled oil content to eliminate oil migration into sealed substrates and residue rundown over and onto adjacent substrates. b. Product and Manufacturer: 790 Silicone Building Sealant; Dow Corning. 2. Structural Glazing at Exterior Curtain Walls (One -part Silicone Sealants): a. Weatherseal Bead: 1) Properties: a) Standards: Comply with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25; use NT, G, and A. b) Cure System: Neutral -Cure, medium modulus, System which is compatible with and adherent to the two part insulating glass edge seals, glazing accessories and metal window frame materials being provided for the project. c) Color: Black. 2) Product and Manufacturer: 795 Silicone Building Sealant; Dow Corning Corporation. b. Structural Bead: 1) Properties: JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 5 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA a) Standards: Comply with ASTM C1184 and ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25; use NT, G, and A. b) Performance: The minimum tensile adhesion strength shall be 120 psi with the sealant design tensile and shear stress calculated at 20 psi resulting in a minimum 6 to 1 safety factor. Provide laboratory testing and calculations indicating product working stress and safety factors, in addition provide insulating glass manufacturers written concurrence, based on testing to actual job production run samples of glass and framing materials, the product is proper for the uses shown and specified. c) Cure System: Shelf storage stable, neutral -cure, medium modulus, system which is compatible and adherent to the two part insulating glass edge seals, glazing accessories and metal window frame materials being provided for the project. d) Color: Black. 2) Product and Manufacturer: 995 Silicone Structural Adhesive; Dow Corning Corporation. C. Two -Part Polyurethane Sealant (Self Leveling): ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS `Slope Grade', Class 25; use T; one of the following: 1. Pecora Corporation; Dynatred. D. Mildew -Resistant Silicone Sealant (use for joints at toilet fixtures, countertops and vanities, and at janitor closet mop receptor to wall transition): Complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, class 25, Use NT, use G, A, and 0; and containing a fungicide for mildew resistance; one of the following: 1. Dow Corning; 786 Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealant. 2. Pecora Corporation; 898 Silicone Sanitary Sealant. 2.3 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Latex Sealant: Non-elastomeric, one part, non -sag, paintable latex sealant that is recommended for exposed applications on the interior. Complying with ASTM C 834: 1. Products: Provide one of the following: a. Pecora Corporation; AC -20 + Silicone b. Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc.; Sonolastic Sonolac. c. Tremco, an RPM Co.; Tremflex 834. 2.4 JOINT -SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 6 • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: One of the following preformed, compressible, resilient, nonstaining, nonwaxing, nonextruding backings of flexible . plastic foam complying with ASTM C 1330, and of type indicated below. Select shape and density of cylindrical sealant backings in consultation with the manufacturer for proper performance in specific condition of use in each case. 1. Type C: Closed -cell polyethylene foam material with a surface skin, which is nonabsorbent to liquid water and gas, non-outgassing in unruptured state; one of the following: a. HBR Closed Cell Backer Rod; Nomaco, Inc. b. Sonneborn Sonolastic Closed -Cell Backer -Rod; ChemRex, Inc. 2. Type B: Bi -cellular reticulated, polymeric foam material with a surface skin, nonoutgassing; one of the following: a. SofRod; Nomaco, Inc. b. Sonolastic Soft Backer -Rod; ChemRex, Inc. C. Bond -Breaker Tape: Polyethylene, TFE fluorocarbon, or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint -filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. D. Weep and Vent Tubes: Clear plastic (PVC) tubing, minimum 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) inside diameter, and of length as required to extend between exterior face of sealant and open cavity behind. 1. At window and curtain wall systems, where required by system designer, provide gutter termination of tube with preformed nipples suitable for sealing to gutter. E. Cork Joint Filler: Resilient and nonextruding, ASTM D1752, Type II. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Pruner: Material recommended, and types that have been previously tested for compatibility with the specified metal framed window framing, by joint sealant manufacturer for the substrates indicated to be sealed. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and which will not stain nor mar the fmish of surfaces adjacent to joints to which it is applied. PART 3 - EXECUTION JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 7 Gensler 32.2177.089 3.1 EXAMINATION April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint - sealant performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Silicone Glazing Sealants: Refer to Division 8 Section "Glazing". B. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), oil, grease, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean Portland cement (stucco) plaster, concrete, unglazed surfaces of tile, and similar porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air. 3. Remove laitance and form -release agents from concrete. 4. Clean metal, glass, glazed surfaces of tile, and other nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. C. Joint Priming (Elastomeric Sealants Only): Prime joint substrates with primers recommended by the joint sealant manufacturer. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas of joint sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. D. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General:. Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. 1. Silicone Glazing Sealants: Refer to Division 8 Section "Glazing" for installation. B. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following requirements: JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 8 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. a. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. Trim for tight fit around obstructions or elements penetrating the joint. b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. c. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry sealant backings. 2. Install bond -breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and back of joints. 3. Install weeps and vents into joints at the same time sealants are being installed. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, or directed by the Architect, locate weeps and vents spaced as recommended by the sealant manufacturer and the curtain wall fabricator and erector. Do not install vents at horizontal joints immediately below shelf angles, sills, and through wall flashings. C. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants at the same time sealant backings are installed. • 1. Apply sealants in the depth shown or, if none is shown, apply in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the following general proportions and limitations: a. Apply elastomeric sealants in sidewalk, pavement and similar horizontal joints to a depth equal to 75% of the joint width, but not less than 3/8 inch (10 mm) and not more than 3/4 inch (19 mm). b. Apply elastomeric sealants, in joints not subject to traffic or other abrasion, to a depth equal to 50% of the joint width, but not less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) and not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm). c. Apply non-elastomeric sealants to a depth approximately equal to the joint width. D. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform, beads to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to the profile shown, or if none is shown, tool slightly concave. 3.4 1. Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints. 2. Provide a slight wash on horizontal joints where horizontal and vertical surfaces meet. 3. Against rough surfaces or in joints of uneven widths avoid the appearance of excess sealant or compound by locating the compound or sealant well back into joint wherever possible. CLEANING JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 9 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work. END OF SECTION 07920 07920/11-97/ttt JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 10 • • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes steel doors and frames. Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1. The integration of a security system into the steel door frame work is required. The Contractor shall be responsible for the total and complete coordination of the security system components into the Work. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit product data for each product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Submit door and frame schedule using same reference designations indicated on Drawings. Include opening size(s), handing of doors, frame throat dimensions, details of each frame type, elevations' of door design types, details of construction, location and installation requirements of door hardware and reinforcements, hardware group numbers, details of joints and connections. 1. Indicate routing of electrical conduit and dimensions and locations of cutouts in door frames to accept electric hardware devices. 2. Indicate fire label requirements including fire rating time duration. C. Certificate of Compliance for Fire Rated Doors: Provide copies of Certificate of Compliance for all fire rated door assemblies. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Door and Frame Standard: Comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following publications by Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (HMMA) Div. of National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM), unless more stringent requirements are indicated in the Contract Documents: 1. HMMA "Hollow Metal Manual". 2. HtvIMA 861 "Guide Specifications for Commercial Hollow Metal Doors and Frames". B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing steel doors and frames similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 1 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA C. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 1. Provide metal labels permanently fastened on each door which is within the size limitations established by the labeling authority having jurisdiction. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver doors and frames palleted, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project site storage. B. Inspect doors and frames, on delivery, for damage. Tool marks, rust, blemishes, and any other damage on exposed surfaces will not be acceptable. Remove and replace damaged items as directed by Architect. Store doors and frames at building site in a dry location, off the ground, and in such a manner as to prevent deterioration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Hot -Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 569/A 569M, CS (commercial steel), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. Not less than 0.053 inch (1.3 mm) thick where frames are indicated to be built into exterior walls, hot dip galvanize after fabrication in compliance with ASTM A153/A153M, Class B. B. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, CS (commercial steel), and ASTM A 568/A 568M, free from scale, pitting, coil breaks, or other defects, exposed (matte) dull finish. C. Metallic -Coated Steel Sheets: ASTM A924/A924M and ASTM A 653/A 653M, CS (commercial steel), Type B; with G60 (Z 180) zinc (galvanized) or A60 (ZF 180) zinc -iron -alloy (galvannealed) coating, mill phosphatized. D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Galvanized or cadmium plated steel. 1. Expansion Bolts and Shields: FS FF -S-325, Group III, Type 1 or 2. 2. Machine Screws: FS FF -S-92, carbon steel, Type III cross recessed, design I or II recess, style 2C flat head. E. Filler: Sound deadening and heat retarding mineral fiber insulating material. 2.2 DOORS A. General: Provide flush -design doors, 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) thick, of seamless hollow construction, unless otherwise indicated. Construct doors with sheets joined at their vertical STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 2 • • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA edges by continuous welding the full height of the door, with no visible seams on their faces or vertical edges, and all welds ground and finished flush. 1. For single -acting swing doors, bevel both vertical edges 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3 mm in 50 mm). B. Core Construction: Provide one of the following core constructions welded to both door faces: 1. Steel -Stiffened Core: 0.032 -inch (0.8 -mm) steel vertical stiffeners extending full -door height, spaced not more than 6 inches (150 mm) apart and spot welded to face sheets a maximum of 5 inches (127 mm) o.c. Place filler between stiffeners for full height of door. 2. Continuous Truss -Form Inner Core: 0.013 -inch- (0.33 -mm-) thick steel reinforcement spot welded to face sheets a maximum of 2-3/4 inches (69.9 mm) o.c. vertically and horizontally. C. Top and Bottom Channels: Spot weld metal channel not less than thickness of face sheet to face sheets not more than 6 inches (150 mm) o.c. 1. Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with inverted horizontal channels of same material as face sheet so flanges of channels are even with bottom and top edges of face sheets. 2. For exterior doors, close bottom edge with metallic -coated steel closing channel and top edge with filler channel of same material, so webs of channels are flush with bottom and top door edges. Weld inverted steel channels to both face sheets or form integrally with edge construction of door. D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate reinforcing from the same material as door to comply with the following. Offset reinforcement so that faces of mortised hardware items are flush with door surfaces. 1. Hinges: 0.167 inch (4.2 mm) thick by 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 9 inches (229 mm). 2. Lock Front, Strike, and Flushbolt Reinforcements: 0.093 inch (2.3 mm) thick by size as required by hardware manufacturer. 3. Lock Reinforcement Units: 0.067 inch (1.7 mm) thick by size as required by hardware manufacturer. 4. Closer Reinforcements: 0.093 inch (2.3 mm) thick one piece channel by size as required by hardware manufacturer. 5. Other Hardware Reinforcements: As required for adequate strength and anchorage. 6. In lieu of reinforcement specified, hardware manufacturers recommended reinforcing units may be used. E. Interior Steel Doors: Flush design with 0.042 -inch- (1.06 -mm-) thick cold -rolled stretcher - leveled steel face sheets and other metal components from hot- or cold -rolled steel sheets. F. Exterior Steel Doors: Flush design with 0.053 -inch- (1.3 -mm-) thick metallic -coated stretcher leveled steel face sheets and other metal components from metallic coated steel sheets. Provide weep -hole openings in bottom of doors to permit entrapped moisture to escape. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 3 Gensler 32.2177.089 2.3 FRAMES April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Fabricate steel door frames, formed to profiles indicated, with full 5/8 inch (16 mm) stops, and of the following minimum thicknesses. 1. For exterior use, form frames from 0.067 -inch- (1.7 -mm-) thick, metallic -coated steel sheets. 2. For interior use, form frames from cold- rolled steel sheet of the following thicknesses: a. Openings up to and Including 48 Inches (1200 mm) Wide: 0.053 inch (1.3 mm). b. Openings More Than 48 Inches (1200 mm) Wide: 0.067 inch (1.7 mm). B. Provide frames either saw mitered and full (continuously). welded, or machine mitered and full welded, on back side at frame corners and stops with edges straight and true. Grind welds smooth and flush on exposed surfaces. C. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate reinforcements from same material as frame to comply with the following. Offset reinforcement so that faces of mortised hardware items are flush with surface of the frame. 1. Hinges: 0.167 inch (4.2 mm) thick by 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) wide by 10 inches (254 mm). 2. Strike, and Flushbolt Reinforcements: 0.093 inch (2.3 mm) thick by size as required by hardware manufacturer. 3. Closer Reinforcements: 0.093 inch (2.3 mm) thick one piece channel by size as required by hardware manufacturer. 4. Other Hardware Reinforcements: As required for adequate strength and anchorage. D. Electrical Requirements: Make provisions for installation of electrical items specified elsewhere; arrange so wiring can be readily removed and replaced. 1. Provide all cutouts and reinforcements required for steel frames to accept security system components. E. Jamb Anchors: Locate jamb anchors above hinges and directly opposite on strike jamb as required to secure frames to adjacent construction. At metal stud partitions locate the additional jamb anchor below the top hinge. 1. Metal -Stud Partitions: Metal channel stud zee anchor sized to match stud width, welded to back of frames, formed of same material and gauge thickness as frame. Provide at least five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2250 to 2400 mm) in height. F. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb that extends to floor, formed of same material as frame, 0.093 inch (2.3 mm) thick, and punched with two holes to receive two (2) 0.375 inch (9.5 mm) fasteners. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface. G. Spreader Bars: Provide removable spreader bar across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs to serve as bracing during shipment and handling and to hold frames in proper position until anchorage and adjacent construction have been completed. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 4 • • • i • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA H. Door Silencer Holes: Drill strike jamb stop to receive three silencers on single door frames and for two silencers on double door frames. Insert plastic plugs in holes to keep holes clear during installation. I. Plaster Guards: Provide 0.016 -inch- (0.4 -mm-) thick plaster guards or dust -cover boxes of same material as frame, welded to frame at back of hardware cutouts to close off interior of openings and prevent mortar or other materials from obstructing hardware operation. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate doors and frames rigid, neat in appearance, and free of defects, warp, wave, and buckle. Accurately form metal to sizes and profiles indicated. Accurately machine, file, and fit exposed connections with hairline joints. Weld exposed joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. B. Exposed Fasteners: Provide countersunk flat heads for exposed screws and bolts, unless otherwise indicated. C. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive hardware, including cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping, according to final hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Secure reinforcement by spot welding. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. Factory reinforce doors and frames to receive surface -applied hardware. Factory drill and tap for surface -applied hardware. 1. Locate hardware as indicated on the drawings or in Division 8 Section 'Door Hardware' or, if not indicated, according to HIv1MA 831, "Recommended Hardware Locations for Custom Hollow Metal Doors and Frames." 2.5 METALLIC -COATED STEEL FINISHES A. General: Clean, treat and prime surfaces of fabricated steel door and frame work, inside and out, whether exposed or concealed in the construction. B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so surfaces are free of oil and other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair paint specified below to comply with ASTM A 780. 1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High -zinc -dust -content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20. C. Factory Priming for Field -Painted Finish: Apply shop primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Apply a sufficient number of coats, baked on, to obtain uniformly smooth exposed surfaces. Touch up surfaces having runs, smears, or bare spots. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's or fabricator's standard, fast -curing, lead- and chromate- • free, primer complying with ANSI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 5 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA manufacturer for zinc -coated steel; compatible with substrate and field -applied fmish paint system indicated. 2.6 STEEL SHEET FINISHES A. General: Clean, treat and prime surfaces of fabricated steel door and frame work, inside and out, whether exposed or concealed in the construction. B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning"; remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale, shavings, filings, and rust, if present, complying with SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning," C. Factory Priming for Field -Painted Finish: Apply shop primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Apply a sufficient number of coats, baked on, to obtain uniformly smooth exposed surfaces. Touch up surfaces having runs, smears, or bare spots. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's or fabricator's standard, fast -curing, corrosion -inhibiting, lead- and chromate -free, universal primer complying with ANSI A250.10 acceptance criteria; compatible with substrate and field -applied finish paint system indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install doors and frames according to DHI A115.IG, the Architect reviewed shop drawings, and manufacturer's written recommendations and installation instructions. B. Frames: Install frames where indicated. Extend frame anchorages below fills and finishes. 1. Welded Frames: Set frames accurately in position; plumb; align,, and brace securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. Anchor bottom of frames to floors with anchor bolts or power driven fasteners. 2. At fire -rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. C. Doors: Fit doors accurately in their respective frames, with the following clearances: 1. Jambs and Head: 3/32 inch (2 mm). 2. Meeting Edges, Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3 mm). 3. Bottom: 3/8 inch (9 mm), if no threshold or carpet. 4. Bottom: 1/8 inch (3 mm), at threshold or carpet. D. Wood Door Installation: Refer to Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors". E. Apply hardware in accordance with hardware manufacturer's instructions and Division 8 Section 'Door Hardware'. Drill and tap for machine screws as required. Do not use self STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 6 1 • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA tapping sheet metal screws. Adjust door installation to provide uniform clearance at head and jambs, and to contact stops uniformly. Adjust hardware items just prior to final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items just before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including doors or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Prime -Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air -drying primer. 1. Finish Painting: Refer to Division 9 Section "Painting". C. Remove and replace defective work, including doors or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise defective. D. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction period to ensure that steel doors and frames will be without any damage or deterioration, at time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION 08110 08110/5-98/ttt STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 7 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review SECTION 08125 - INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes interior aluminum doors and frames. 1.2 SUBMITTALS Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing scaled elevations, plans, and sections of the interior aluminum door and frame work. Full scale sections shall be prepared and submitted for details of the assemblies that cannot be shown in the elevations or sections. Include with shop drawings glass thicknesses, metal finishes, and all other pertinent information as necessary or requested by the Architect to indicate compliance with the Contract Documents. Details of field connections, anchorage, and their relationship to the work of others shall be clearly indicated for the coordination of the work by other building trades. Details of fastening and sealing methods and product joinery shall be shown to ensure proper performance of the field installation. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Subcontract the interior aluminum door and frame work to a firm who has successfully installed interior aluminum door and framing systems similar in material, desiign, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain interior aluminum doors and frames through one source from a single manufacturer with the capacity and resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaging of components shall be so selected to protect the components from damage during shipping and handling. B. Storage on Site: Store components in a location and in a manner to avoid damage to the components. Keep handling on site to a minimum. Exercise particular care to avoid damage to finishes of metals. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify interior aluminum frame dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES 08125-1 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish opening and wall dimensions and note on Shop Drawings that these are not measured dimensions. Proceed with fabricating interior aluminum doors and frames without field measurements. Coordinate wall, floor, and ceiling construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide interior aluminum door and frame products complying with these specifications as manufactured by one of the following: 1. Custom Components Co. Inc., ALTech System, Tampa, FL. 2. RACO Interior Products, Inc., Houston, TX. 3. Wilson Partitions, Vernon, CA. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Fabricate interior aluminum door and frame components from aluminum extrusions complying with Alloy 6063 and ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), `Anodizing Quality' and formed to the sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated; temper required to suit structural and finish requirements. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel or zinc plated steel complying with ASTM A164. B. Door Silencers (Mutes): Manufacturer's standard gray mohair. C. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard extruded or molded gray plastic or EPDM, to accommodate 6 -mm thick glass. D. Glass: As specified in Section 08800, GLAZING. E. Hardware: As specified in Section 08711, DOOR HARDWARE. 2.4 SEALING MATERIALS A. Exposed Sealing Materials: Acrylic latex type sealants, exposed at perimeter joints in contact with adjacent wallboard materials are specified in Section 07920, JOINT SEALANTS. INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES 08125-2 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 • 2.5 • • FABRICATION April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. General: Fabricate the interior aluminum door and frames to the designs, shapes, and sizes shown using the materials specified and shown to produce assemblies which meet or exceed the performance requirements. To the greatest extent possible complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware applications and other work before shipment to Project site. 1. Metal Wall Thickness: Provide shapes as shown and as required to suit the performance requirements but with wall thickness of not less than the following for each major component: a. Door Frames: Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.062 inch thick, reinforced for hinges and strikes. b. Door Stiles and Rails: Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.125 inch thick, reinforced for hinges and strikes. c. Glass Frames: Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.062 inch thick, designed for glass thickness indicated. d. Ceiling Tracks: Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.062 inch thick. e. Trim: Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.050 inch thick, removable snap -in glass stops and door stops without exposed fasteners. f. Frame Face Dimension: 1-1/2" wide unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. 2. Door Stile and Rail Dimensions: a. Bottomrails: Provide minimum 10" high one piece bottomrail with '/z" high snap on glazing stop unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. b. Stile Dimensions: 4 -inch nominal width, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. c. Top Rail Dimensions: 6 -inch nominal width, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. d. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. e. Fabricate all doors and frames to accommodate the swing direction shown. 3. Glazing shall be performed in accordance with Division 8 Section `Glazing'. B. Provide continuous glazing stops with concealed fasteners for all doors and frames. Provide stops with hairline joints at comers. Provide stops with square, not beveled, shouldered profile unless otherwise shown. INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES 08125-3 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA C. Doors and frames shall be cut, reinforced, drilled and tapped in strict accordance with the printed door hardware manufacturers templates and instructions. Provide solid steel hardware reinforcements, securely fastened to doors and frames where door hardware is to be attached. D. Joints in Metal Work: All exposed work shall be carefully fitted and matched to produce continuity of line and design, with all joints, being accurately fitted for hairline contact and rigidly secured. 1. Provide concealed corner reinforcements and alignment clips for precise butt or mitered connections. 2. Fabricate door stiles, door rails, and frames for glass to allow glass replacement without dismantling door or frame. 3. Fabricate all components to allow secure installation without exposed fasteners. E. Shop Assembly: As far as practible, all fitting and assembly work shall be done in a fabrication shop. 2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish Application: Apply anodized coatings to all exposed surfaces of interior aluminum door and frame work. C. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. D. Protective and Decorative, Clear Anodic Finish: Complying with AA-M10C22A21 finish as a minimum and the following: 1. Metal Preparation and Pretreatment: Remove die markings prior to fmishing operations. Perform this work in addition to the finish specified. Scratches, abrasions, dents and similar defects are unacceptable. 2. Thickness: Minimum 0.3 mil, weighing not less than 12.0 mg per sq. in. 3. Color: Medium matte finished, clear natural anodized. 4. Post Anodizing Finish (Sealing): Anodized fmishes shall be fully sealed by the manufacturer or processor according to procedures recommended by the licensor of the process. INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES 08125-4 • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Coordinate interior aluminum door and frame work with the work of other Sections and provide items to be placed during the installation of other work at the proper time to avoid delays in the work. B. Place such items, including concealed overhead framing, accurately in relation to the fmal location of interior aluminum door and frame components. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls, floors, and ceilings for suitable conditions where interior aluminum doors and frames are to be installed. B. Verify that wall thickness does not exceed standard tolerances allowed by throat size indicated. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with interior aluminum door and frame manufacturer's written installation instructions and the Architect reviewed shop drawings. Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. B. Frame Installation: Install frames plumb and square, shimmed and then securely anchored to substrates with fasteners recommended by frame manufacturer. 1. Fasten to steel stud bulkhead framing using sheet metal screws or other fasteners approved by frame manufacturer in accordance with the accepted shop drawings. a. Use concealed installation clips to ensure that splices and connections are tightly butted and properly aligned. b. Secure clips to main structural extrusion components and not to snap -in or trim members. c. Do not leave screws or other fasteners exposed to view when installation is complete. C. Doors: Doors shall be securely anchored in place to a straight, plumb and level condition, without distortion. Adjust doors to operate smoothly, without binding, with hardware functioning properly. Weatherstripping contact, and hardware movement, shall be field tested and final adjustment, and lubrication, made for proper operation and performance of doors. 1. Door Hardware: Refer to Division 8 Section "Door Hardware". INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES 08125-5 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 2. Install surface -mounted hardware according to manufacturer's written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. D. Install glazing to comply with requirements of Division 8 Section "Glazing," unless otherwise indicated. E. Install acrylic latex perimeter sealant to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of interior aluminum doors and frames promptly after installation, using cleaning methods recommended by interior aluminum door and frame manufacturer. 1. Clean and maintain anodized aluminum according to AAMA 609. B. Wash glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances. C. Immediately remove any deleterious material from surfaces of aluminum. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction period to ensure that interior aluminum doors and frames work will be without damage or deterioration, at time of acceptance. END OF SECTION 08125 INTERIOR ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES 08125-6 • • 411 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes solid core flush wood doors. Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit product data for each type of door required. 1. Submit laboratory test report results of hinge loading, cycle/slam, stile edge screw withdrawals, and stile edge split resistance for fire rated doors. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating location, size, thickness, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; undercuts, special beveling, and other pertinent data. 1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware of factory machined doors. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. 3. Indicate fire label requirements including fire rating time duration, and smoke label requirements. C. Certificate of Compliance for Fire Rated Doors: Provide copies of Certificate of Compliance for all fire rated door assemblies. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Quality Standard: Comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations of AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, 7th Edition, Version 1.2, Section 1300" where standards and specifications conflict the more stringent shall be required. C. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire - protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 1. Provide metal labels permanently fastened on each door which is within the size limitations established by the labeling authority having jurisdiction. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 1 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Protect wood doors during transit, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soiling, and deterioration. Store wood doors on a flat level surface in a dry, well ventilated, place. Keep wood doors a minimum of 3-1/2" off floor surface and protected by a protective covering under the bottom door and over the top door. Covering should protect wood doors from dirt, water and abuse but allow for air circulation under and around the stack. Do not store wood doors in direct sunlight. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors in protective wrappings prior to shipment from factory. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings using temporary, removable, or concealed markings. C. Handle wood doors with clean gloves. Lift and carry wood doors when moving them around the site, do not drag wood doors across one another. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work, such as concrete, tile, wallboard joint treatment, is complete and dried, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. Do not expose doors to sudden changes in temperature such as forced heat used to dry out the site 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in materials or workmanship for the life of the original installation of the door. A representative of the door manufacturer shall inspect the installed doors and shall note on the warranty that no provisions of the warranty have been nullified in the manufacture and/or installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOLID -CORE DOORS A. Non -Fire Rated Door Construction: AWI Section 1300, PC -5 CE, Custom Grade, with medium density overlay (MDO) face veneers and minimum 5-1/2 inch tall x full door width top -rail blocking; one of the following products: I . PC -5 Novodor; Algoma Hardwoods Inc. 2. 5 Ply Particleboard Core Non -Rated (PB) Architectural Wood Flush Door; Eggers Industries; Architectural Door Division. 3. 5 -Ply Particleboard Core Doors (DPC-1); Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 2 i • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA B. Fire -Rated Door Construction: AWI Section 1300, FD -5; Custom Grade, with medium density overlay (MDO) face veneers and 5-1/2 inch tall x full door width top -rail blocking; one of the following products: 1. Positive Pressure Category A FD 3 Hour Door; Algoma Hardwoods Inc. 2. 45 Minute, Category A Architectural Composite Core Fire Doors; Eggers Industries; Architectural Door Division. 3. 5 -Ply Mineral Core Doors (DFM -45) Category A; Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Fabricate doors in sizes indicated for Project -site fitting. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, AWI Section 1300-G-20, DHI A 115-W series standards, and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. 2.3 SHOP PRIMING A. Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime faces and edges of doors, including cutouts, with one coat of wood primer/sealer as standard with door manufacturer. Surfaces shall be clean and dry before priming. Apply primer/sealer uniformly without bare spots, runs, or sags. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors. 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: Apply hardware to doors in accordance with hardware manufacturer's instructions and Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." For particleboard core doors drill pilot holes of proper size for installing hinge screws. Adjust hardware items just prior to final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 3 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA B. General Door Installation Standards: Install doors in locations indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated. Where standards conflict the more stringent shall apply. 1. Install fire -rated doors in corresponding fire -rated frames according to fire label requirements. C. Job -Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels specified, and to contact stops uniformly. Field cutting, fitting or trimming, shall be executed in a workmanlike manner. Trim non -rated door width by cutting equally on both jamb edges. Trim non -rated door height by cutting bottom edge to maximum 3/4 inch. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut and trimmed surfaces immediately after fitting and machining using clear varnish or sealer. 1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold. a. Comply with fire label requirements for fire -rated doors. 2. Bevel non -fire -rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. 3. Bevel fire -rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency. D. Field -Finished Doors: Refer to the following for finishing requirements: I. Division 9 Section "Painting." 3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION A. Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Protection: Protect wood doors to ensure that the wood door work will be without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.Refinish or replace wood doors damaged during installation. Replace any new wood doors that are warped, twisted, demonstrate core show through, are not true in plane, or cannot be refinished to the satisfaction of the Architect. END OF SECTION 08211 08211fl//5-99/ttt FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 4 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review SECTION 08411 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. This Section includes Exterior Punched Windows, Exterior Main Entrance and Exterior Vestibule Paired Door entrances and storefronts. 1. Security system components may be incorporated into the door and frame openings of all aluminum entrances and storefronts at the Owner's option. Cooperate with the Owner's security system contractors if the Owner chooses to incorporate security system components during the course of the Work. B. Single Subcontract Responsibilities: Refer to Division 8 Section "Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls" for the requirements of single subcontract responsibilities for aluminum entrances and storefronts. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Refer to Division 8 Section "Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls" for performance 10 requirements, fabrication and erection standards; in addition provide the following: • 1. Design and fabricate aluminum entrances to withstand the operating loads which result from heavy traffic conditions using the specified hardware, without measurable permanent deflection. Limit elastic deflections so as to provide the normal degree of rigidity required to avoid glass breakage, air leaks and other objectionable results of excessive flexibility. Provide weatherstripping at stiles, sill and head rails of door leaves, to minimize air, water and sound leaks. B. Design Modifications: 1. Submit design modifications necessary to meet the performance requirements and field coordination. 2. Variations in details or materials shall not adversely affect the appearance, durability or strength of components. 3. Maintain the general design concept without altering size of members, profiles and alignment. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each aluminum entrance and storefront product specified. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411-1 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing scaled elevations, plans, and sections of the aluminum entrance and storefront work. Full scale sections shall be prepared and submitted for details of the assemblies that cannot be shown in the elevations or sections. Include with shop drawings metal thickness of all metal components, glass thicknesses, metal finishes, and all other pertinent information as necessary or requested by the Architect to indicate compliance with the Contract Documents. Details of field connections, anchorage, and their relationship to the work of others shall be clearly indicated for the coordination of the work by other building trades. Details of fastening and sealing methods and product joinery shall be shown to ensure proper performance of the field installation. No work shall be fabricated until shop drawings for that work have been approved by Architect for fabrication. C. Samples: Submit samples of the following before any work is fabricated: 1. 3 paired sets of samples for each exposed metal finish required. Sample finishes shall be on the specified alloy, temper, and thickness of metal required for the work. Where finishes involve color and texture variations, include sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. Furnish samples in either 12 -inch- (300 -mm-) lengths of rails, or 12 -inch- (300 -mm-) squares of sheet. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: The aluminum entrance and storefront drawings and specifications are based on Kawneer TriFab VG 451 utilizing 2" x 4-1/2" framing system sight lines and flush glazed from inside of building entrance airlock unless otherwise indicated. Other systems as manufactured by the manufacturers indicated below may be considered, subject to compliance with the performance requirements. Award the fabrication of aluminum entrance and storefront door and frame components to a single firm specializing in the fabrication of aluminum entrance and storefront components who has successfully produced work similar in design and extent to that required for the project, in not less than three projects of similar scope to the satisfaction of the Architect, and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance for a period of 5 years. The fabricator shall have sufficient production capacity, have organized quality control and testing procedures, and published written and illustrated installation manuals, to produce and properly install the entrance assemblies required without causing delay in progress of the Work. 1. Vistawall Architectural Products; Terrell, TX. 2. Wausau; Wausau, WI. 3. YKK AP America, Inc.; Atlanta, GA. B. Installer Qualifications: Refer to Division 8 Section "Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls". 1.5 IDENTIFICATION, DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Refer to Division 8 Section "Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls". 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411-2 • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of supporting structure by field measurements before fabrication so that the entrance and storefront work will be accurately designed, fabricated and fitted to the structure. Indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. Use Contractor's lines and benchmarks as a basis for measurements. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating entrance and storefront work without field measurements. Coordinate supporting structure construction to ensure actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General: Refer to Division 8 Section "Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls". PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Refer to Division 8 Section "Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls". B. Carbon Steel: For carbon steel components required to join, reinforce or support the assembly of aluminum components provide carbon steel conforming to ASTM A 36/A 36M for structural shapes, plates, and bars; ASTM A 1008/A 1008M for cold -rolled sheet and strip; or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M for hot -rolled sheet and strip. C. Glass and Glazing Materials: As specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing." D. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Material: Stainless steel. 2. Anchor and Fastener Metal Alloy Types, Designations and Standards: Alloys as selected by fabricator to prevent corrosion resistance with the components fastened. Do not use self -drilling, self -tapping type fasteners. 3. Do not use exposed anchors and fasteners, except for hardware application. For hardware application, use countersunk Phillips flat -head machine screws finished to match framing members or hardware being fastened, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turn out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices. E. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable weather stripping as follows: 1. Compression Weather Stripping: Molded neoprene complying with ASTM D 2000 requirements or molded PVC complying with ASTM D 2287 requirements. F. Door Hardware: As specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411-3 Gensler 32.2177.089 2.2 SEALING MATERIALS April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Concealed Sealing Materials: All sealing materials concealed within the entrances and storefronts shall be silicone, compatible with and adherent to each material it will be in contact with, as recommended by the manufacturer to fulfill performance requirements. B. Exposed Sealing Materials: All sealing materials exposed at entrance and storefront perimeter joints in contact with adjacent cladding materials: 2 component polyurethane, refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants". 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate the entrances and storefronts to the designs, shapes, and sizes shown using the materials specified and shown to produce assemblies which meet or exceed the performance requirements. To the greatest extent possible complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware applications and other work before shipment to Project site. 1. Metal Wall Thickness: Provide shapes as shown and as required to suit the performance requirements but with wall thickness of not less than 1/8 inch (3 mm). 2. Door Stile and Rail Dimensions: a. Bottom rails: Provide minimum 10 -inch (254 -mm) high one piece bottom rail unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. b. Stile Dimensions: 4 inches unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. c. Top Rail Dimensions: 6 inches unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. d. Door Thickness: 1 -3/4 -inch (44.5 mm). e. Pre -glaze door units to greatest extent possible, m coordination with installation and hardware requirements. Glazing, whether in factory or in field, shall be performed in accordance with Division 8 Section `Glazing'. f. Fabricate all doors and frames to accommodate the swing direction shown. 3. Provide extruded aluminum entrance door inserts at door frames designed with bosses sized to receive selected door gasket. B. Provide continuous interior glazing stops with concealed fasteners for all doors and frames. Provide stops with hairline joints at corners. Provide stops with beveled shouldered profile unless otherwise shown. C. Doors and frames shall be cut, reinforced, drilled and tapped in strict accordance with the printed door hardware manufacturers templates and instructions. Provide solid stainless steel hardware reinforcements, securely fastened to doors and frames where door hardware is to be attached. 1. Security system components may be incorporated into the door and frame openings of all entrance doors and frames. Provide all cutouts required by the Owner's security system vendor and all prewiring for vendor provided security system devices. Wherever storefront and entrance framing components are to receive wiring provide unobstructed clear paths free of burrs and sharp objects with pull strings to facilitate wiring. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411-4 • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA D. Joints in Metal Work: All exposed work shall be carefully fitted and matched to produce continuity of line and design, with all joints, being accurately fitted for hairline contact and rigidly secured. Where additional rigidity or strength is required to satisfy the performance requirements reinforce entrance components with aluminum or carbon steel shapes, bars, and plates. E. Shop Assembly: As far as practible, all fitting and assembly work shall be done in a fabrication shop. 1. For exterior entrances, provide weepholes and internal water passages in the glazing framing recesses as recommended by the respective glass and framing manufacturers to conduct infiltrating water to the exterior. Provide weep baffles secured to inside of frame behind weepholes. F. Exposed Fasteners: Not permitted. G. Protection of Metals: Wherever dissimilar metals are in contact, except in the case of aluminum in contact with galvanized steel, zinc, separate such surfaces with a coating of zinc rich primer, bituminous paint, or separation gaskets as the condition requires. Wherever aluminum comes in contact with concrete surfaces separate such surfaces with a coating of zinc rich primer, bituminous paint, or separation gaskets as the condition requires. 2.4 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. General: As specified in Division 8 Section `Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls'. 2.5 COATINGS FOR CONCEALED METAL SURFACES A. General: The following protective coatings shall be applied to surfaces of metals which are to be concealed in the construction: 1. Coating for Carbon Steel: Hot dip galvanized, complying with ASTM A 123. 2. Coating for Aluminum, and Carbon Steel: Where aluminum or carbon steel surfaces are to be in contact with each other or in contact with dissimilar materials such as concrete, and where hot dip galvanizing of carbon steel is incompatible with component parts because of galvanic action or component fabrication tolerances provide one of the following: a. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied, non -sagging, asphalt -mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements, except containing no asbestos. Apply in two coats for an overall minimum dry film thickness of 25 mils. b. Zinc Rich Primer: Organic zinc -rich primer, complying with SSPC-Paint 20. 2.6 HARDWARE A. General: Provide hardware as indicated in hardware set below. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411-5 Gensler April 30, 2008 32.2177.089 CD Owner Review B. Hardware Set AL1 - Entrance Pair with Electric Exit Devices Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA NOTE: This is the approved standard. It shall be used in all cases unless a local jurisdiction specifically states that it cannot be used. REFERENCE SHEET Al2.08 FOR ALL REQUIREMENTS RELATED TO THIS DOOR. AL2 - Entrance Pair with Electric Exit Devices — Accessible Power Assist Option NOTE: This set shall only be used if set ALI has been deemed not acceptable by local jurisdiction. REFERENCE SHEET Al2.08 FOR FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS AND ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES RELATED TO INSTALLATION Material Required Per Pair 8EA HINGE 2EA TRANSFER lEA ACT. EXIT lEA INACT EXIT lEA TEMP CYL. IBA POWER SUPPLY lEA KEY SWITCH lEA WIRING DIAGRAM lEA CLOSER lEA OPERATOR/CLOSER 2EA ACTUATOR 2EA PULL HANDLE 2EA DPS 2EA SWEEP 1EA W -STRIP lEA T -HOLD BB50054Y2"X4%z"XNRP EPT ES5103 XALDXCYLXNOTRIM ES5103 X ALD X NO TRIM 20-021 (FOR EXIT TRIM) PS501 653 -NS -14-L2 (INTERIOR JAMB MTD) POINT TO POINT -BY HRDW SUPPLIER - 8916-ISJ X BP89(TEMPLATE TO 95 DEG) ED800J X CMP -J X FCOV FS -1 RM201-1 X TYPE 12 MTG 1076W 90137CP FRAMING MFG STANDARD 950S US26D BO CLR SE US26D DR US26D DR US26D SC DR US32D LN 626 DR 626 DR US32D DR US26D RK BRN SN CLR 'PE MILL NG OWNER SUPPLIED: 2EA PERM CYLINDER BY OWNER US26D SECURITY SUPPLIED: lEA CARD READER ACS -2 (BY SECURITY ) lEA POWER SUPPLY FOR CONTROLLER (BY SECURITY) PA Operational Statement: *Doors unlocked by card reader controller schedule during business hours. Aux. Relay from card reader controller assigned to input circuit of operator actuators making handicap operation available only when access system controller is in unlocked status. *Doors re -lock after business hours. Access by card reader; unlock duration set by card reader controller. Exterior actuator available only during unlock duration. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411-6 • • • • Gensler April 30, 2008 Bank of America 32.2177.089 CD Owner Review SouthCenter Tukwila, WA *Exit always allowed from push side of doors. Interior actuator tied to sequenced input of operator to unlock doors and swing active leaf open. *Keyswitch ]located on interior jamb to re -lock exits to secure doors during business hours where there is a perceived need to prevent access to the doors after a security event. Keyswitch to shunt card reader to prevent patron access. AL3 — Entrance Pair with Magnetic Locks NOTE: This shall only be used if Local Jurisdiction requires its use. AL1, is the approved standard. REFERENCE SHEET Al2.08 FOR ALL REQUIREMENTS RELATED TO THIS DOOR. AL4 — Entrance Pair with Magnetic Locks — Accessible Power Assist Option NOTE: This shall only be used if Local Jurisdiction requires its use. AL1 is the approved standard. Material Required Per Pair 8EA 2EA 2EA 1 EA 1 EA • 1 EA lEA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 2EA 2EA 2EA 2EA 1 EA l EA • HINGE TRANSFER RELEASE BAR DBL MAG LOCK KEY SWITCH TIMER KEY SWITCH WIRING DIAGRAM CLOSER OPERATOR/CLOSER ACTUATOR PULL HANDLE DPS SWEEP W -STRIP T -HOLD OWNER SUPPLIED: 2EA PERM CYLINDER SECURITY SUPPLIED: 1 EA EXIT BUTTON 1 EA CARD READER 1EA POWER SUPPLY BB5005 4 %z" X 4 '/z" X NRP US26D BO EPT CLR SE FSTB-BR1E US26D SE DM62-12 US32D SE 653 -05 -NS (EXTERIOR JAMB MTD) US32D LN 6062 (SET TO 10 SECONDS) AL 653 -14 -L2 -NS (INTERIOR JAMB MTD) US32D LN POINT TO POINT BY HRDW SUPPLIER SU 8916-ISJ X BP89(TEMPLATE TO 95 DEG) 626 DR ED800J X CMP -J X FCOV 626 DR FS -1 US32D DR RM201-1 X TYPE 12 MTG US26D RK 1076W BRN SN 90137CP CLR PE FRAMING MFG STANDARD 950S MILL NG BY OWNER BY SECURITY ACS -2 (BY SECURITY) PARABIT SYSTEM & MAGNETIC LCOKS - US26D PA Operational Statement: *Doors unlocked by exterior key switch located on door jamb. Unlock duration (10 SECONDS) set by 6062 timer. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411-7 Gensler April 30, 2008 32.2177.089 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA *Doors unlocked by card reader controller schedule during business hours. Aux. Relay from card reader controller assigned to input circuit of operator actuators making handicap operation available only when access system controller is m unlocked status. *Doors re -lock after business hours. Access by card reader; unlock duration set by card reader controller. Exterior actuator available only during unlock duration. *Exit always allowed from push side of doors. Interior actuator tied to sequenced input of operator to unlock doors and swing active leaf open. *Keyswitch located on interior jamb to re -lock exits to secure doors during business hours where there is a perceived need to prevent access to the doors after a security event. Keyswitch to shunt card reader to prevent patron access. AL5 - Entrance Single with Exit Device Optionl — Secondary Associate Entry Door Material Required Per Door 4EA lEA lEA lEA lEA lEA lEA lEA lEA HINGE EXIT TEMP CYL. CLOSER PULL HANDLE DPS SWEEP W -STRIP T -HOLD BB5005 4' /2" X 4' V2" X NRP CD -5303 X CYL X NO TRIM 20-021 (FOR EXIT TRIM) 8916-ISJ X BP89(TEMPLATE TO 95 DEG) RM201-1 X TYPE 12 MTG 1076W 90137CP FRAMING MFG STANDARD 950S OWNER SUPPLIED: 2EA PERM CYLINDER BY OWNER US26D BO US26D DR US26D SC 626 DR US26D RK BRN SN CLR PE MILL NG US26D Operational Statement: *Doors unlocked by key exterior, access to interior where employee may mechanically dog -down the exit device with keyed cylinder mounted into device rail for patron access during business hours. *Exit always allowed from push side of doors. AL6 - Entrance Single with Exit Device Option 3 — Secondary Front Non -Associate Entry Door Material Required Per Door 4EA lEA lEA lEA IEA lEA I EA HINGE EXIT CLOSER DPS SWEEP W -STRIP T -HOLD BB5005.4''A" X 4' /2" X NRP 5301 X NO TRIM X LESS DOGGING 8916-ISJ X BP89(TEMPLATE TO 95 DEG) 1076W 90137CP FRAMING MFG STANDARD 950S Operational Statement: *Exit door only. No exterior function. US26D BO US26D DR 626 DR BRN SN CLR PE MILL NG AL7 - Entrance Pair with Exit Devices — Option 4 Note ATM Vestibule Doors (Early RBSI Traditional Design) ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411-8 • • • Gensler April 30, 2008 32.2177.089 CD Owner Review Material Required Per Pair 8EA lEA lEA lEA 2EA 2EA 2EA 2EA lEA lEA HINGE ACT. EXIT INACT EXIT TEMP CYL. CLOSER PULL HANDLE DPS SWEEP W -STRIP T -HOLD BB5005 4' h" X 4'/Z" X NRP CD -5103 X ALD X CYL X NO TRIM CD -5103 X ALD X NO TRIM 20-021 (FOR EXIT TRIM) 8916-ISJ X BP89(TEMPLATE TO 95 DEG) RM201-1 X TYPE 12 MTG 1076W 90137CP FRAMING MFG STANDARD 950S Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA US26D US26D US26D US26D 626 US26D BRN CLR BO DR DR SC DR RK SN PE MILL NG OWNER SUPPLIED: 3EA PERM CYLINDER BY OWNER US26D Operational Statement: *Doors unlocked by key exterior, access to interior where employee may mechanically dog -down the exit device with keyed cylinder mounted into device rail for patron access during business hours. *Exit always allowed from push side of doors. AL8 - Entrance Single with Exit Device Option 4 — Secondary Front Associate Entry Door Material Required Per Pair 4EA lEA lEA lEA lEA lEA lEA lEA lEA HINGE EXIT TEMP CYL. CLOSER PULL HANDLE DPS SWEEP W -STRIP T -HOLD BB5005 4 '/2" X 4 '/2" X NRP US26D BO CD -5303 X CYL LOCK US26D DR 20-021 (FOR EXIT TRIM) US26D SC 8916-ISJ X BP89(TEMPLATE TO 95 DEG) 626 DR RM201-1 X TYPE 12 MTG US26D RK 1076W BRN SN 90137CP CLR PE FRAMING MFG STANDARD 950S MILL NG OWNER SUPPLIED: 2EA PERM CYLINDER BY OWNER Emergency Exit signage per detail US26D - Operational Statement: *Doors unlocked by key exterior, access to interior where employee may mechanically dog -down the exit device with keyedcylinder mounted into device rail for patron access during business hours. *Exit always allowed from push side of doors. AL9 - Entrance Single with Exit Device Option 4 — Entry to ATM NOTE: A single door at the entry shall only be used if required by local jurisdiction. If required, this is the approved standard. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411-9 Gensler 32.2177.089 Material Required Per Door 4EA lEA lEA lEA lEA lEA lEA lEA lEA lEA lEA lEA HINGE ACT. EXIT TEMP CYL. ELEC. STRIKE CARD READER KEY SWITCH WIRING DIAGRAM CLOSER PULL HANDLE SWEEP W -STRIP T -HOLD OWNER SUPPLIED: 2EA PERM CYLINDER SECURITY SUPPLIED: lEA EXIT BUTTON lEA CARD READER 1 EA POWER SUPPLY April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review BB5005 4' /2" X 41/2" X NRP 5303 X CYL X NO TRIM 20-021 (FOR EXIT TRIM) 310-4 X 12VDC X FSE ACS -2 (BY SECURITY ) 653 -14 -L2 -NS (JAMB MOUNTED) POINT TO POINT -BY HRDW SUPPLIER - 8916-ISJ X BP89(TEMPLATE TO 95 DEG) RM201-1 X TYPE 12 MTG 90137CP FRAMING MFG STANDARD 950S BY OWNER Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA US26D US26D US26D US26D US32D 626 US26D CLR MILL US26D BY SECURITY ACS -2 (BY SECURITY) PARABIT SYSTEM & ELECTRIC STRIKE - Operational Statement: *Doors unlocked by card reader controller schedule during business hours *Doors re -lock after business hours. Access by card reader; unlock duration set by ca *Exit always allowed from push side of doors. *Keyswitch located on interior jamb to re -lock exits to secure doors during business a perceived need to prevent access to the doors after a security event. Keyswitch to prevent patron access. BO DR SC FA PA LN DR RK PE NG PA rd reader controller. hours where there is shunt card reader to AL10 — Entrance Single with Magnetic Locks — Option 4 NOTE: This shall only be used if Local Jurisdiction requires its use. AL9 is the approved standard, if a single door is required by Local Jurisdiction. Material Required Per Door 4EA lEA lEA IEA lEA lEA lEA lEA lEA lEA lEA HINGE TRANSFER RELEASE BAR MAG LOCK KEY SWITCH TIMER KEY SWITCH WIRING DIAGRAM CLOSER PULL HANDLE DPS BB50054'/2"X4 %2"XNRP EPT FSTB-BRIE M62-12 653 -05 -NS (EXTERIOR JAMB MTD) 6062 (SET TO 10 SECONDS) 653 -14 -L2 -NS (INTERIOR JAMB MTD) POINT TO POINT- BY HRDW SUPPLIER 8916-ISJ X BP89(TEMPLATE TO 95 DEG) RM201-1 X TYPE 12 MTG 1076W ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS US26D BO CLR SE US26D CH US32D SE US32D LN AL US32D LN SU 626 DR US26D RK BRN SN 08411-10 • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA lEA SWEEP 90137CP CLR PE lEA W -STRIP FRAMING MFG STANDARD lEA T -HOLD 950S MILL NG OWNER SUPPLIED: 2EA PERM CYLINDER BY OWNER US26D SECURITY SUPPLIED: lEA EXTT BUTTON lEA CARD READER lEA POWER SUPPLY BY SECURITY ACS -2 (BY SECURITY) PARABIT SYSTEM & MAGNETIC LOCK - PA Operational Statement: *Doors unlocked by exterior key switch located on door jamb. Unlock duration set by 6062 timer. *Doors unlocked by card reader controller schedule during business hours. *Doors re -lock after business hours. Access by card reader; unlock duration set by card reader controller. *Exit always allowed from push side of doors. *Keyswitch :located on interior jamb to re -lock exits to secure doors during business hours where there is a perceived need to prevent access to the doors after a security event. Keyswitch to shunt card reader to prevent patron access. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Refer to Division 8 Section "Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls". END OF SECTION 08411 08411/2-01/m ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411-11 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review SECTION 08450 — MOVABLE GLASS WALLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Thiis Section includes glass, hardware and installation of tempered all -glass top -hung sliding panels. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division -1 Specifications sections apply to work of this section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each movable wall product specified. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330. Include with shop drawings glass thicknesses, metal finishes, and all other pertinent information as necessary to indicate compliance with the Contract Documents. Details of fastening and product joinery shall be shown to ensure proper performance of the field installation. No work shall be fabricated until shop drawings for that work have been approved by Architect and final field measurements have been taken. Prior to fabrication, and after finished walls and floor are installed, take final field measurements and update submittals with final measurements. Send copy of revised submittal to architect for record purposes only. C. References: Submit list of project references showing similar product installations into similar types of buildings. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Movable glass wall manufacturer must be regularly engaged in the heavy tempered glass panel manufacturing for a minimum of five (5) years. B. Installer Qualifications: Installer must be a "certified" installer by the movable glass wall manufacturer and be engaged in the heavy tempered glass panel installation business for a minimum of five (5) years. Furnish letter of certification from the movable glass wall manufacturer indicating that installer is certified. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING MOVABLE GLASS WALLS 08450-1 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. General: Protect panels and glazing materials during delivery, storage and handling to comply with manufacturer's direction and as required to prevent damage to the glass and hardware. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: After finished floor and walls are installed, verify dimensions of supporting structure and fmal opening size by field measurements before fabrication. Update shop drawing indicating fmal measurements. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. Send record copy of updated shop drawings to architect. B. Supporting Structure: Verify that supporting structure is installed correctly and is adequate to support movable glass wall system. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General: Furnish a written warranty signed by the fabricator of the movable glass wall agreeing to provide F.O.B. point of fabrication, freight allowed to jobsite, within a two (2) year warranty period, replacements for those panels which develop manufacturing defects. Warrant all goods to be free from manufacturing defects in material and workmanship. Manufacturing defects include any defect materially obstructing vision through the glass, and any mechanical failure of hardware which prevents the proper operation of the panels after appropriate installation and usage. Provide the glass manufacturer's standard warranty on the tempered glass. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Manufacturer: DORMA Glas -1520 Jabez Run, Suite 303, Millersville, MID 21108; Phone: (800) 451-0649, Fax: (301) 390-0011, Attention: Curtis Massey. B. Support Structure: Provide DORMA Glas HSW-Sub Structure or equivalent material for adequate support of sliding system. C. Glass Products - General: Provide tempered glass which complies with ASTM C 1036 and ASTM C 1048 requirements. 1. Sizes: Fabricate 'A" glass to sizes required for openings indicated, with edge clearances and tolerances complying with recommendations of glass and hardware manufacturer. . 2. Glass Fabrication: All holes, notches, etc. shall be drilled or cut in the glass prior to tempering. 3. Comply with requirements of Section 08800 — Glazing. D. Tempered Sliding Glass Panels: Provide DORMA Glas HSW-G150 top hung stackable sliding glass panels with DRS Rail System and without floor track. Provide a minimum wall thickness of .235" on the extruded aluminum top track. Incorporate cast aluminum or mitered transitions on track and stacking area. Track and transitions shall provide four integral reglets for alignment pins insuring both fit and roller surface integrity. MOVABLE GLASS WALLS 08450-2 • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1. Provide stainless steel sliding door carriers with vinyl roll surfaces. Incorporate eight wheels of varying dimension into carrier design. Wheel sizes interact with diverters to insure proper stack alignment. Mount a single carrier system in the center of the top rail allowing the glass door panels to be self balancing. Factory finish the top track with a white powder coat. 2. Manufacture top and bottom rails as a continuous two-piece assembly with removable black anodized end caps. Fasten base rails together from opposite sides of the door prohibiting unauthorized removal while allowing for field adjustment to job site conditions. Provide snap -on rail covers for installation after other trades complete adjacent work. Provide adjustable sweep for top rail. Provide HSW-DRS in 3-5/8" profile height. 3. Incorporate a double security design in the bottom rail locking system. Engage adjacent panels with an interlocking floor bolt to stabilize panels from movement in all directions. 4. Equip one end panel with a brass mortise lock allowing for cylinder operation. Cylinder is provided in Section 008710. Round bolts engage dust proof floor strikes (provided by DORMA Glas) for security. E. Accessories: 1. Provide DORMA Glas HSW Pulls to interlock vertical glass panels. Custom fabricate pulls as required per panel layout. Locate pulls at 42" centerline above floor. Install pulls on each side of each panel. 2. Provide a Uniprine Channel Edge Guard on each edge of the glass panels from above and below the HSW Pulls down to the bottom rail and to above to the top rail. 3. Furnish each Bank of America project with one (1) HSW Bottom Rail Unlocking Tool. 4. Furnish each Bank of America with an operational video explaining the operation and maintenance of the movable glass wall system. F. Hardware Finish: Powder coated Fleet Gold, by Prismatic Powders, a division of NIC Industries, Inc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Inspect door framing erection for compliance with manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, plumb and squareness. B. Level supporting structure to 1/8" (.125") over 120" (10 feet) or 'A" (.25") over entire opening. C. Examine top track support and anchorage for structural adequacy. D. Report any conditions which may adversely affect the installation or performance of the movable glass wall system to the architect. 3.2 INSTALLATION MOVABLE GLASS WALLS 08450-3 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Comply with printed recommendations of movable wall manufacturer. Install top track level and true to the layout shown on the approved shop drawings. B. Adjust the hardware and lock strikes to obtain proper panel clearance in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and shop drawings. 3.3 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect glass and doors from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come in contact with the glass or hardware, remove immediately by method recommended by manufacture. B. Wash glass on both faces not more than four (4) days prior to date scheduled for inspections intended to establish dates of substantial completion in each area of the project END OF SECTION 08450 MOVABLE GLASS WALLS 08450-4 • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 SECTION 08711 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review A. This Section includes door hardware. 1.2 SUBMITTALS Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Door Hardware Schedule: Submit door hardware schedule prepared by or under the supervision of door hardware supplier. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. The Architect's review of schedule shall neither be construed as a complete check nor shall it relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors, deviations, or omissions from the specified requirements to provide complete door hardware for the project. B. Keying Schedule: Submit keying schedule prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations. • C. Warranties: Submit special warranties specified in this Section. • 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Supplier Qualifications: Door hardware supplier, who has completed a minimum of three (3) projects over the last 5 years which were similar in material, design and extent to that indicated for the project - as determined by the Architect — and which have resulted in construction with a record of successful in service performance, and who is or employs a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant, available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following: 1. Provide hardware items complying with the applicable provisions for accessibility and usability by the disabled and handicapped in compliance with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)" and the authorities having jurisdiction, where regulatory requirements and the authorities having jurisdiction conflict the more stringent shall be provided. DOOR HARDWARE 08711-1 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA D. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system. E. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door hardware for assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. Provide only door hardware items that are identical to items tested by UL for the types and sizes of doors required. In case of conflict between type of hardware specified and type required for accessibility or fire protection, furnish type required by NFPA and UL. Doors indicated in fire rated partitions and walls shall be positive latching and self-closing where required by applicable codes. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Templates: Furnish templates and door hardware schedules, coordinated for the application of door hardware items with door and frame details, to door opening fabricators and trades performing door opening work to permit the preparation of doors and frames to receive the specified door hardware. Where the door hardware item scheduled is not adaptable to the finished size of door opening members requiring door hardware, submit an item having a similar operation and quality to the Architect for review. Each door hardware item shall be fabricated to templates. B. Electrical System Roughing -in: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies and access control security system. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Faulty operation of door hardware. 2. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. B. Warranty Period for All Hardware: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. DOOR HARDWARE 08711-2 • • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 PART 2- PRODUCTS April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section, and the Door, Frame and Hardware Group Schedule and the Hardware Groups schedule on the drawings. 1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, fmish or color indicated, and named manufacturer's products. 2. The hardware supplier shall review each hardware set and compare it with the door types, details, and sizes indicated and verify each hardware item for function, hand, backset, and method of fastening through shop drawing submittals. 3. * Indicates item used in hardware sets. 2.2 HINGES AND PIVOTS A. Butt Hinge Products and Manufacturers: 1. Standard Weight, Ball Bearing, 5 Knuckle, Steel (Interior Door Hinges Only): Complying with BHMA A156.1 A8112, US26D finished, one of the following: a. BB5000; Bommer Industries, Inc.* b. BB 1279; Hager Companies. c. TB2714; McKinney Products Company. d. FBB 179; Stanley Commercial Hardware. 2. Heavy Weight, Ball Bearing, 5 Knuckle, Bronze, Non -Removable Pins (NRP) (Exterior Door Hinges Only): Complying with BHMA A156.1 A2111, US26D finished, one of the following: a. BB5005; Bommer Industries, Inc.* b. BB 1199; Hager Companies. c. T4A3386; McKinney Products Company. d. FBB199; Stanley Commercial Hardware. B. Pivot and Pivot Hinge Product and Manufacturer: 1. Center Pivots: Mortised mounted, non -handed, center pivot set with sealed bearings for protection against debris and composed of a head mounted top pivot and floor mounted bottom pivot. Complying with BHMA A156.4 C07032. a. Model 128-3/4 Center Hung Pivot Set with 320 standard top pivot; Rixson- Firemark, Inc. (RIX). b. Model CP440 Center Hung Pivot Set; DORMA Architectural Hardware * DOOR HARDWARE 08711-3 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA C. General Hinge Characteristics: Where door jamb or trim projects to such an extent that the width of leaf specified will not allow the door to clear such frame or trim, furnish hinges with leaves of sufficient width to clear. Hinges shall be template hinges conforming to BHMA A156.1 and in accordance with door and frame material requirements. D. Butt Hinge Size: 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) h. x 4 inches (102 mm) or 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) w. E. Hinge Characteristics: Full mortise type with square corners. All butt hinges are to have non - rising pins for interior hinges and all exterior butt hinges are to be made of non-ferrous base metal. All butt hinges shall be furnished with button tips. F. Fasteners: Package all hinges and pivots with machine and wood screws as required by door and frame construction. 2.3 LOCKS AND LATCHES , A. Functions: Where the drawings indicated lock and latch functions they shall be defined as follows: Function Bored Lock Standard Mortised Lock Standard Storeroom ANSI F86 ANSI F07 no outside lever Classroom ANSI F84 Not Used Privacy ANSI F76 Not Used Passage ANSI F75 Not Used Communicating ANSI F80 Not Used Deadlock Not Used ANSI F18 B. Bored Lock and Latch Sets: Extra heavy duty, commercial, cylindrical bodies complying with BHMA A156.2 Series 4000, Grade 1. Furnish cylindrical type, field reversible, lock and latch sets with deadlocking latch bolts having a minimum 1/2 inch (13 mm) throw together with guard (auxiliary) latch added to bolt, 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) backset. All lock and latch sets, to be furnished complete with cylindrical bodies, trim, beveled square cornered fronts, and 6 pin tumbler key in lever core. Provide box strikes for each lock and latch set with curved lips of sufficient length to protect frames. Provide plated cast zinc levers with plated wrought roses. Product fmish to be US26D. 1. DORMA CL800 Series, LC Trim; DORMA Architectural Hardware* 2. Schlage D -Series, Sparta SPA; Schlage Lock Company, Division of Ingersoll-Rand 3. Sargent 11 -Line, BP Trim; Sargent Lock, Division of Assa Abloy. DOOR HARDWARE 08711-4 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA C. Bored Lock and Latch Sets: Heavy duty, commercial, cylindrical bodies complying with BHMA A156.2 Series 4000, Grade 2. Provide Grade 2 locks in US26D, 626 finish at locations indicated in the hardware sets. 1. DORMA CL700 Series, LC Trim; DORMA Architectural Hardware* 2. Schlage AL -Series, Neptune NEP Trim; Schlage Lock Company, Division of Ingersoll- Rand. 3. Sargent 7 -Line, LP Trim; Sargent Lock, Division of Assa Abloy. D. Mortise Lock Sets: Heavy duty, commercial, mortise bodies complying with BHMA A156.13 Series 1000, Grade 1, with throughbolted lever trim. Furnish mortise type, field reversible, lock and latch sets with 2 piece anti -friction deadlocking brass or stainless steel latchbolts having a minimum 3/4 inch (19 mm) throw, 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) backset. All lock sets, to be furnished complete with heavy gage wrought steel zinc dichromate or chrome plated case, trim, adjustable beveled square cornered armored fronts, steel or stainless steel hubs, and 6 pin cylinders. Provide box strikes for each lock and latch set with curved lips of sufficient length to protect frames. Provide solid forged or cast levers with wrought roses. Provide non -handed guard bolt and stainless steel deadbolt with a minimum 1 inch (25 mm) throw. Product fmish to be US26D. 1. DORMA ML9000 Series, LGA Design, DORMA Architectural Hardware* 2. Schlage L9000 Series, 07A Design; Schlage Lock Company, Division of Ingersoll-Rand. 3. Sargent 8200 Series, LNP Design, Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware, Division of Assa Abloy E. Padlocks: Minimum 11/32" diameter hardened stainless steel shackle with multiple plating for wear and corrosion resistance, case shall be machined from solid extruded brass. Housing shall be machined for 6 pin core. 1. 758; Sargent Manufacturing Company. 2. PL5000; Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware. 3. PL1000; Schlage Lock Company. 2.4 DOOR BOLTS A. Manual Flush Bolts: Provide flush bolts, with 1" wide fronts, in paired sets (top and bottom), with 1/2" diameter flattened bolt tip and standard 12". rod. Flush bolts shall fit ANSI A115.4 door and frame preparation. Flush bolts UL Listed. Bolts for fire doors to comply with BHMA A156.16, Type L14081, L14251 or L24081. Furnish rods of proper length to afford easy reach frorn the floor. Furnish manufacturers standard top strikes for top bolts. Product finish to be US26D. 1. Manual Flushbolts for Wood Doors: One of the following: a. 1555; Don -Jo Manufacturing* b. No. 790F; Door Controls International. c. FB358; Ives: H. B. Ives. d. 3913; Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company, Inc. e. 557; Rockwood Manufacturing Company. 2. Manual Flushbolts for Metal Doors: One of the following: DOOR HARDWARE 08711-5 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review a. 1555; Don -Jo Manufacturing* b. No. 780F; Door Controls International (DCI). c. FB458; Ives: H. B. Ives (IVS). d. 3917; Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company, Inc. (TBM). e. 555; Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). 2.5 CYLINDERS AND KEYING Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Cores for Bored Cylindrical Locksets: Provide key -in lever 6 pin interchangeable core cylinders for all bored cylindrical locksets, keyed as required, as manufactured by the bored lockset manufacturer. B. Cylinders: 1. Typical Cylinders: Small format interchangeable core 6 -pin cylinders. Cylinder housings to have square shoulder and compression rings. All cylinders keyed into existing building system or new system as required, with cams to suit lock functions. Provide cores for installation into all locks. a. 73-43 (7300B Series) Mortise Cylinder, Sargent Lock; Division of Assa Abloy b. 96B 10 Mortise Cylinder; DORMA Architectural Hardware* c. 80-301 Mortise Cylinder; Schlage Lock Company, Division of Ingersoll Rand C. Keying System: Factory registered key control system. All locks shall be keyed alike. Provide 3 nickel silver change keys for each lock. Provide 3 control keys and 3 construction master keys. Provide 1 blank key for each lock for the Owner's convenience in making additional keys. Each key shall be furnished with large, not standard, sized bows. Each key bow shall be inscribed with a visual key control number and "DO NOT DUPLICATE" notation. Finish face of cores to match lockset. 1. Construction Cores: Provide keyed construction cores in cylinders during construction and as may be necessary for security or as may be requested by the Owner. All construction cores shall be individually keyed as required and subject to a single master key. 2. Permanent Cores: Provide and install keyed permanent cores at the end of the project with all permanent keys and control keys turned over directly to owner. D. key gathering envelopes, labels, reserve pattern key tags with self-locking key clips, key receipt forms, key receipt holders, 3 way visible card index, temporary key markers and permanent key markers. 1. MMF Industries 2. Lund Equipment 3. Telkee DOOR HARDWARE 08711-6 • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 2.6 STRIKES April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Strikes for Locks and Latches: All strikes for locks and latches shall be provided by the lock and latch manufacturer unless otherwise specified or scheduled, refer to Article `Locks and Latches'. B. Dustproof Floor Strikes: Complying with BHMA A156.16, Type L04251 or L14021, finish to be US26D, one of the following: 1. 1570, Don -Jo Manufacturing* 2. No. 80; Door Controls International. 3. DP2; H.B. Ives. 4. 3910; Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company, Inc. 5. 570 x 571; Rockwood Manufacturing Company. C. Electric Strikes: Complying with BHMA A156.5, Type E09321, Grade L Mortised type for dead latch devices mounted in metal frames. Furnish in 24 volt AC or DC continuous voltage for silent operation, with extended lips as required to suit jamb conditions, fail safe function. Remote electrical control from card reader or control panel will unlock strike jaw, releasing latc:hbolt of the deadlatch, so door can be opened without operating latch by key cylinders from outside of vestibules leading to secured rooms. Finish to be US26D. 1. 1006 Series, HES D. Door Pin Grommet: Schlage 10-064 Circular Drive-in thimble strike with US26D finish. 2.7 OPERATING TRIM (PULLS) A. Not Used. 2.8 CLOSERS A. Surface -Mounted Closers: Closers shall meet BHMA A 156.4, Grade 1. Properly detail closers to meet application requirements by providing drop plates, brackets, etc. to meet application and installation requirements as indicated. Comply with manufacturers recommendations for size of door closer depending on size of door, stack pressure conditions, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. If "IS" or "S -IS" arm is specified in hardware sets and manufacturer does not offer this arm type, then provide regular arm mounted closer and an overhead stop equal to DORMA 900 Series. Provide closers in 696 finish, painted gold. 1. 8916; DORMA Architectural Hardware 2. 4110/4010; LCN Closers, Division of Ingersoll Rand 3. 281; Sargent Manufacturing Company, Division of Assa Abloy DOOR HARDWARE 08711-7 Gensler 32.2177.089 2.9 STOPS April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Wall Stops: Wrought design with concave rubber bumper, plastic anchor and toggle bolt... Product finish to be US26D. a. 1407; Don -Jo Manufacturing* b. 4071/2; H.B. Ives, Division of Ingersoll Rand c. 1270WV; Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company, Inc. d. 409; Rockwood Manufacturing Company. e. 491 Rockwood For Flipper Door no. 100C and 100D Door type E B. Silencers for Metal Door Frames: BHMA A156.16, Type L03011; grey rubber, minimum diameter 1/2 inch (13 mm); fabricated for drilled -in application to frame, specifically designed to form an air pocket to absorb shock and reduce noise of door closing. Provide 2 silencers for each pair of doors, 3 silencers for each single door, 4 silencers for each flipper door. 2.10 THRESHOLDS A. Typical: 1/2 inch (13 mm) high by 5 inch (127 mm) wide extruded aluminum panic threshold with resilient bumper gasket. 1. 2001; PEMKO Manufacturing* 2. 477S; Hager Companies. 3. 950; National Guard Products, Inc. 4. S257AV; Reese Enterprises, Inc. 5. 566A; Zero International, Inc. 2.11 HEAD AND JAMB GASKETS A. Type 2: Self adhesive flexible silicone type, continuous gaskets for installation at heads and jambs of doors: 1. 5050C; National Guard Products, Inc. 2. S88BL; Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc.* 3. 188BK; Zero International, Inc. 2.12 BRUSH WEATHERSEALS A. General: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold or finished floor when door is closed. B. Continuous door bottom aluminum extrusion with continuous nylon brush pile sweep; sweep shall be field cut to length required to have positive contact with threshold without binding door. 1. 90137CP; Pemko.* 2. C390MIL; Sealeze. DOOR HARDWARE 08711-8 • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review 2.13 MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Electronic Pushbutton Lockset: Extra heavy-duty cylindrical lockset, solid cast housings, solid cast levers, cylindrical drive wear tested for extensive use. 1. Numeric Keypad: Vandal resistant, 12 -button, metal keys 2. Key Override: Small Format Interchangeable Core. 3. Programming: Program locks via keypad or with software package. 4. Number of Codes: 100 access codes per door. 5. Audit Trail: Records most recent 3,000 lock events in memory. 6. Batteries: Provide four AA Alkaline batteries per lock. Lock data must be maintained if batteries fail. 7. Installation: Install locks without use of wires passing through door. 8. Handheld Computer: Provide Palm Pilot handheld computer, or similar, to facilitate lock programming and audit trail retrieval. 9. Software: Include lock software EP100SW. 10. Finish: US26D Satin Chrome. a. E-PLEX 5000 Cylindrical by Kaba; www.kaba-ilco.com; Phone: (800) 849-8324. B. Door Peep Scope: Door viewer Warnock Hersey rated to 60 minutes. Door Scope DS/1000- MG Model in manufacturer's MG -Grey; Du Seung Trading Corp., 1635 Lakes Parkway, Suite B, Lawrenceville, Georgia 30043, (800) 274 -SCOPE (7267). C. Roller Latches: Special roller latch fabricated from brass or bronze, for single doors, minimum 1 inch (25 mm) wide x 2-1/4 inches long base for mortising into the head door frame, adjustable nylon covered roller latch and ramp roller strike; US26D satin chrome finished. 1. RL32; H. B. Ives (IVS). 2. 320R; Hager.* D. Kick Plates: Not Used E. Card Reader System: ACS -2 ATM Vestibule Card Access System; Parabit Systems. F. Exit Button: BC205B unlighted white push button with gold trim; (set flush in drywall - button and trim show only). This product is available from Lee Electric Inc. 309-11 51st Street., New York NY. 2.14 FA13RICATION A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Provide each door hardware item without exposed manufacturers labels, names, or designs. B. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to commercially recognized industry standards for application intended. Provide Phillips oval -head screws with DOOR HARDWARE 08711-9 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA finished heads to match surface of door hardware item being attached. Machine screws and expansion shields shall be used for attaching hardware to concrete. 1. Concealed Fasteners: All new doors and door frames have been specified with adequate blocking and reinforcement provisions to eliminate exposed throughbolting of hardware items. Doors installed with exposed throughbolts will be rejected and replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. 2.15 FINISHES A. Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.18. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Finishes of the same designation, that come from 2 or more sources, shall match when the items are viewed at arms length and approximately 2' apart. Unless otherwise scheduled, match each hardware item in a single hardware set with the scheduled latch or lock set finish. Painting of BHMA 600 (USP) surfaces is required and is specified under Division 9 Section `Painting': C. Designations: The abbreviations used to schedule hardware finishes are generally BHMA (Federal Standards where indicated in parenthesis) designations. Comply with base material and finish requirements indicated by the following: 1. BHMA 626 (US26D): Satin chrome, clear coated (brass & bronze base material). 2. BHMA 652 (US26D): Satin chrome, (steel base material). 2.16 EXIT DEVICES A. Exit Devices: Exit devices and exit device accessories shall conform to BHMA A156.3, Grade 1. Trim shall be wrought construction and commercial plain design with straight, beveled or smoothly rounded sides, corners and edges. Keyed devices shall be furnished less cylinders. Cylinders shall be as herein specified keyed to building system. Provide an alarm battery kit with each push pad device that contains an internal horn such that when the touchbar is depressed the horn will sound to provide an audible alarm that the opening has been violated. 1. Push Pad Style Exit Devices: (Exit Only no outside trim) Rim Device with Exit Alarm Kit US26D Finish9300-BPA x No Trim; DORMA Architectural Hardware* 2. 99E0 x ALK; Von-Duprin, Division of Ingersoll Rand 3. 5800; Sargent Manufacturing; Division of Assa Abloy B. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305. DOOR HARDWARE 08711-10 • • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Hardware for fire door assemblies shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 80. Install hardware for non -labeled door assemblies in accordance DHI A115 (for steel doors and frames, DHI A115 -W series for wood doors, and hardware manufacturers installation instructions for doors and frames fabricated from other than steel or wood. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at the following heights, unless specifically indicated on the drawings or required to comply with governing regulations: 1. Locks and Latches: 38 inches (956 mm) to center of lever from finish floor. 2. Door Pulls: 44 inches (1118 mm) from finish floor to center of grip. Pull bases centered on door stiles, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Butt Hinges: 10 inches (254 mm) to bottom of lowest hinge from finish floor; 5 inches (127 mm) to top of upper hinge from top of door; space intermediate hinges equally between lower and upper hinges. 4. Deadbolts and Electronic Pushbutton Locks: Not more than 44 inches (1118 mm) from finish floor to operating trim or centerline of cipher lock. 5. Flush Bolt Operating Mechanisms: Top bolt 66 to 72 inches (1676 to 1829 mm) from finish floor, bottom bolt 12 inches (305 mm) from finish floor. 6. Door Peep Scopes: As indicated on the 'door types' elevations. 7. Exit Device: 40 inches (1016 mm) from finish floor to center of touch bar. B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install overhead surface closers for maximum degree of opening obtainable. Place on room side of corridor doors, secondary corridor side of doors between corridors. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be finished, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface -mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. C. Do not install permanent key cylinders in locks until the time of preliminary acceptance by the Owner. At the time of preliminary acceptance, and in the presence of the Owner's representative, permanent key all lock cylinders. Record and file all keys in the key control system specified, and turn system over to Owner for sole possession and control. D. Key control storage system shall be installed where directed by the Owner. E. Thresholds: Thresholds shall be secured with a minimum of 3 fasteners per single door width and 6 fasteners per double door width with a maximum spacing of 12 inches (305 mm). Minimum screw size shall be No. 10 length, dependent on job conditions, with a minimum of 3/4 inch (19 mm) thread engagement into the floor or anchoring device used. Screw heads to be countersunk and flush with face of threshold. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." DOOR HARDWARE 08711-11 Gensler April 30, 2008 32.2177.089 CD Owner Review 3.3 ADJUSTING Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Adjust each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every hardware component. Replace hardware components that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for building stack pressures and fmal operation of forced air mechanical equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Test each electrical hardware item to determine if devices are properly functioning. Wiring shall be tested for correct voltage, current carrying capacity, and proper grounding. Stray voltages in wiring shall be eliminated. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. Clean hardware components as necessary to restore proper finish. Provide protection during the progress of the work and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is in perfect working order and without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.5 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE Hardware Set 1 Each Door to Receive: Cylinders As required Balance of hardware provided in Section 08411. Hardware Set 2 Each Door to Receive: 1 set Pivots 1 ea. Electric Strike 1 ea. Time Delay Relay 1 ea. Lock (F20) I ea. Push Button 1 ea. Power Supply 1 ea. Concealed Pull (Rockwood) 1 ea. Door Pin Grommet 1 ea. Stop (No. 491 by Rockwood) 3 ea. Silencers CP440 1006 HTD (Fail Safe) Smart Pac II ML9953 x less both trim x less strike BC205B (5/8") unlighted white push button with chrome trim; (set flush in drywall - buttom and trim show only) 502RF x KL 94C x 626 1608/1609 Note: Coordinate cylinder length with location of lock in door. SEE DIAGRAM BELOW DOOR HARDWARE 08711-12 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 CI3A ZIoLT LOOS MUST tltBH COCKS1 WORM NOMV 1 f, ma, April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA B. ELEVATION (ATM ROOM SIDE) LW9Y5!QE 1. PLAN Me* eteMQ Hardsv. Sat 2 — Oor 1000 A. ELEVATION (LOBBY SIDE) Eee4 Omer 19 Rae*. 1 Mt Mots tCP440 1 am Electric %Wks 1006 H1) (pea Si.)o t .et Prat. 11410y Ns eye Smart Pea . ;p 1 ea leek (p20) 919953 r IW beth Ulm r lar. e1rlke t ft* PIM Button E1C1058 (9/41 ut6ltted *bite pude button .Ub 009 911111 {pt tMtt h dr * 1 — tivttore end ble shown ray) Ip 94C * 404 t la Pos*r Supply t or tklnooei.d P I (Aecr.00d { j 1 ob. Oar Plt Grommet r 1 en Step �o. 491 by Rbocksoed) 4 a0. Suers 1906/1409 Note CardAat11 cy0ndar irtpth Nth totoiler bt lock H dor_ DESIGN STANDARDS AUGUST 2, 2007 FLIPPER DOOR DIAGRAM Bank of America FLIPPER DOOR HARDWARE DOOR HARDWARE 08711-13 Gensler 32.2177.089 Hardware Set 12A Each Door to Receive: 4 ea. Hinges 1 ea. Passage Lock 1 ea. Closer/Stop 3 ea. Silencers Hardware Set 13 Each Door to Receive: 4 ea. 1 ea. 1 ea. 1 ea. 1 ea. 1 ea. 1 set 1 ea. Hinges Exit Device with Alarm Cylinder Closer/Stop Threshold Door Sweep Weatherstrip Rain Drip Hardware Set 14 Each Hatch to Receive: 1 ea. Padlock April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review LB5000 — 450 CL880 8916 — IS (DS at Door 114A) 1608 LB5001 —450—NRP 9300 — BPA As required 8916 -S -DS 2001 G 90137GP 316GN 346G Hardware Set 15 1 ea. Handheld Computer Palm Pilot or Equivalent Note: Verify model provided is compatible with Kaba E-Plex 5000. Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA Note: General Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating removal of all construction cores, and Installation of fmal key cores prior to branch turnover T-14 Turnover. General Contractor to coordinate work with TCC Project Manager/Facility Manager for coordination of keying schedule requirements. END OF SECTION 08711 DOOR HARDWARE 08711-16 • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 SECTION 0:8800 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Th:is Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Doors. 2. Curtain walls. 3. Aluminum entrances. 4. Punched windows. 5. Interior borrowed lites. 6. Storefront framing. B. Refer to Division 8 Section "Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls" for requirements applicable to single subcontract responsibility for glazing. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide and install watertight and airtight glazing systems capable of withstanding thermal movement and wind and impact loads without failure of any kind, including loss or breakage of glass, failure of seal or gaskets, exudation of glazing sealants, and excessive deterioration of glazing materials. B. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses and heat treatments indicated are minimum requirements. Glazing details shown are for convenience of detailing only and are to be confirmed by the Contractor relative to cited standards and fmal framing details. Confirm glass thicknesses and heat treatments, verified by analysis, as required to meet the performance and testing requirements specified in Division 8 Section "Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls". 1.3 SUI3MITTALS A. Product Data: Submit product data for each glass product and glazing material indicated. B. Thermal Stress and Wind Load Analyses: Submit the following from the glass manufacturer: 1. Thermal stress analysis for each exterior glass unit type, each building elevation. The analysis shall clearly indicate all the expected service temperature ranges and the effects of partial and full shading on the glass. Append to the thermal stress analysis a statement from the glass manufacturer that based upon this analysis that the resulting thermal stresses will not reduce the specified "statistical probability of breakage". GLAZING 08800-1 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 2. Wind load analysis for each glass unit type. The analysis shall clearly indicate that the statistical probability of breakage at the design wind pressure will not exceed the specified statistical probability of breakage. C. Samples: Label samples to indicate product, characteristics, and locations in the work. Furnish samples of the following: 1. Except for clear glass, submit samples of each glass type specified, in the form of 12- inch- (300 -mm-) square Samples. 2. Submit samples of each glass type specified where production run variations, and defects are expected. D. Warranties: Submit special warranties specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations for Glass and Glass Accessories: Obtain glass and glass accessories from one source for each product indicated below: 1. Primary glass. 2. Heat treated glass. 3. Insulating glass. 4. Glazing gaskets. C. Safety Glass: Comply with the applicable requirements of the laws, codes, ordinances and regulations of Federal and Municipal authorities having jurisdiction, wherever requirements conflict the more stringent shall be required. Obtain approvals from all such authorities. As a minimum provide Category I1 materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 (Consumer Product Safety Commission "Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials", as published in the Code of Federal Regulations), ANSI Z97.1. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, permanently mark safety glass with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. GANA Publications: GANA'S "Glazing Manual? 2. IGMA Publications: SIGMA TM -3000, "Vertical Glazing Guidelines." E. Insulating -Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC). GLAZING 08800-2 • Gensler 32.2177.089' April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Written warranty, made out to Owner and signed by insulating -glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for insulating - glass units whose hermetic seal has failed within specified warranty period indicated below. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. Upon notification of such deterioration within the warranty period furnish replacement glass units for failed glass units at the convenience of the Owner. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. • PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS • A. Refer to the drawings for the extent of glass types and locations. Glass types indicated on the drawings are keyed to the Part 3 Glass Schedule Articles at the end of this section. The Contractor shall confirm the levels of heat treatment required for each glass type scheduled as contained in Articles Performance Requirements, Submittals and Quality Assurance. 2.2 PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select); class as indicated in schedules at the end of Part 3. 2.3 HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS A. General: Heat treat glass where the need is determined by thermal stress analyses, by wind load anallyses, and fully temper glass where required to meet safety glazing requirements. B. Sizes and Cutting: Prior to heat treatment, cut glass to required sizes as determined by accurate measurement of openings to be glazed, making allowance for required edge clearances. Cut and GLAZING 08800-3 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA process edges in accordance with glass manufacturer's recommendations. Do not cut or treat edges in the field. C. Heat -Strengthened Glass: Provide glass complying with ASTM C1048 Kind HS. Surface compression range shall be between 4,000 psi (27.6 MPa) and 7,000 psi (48 MPa). D. Fully Tempered Glass: Provide glass complying with ASTM C1048 Kind FT and meeting the requirements of ANSI Z97.1. Surface compression shall be equal to or greater than 10,000 psi (69 MPa). 2.4 INSULATING GLASS A. Insulating -Glass Units: Preassembled units, with dehydrated entrapped air, consisting of sheets of glass hermetically sealed at all edges with a polyisobutylene primary and a silicone secondary elastomeric sealant. The lites of glass shall be separated by dessicant containing aluminum spacers. All insulating glass units shall be IGCC certified to comply with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units and with requirements specified in this Article and in the Glass Schedule at the end of Part 3. 1. Provide Kind HS (heat -strengthened) float glass where needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) where safety glass is indicated. 2.5 GLAZING SEALANTS A. Gasket, Blocking, and Spacer Wet Glazing Materials: Silicone, compatible with and adherent to each material it will be in contact with, as recommended by the manufacturer to fulfill performance requirements. B. Butt Glazing Sealants: Refer to Section 07920 `Joint Sealants', Article `Elastomeric Joint Sealants', subparagraph `Structural Glazing'. 2.6 GLAZING GASKETS A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Continuous extruded EPDM or silicone compatible rubber with, cross sectional profile, physical properties, and tolerances as recommended by the curtain wall manufacturer, and as required, to comply with the performance requirements specified and shown all in compliance with the applicable provisions of ASTM C864, Option II. B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Continuous extruded expanded EPDM or silicone compatible rubber foam with, cross sectional profile, physical properties, and tolerances as recommended by the curtain wall manufacturer, and as required, to comply with the performance requirements specified and shown all in compliance with the applicable provisions of ASTM C509, Option II, Type II. C. Continuous Structural Gaskets/Spacers: Continuous extruded silicone or silicone compatible rubber, with cross sectional profile, physical properties, and tolerances as recommended by the GLAZING 08800-4 • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA curtain wall manufacturer, and as required, to comply with the performance requirements specified and shown. Gaskets/Spacers shall be tested for compatibility with silicone sealants and shall be subject to the acceptance of the sealant manufacturer. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces, and wet glazing materials, contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Silicone complying with ASTM C1115 (Type C), blocks, 85 +/- 5 Shore A durometer hardness, 1/16 inch (1.5 -mm) less than the channel width, and length based on the square footage of the glass unit to be supported in accordance with GANA standards and glass manufacturer recommendations but not less than 4 inches (101.6 mm). D. Edge Blocks: Silicone complying with ASTM C1115 (Type C), blocks, 65 +/- 5 Shore A durometer hardness, minimum 4 inches (101.6 mm) long and sized to allow 1/8 inch (3.18 mm) clearance between edge of glass and block. 2.8 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard, to comply with sysl.em performance requirements. 1. Edge and Surface Conditions: Comply with the recommendations of AAMA "Structural Properties of Glass" for "clean-cut" edges, except comply with manufacturer's recommendations when they are at variance therewith. B. Cutting: Do not nip glass edges. Edges may be wheel cut or sawed and seamed at manufacturer's option. For glass to be cut at site, provide glass 2 inches (50.8 mm) larger than required in both dimensions, so as to facilitate cutting of clean cut edges without the necessity of seaming or nipping. Do not cut, seam, nip or abrade heat-treated glass. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine glass framing, with glazier and glass framing erector present, for compliance with the following: GLAZING 08800-5 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review 1. Compliance with the specified manufacturing and installation for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass -framing members. Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA tolerances, including those B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing stops, glazing channels, and rabbets which will be in contact with the glazing materials immediately before glazing. Loose particles present or resulting from fabrication and cleaning shall be removed by blowing out joints with oil free compressed air, or by vacuuming joints. Remove protective coatings, oils from cutting and drilling operations, and residue on metallic surfaces with solvents that leave no residue. Do not allow solvent to air dry without wiping. Use only lint free towels for wiping of surfaces. Wipe metal surfaces with IPA (isopropyl alcohol) or xylene unless otherwise required by the wet glazing manufacturer for proper compatibility and adhesion. 1. Prime surfaces to receive glazing compounds. When priming, comply with wet glazing manufacturers recommendations. B. Inspect each piece of glass immediately before installation. Do not install pieces which are improperly sized or have damaged edges, scratches or abrasion or other evidence of damage. Remove labels from glass immediately after installation.GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. 1. All glass units shall be installed in accordance with the glass manufacturers recommendations. a. Structurally Glazed Insulating Glass Units: Set full height continuous structural gaskets/spacers to vertical mullions. Set glass units with void between edge of units and head/sill channel, but with units fully within head/sill rebate so as to provide a proper bite. Align glass unit edges over vertical mullion continuous structural gasket/spacers and secure with manufacturers recommended temporary cleats. Structurally seal glass unit to vertical mullions with specified one -part structural silicone sealant. Tool structural silicone flush in alignment to mullion face and perpendicular to face of interior glass light; remove excess structural silicone from glass and metal substrates. After full cure of structural silicone sealant remove temporary cleats. Any holes left in the vertical mullions which were caused by the temporary cleats shall be sealed immediately. Insert and shape weatherseal joint backer rods, or gaskets, into vertical void between glass units and at a proper depth to receive silicone weatherseal sealant. Place silicone weatherseal sealant into void and tool flush with adjacent exterior glass light faces; remove excess sealant from glass and metal substrates. GLAZING 08800-6 • • • Gensler April 30, 2008 Bank of America 32.2177.089 CD Owner Review SouthCenter Tukwila, WA B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to surfaces indicated to receive glazing materials. E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless more stringent requirements are recommended by glass manufacturer. Place blocks to allow water passage to weep holes. 1. For Glass Units Less Than 72 inches (1830 mm): Locate setting blocks at sill one- quarter of the width in from each end of the glass unless otherwise recommended by the glass manufacturer. 2. For Glass Units 72 inches (1830 mm) or Greater: Locate setting blocks at sill one-eighth of the width in from each end of the glass, but not less than 6 inches (150 mm), unless otherwise recommended by the glass manufacturer. F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G. Provide edge blocking to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, sized and located to comply with the glass manufacturers recommendations and the requirements in referenced glazing publications. H. Set glass lites with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics, producing the greatest possible degree of uniformity in appearance on the entire exterior wall elevation. 1. Set glass units with void between edge of units and glazing channel. 2. Orient and install insulating glass units made up with the uncoated glass light on the inboard (building) side. I. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. J. Miter cut gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away and join with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer which will provide an airtight and watertight seal at the joint. 3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. GLAZING 08800-7 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior Portland cement (stucco) surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way and from any source, including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism. E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer. 3.5 GLASS SCHEDULE A. Monolithic Uncoated Clear Float Glass (Interior Glass Only): Provide Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear) glass lites for interior glass units. Fully temper glass where required to meet safety glazing requirements. B. Insulating Glass: Where glass of this designation is indicated, provide uncoated insulating -glass units complying with the following: 1. Product: a. Guardian; Sun Guard SN -68 Gray/Clear with clear low emissivity coating on the #3 surface. Contact: Rosie Hunter @ (800) 635-8052. b. PPG; Solarban 60 Gray/Clear with clear low emissivity coating on the #3 surface. Contact: Jay Phillips @ (800) 845-8598 x.9130 c. Viracon; VE 3-2M Gray/Clear with clear low emissivity coating on the #2 surface. Contact: Michael Winkler @ (800) 533-0482 x.694 2. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: 25 and 6 mm. 3. Interspace Content: Air. 4. Indoor Lite: Type I (transparent glass, flat) float glass, Class 1 (clear). 5. Outdoor Lite: Type I (tint glass per product selection, flat) float glass, Class 1 (tint). END OF SECTION 08800 08800/2-01/ttt GLAZING 08800-8 • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review SECTION 08911 - GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. This Section includes glazed aluminum curtain wall assemblies for the entire project. The aluminum curtain wall assemblies work includes the following: 1. Aluminum punched window and curtain wall framing. 2. Swinging entrance doors and storefront framing, including hardware, stripping and thresholds. 3. Aluminum trim, snap in sealant stops, flashings, and similar items in conjunction with aluminum curtain wall assemblies. 4. Painting and coating in conjunction with the above aluminum items. 5. Internal steel and aluminum reinforcements. 6. Internal and perimeter sealing, joint fillers, weeps, vents and gasketing systems. 7. Anchors, embedments, shims, fasteners, inserts, expansion devices, accessories, support brackets, attachments. 8. Glass and glazing for the windows, curtain walls, entrances and storefronts. 9. Security system components may be incorporated into the door and frame openings of all entrance work at the Owner's option. Cooperate with the Owner's security system contractors if the Owner chooses to incorporate security system components during the course of the Work. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall systems meeting or exceeding the following performance requirements: 1. Structural Properties: a. Wind Loads: The glazed aluminum curtain wall work, including glass, shall be designed, fabricated and installed to withstand the maximum inward and outward wind pressures as required by IBC, Section 1609 'Wind Loads' using wind loads as determined by Section 6 of ASCE 7 using an Importance Factor of 1.0, and the authorities having jurisdiction for the geographic location of the building for components and cladding. b. Seismic Loads: Loads are available from the structural engineer. c. Deflection Limitations: 1) Deflections: Base calculations for the following deflections upon the combination of maximum direct wind loads, building deflections, thermal stresses, and erection tolerances. GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08911-1 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA a) The deflection of any framing member in a direction normal to the plane of the wall when subjected to the full code required wind loads specified above shall not exceed 1/175 of its clear span or 3/4 inch (19 mm) whichever is less, except limit deflection of glass to 1 inch (25.4 mm) for exterior walls 1/2 inch (13 mm) for interior walls. Span is defined as the distance between anchor centerlines; for cantilevers, span is defined as the distance between anchor center line and the end of the cantilever. b) Glass, sealants and interior finishes shall not be included to contribute to framing member strength, stiffness or lateral stability. 2) Do not permit any permanent deformation (set) in the metal framing work. Permanent deformation, fastener, weld, or gasket failure, component breakage or disengagement shall not occur under wind loading equal to 1.5 times the wind loads (positive or negative). Permanent deformation shall be taken as deflection without recovery exceeding 1/1000 times span. d. Dead Loads: 1) Maximum full deadload deflections, parallel (in -plane) to wall plane, of framing members shall not reduce glass bite or glass coverage, to less than 75% of the design dimension, and shall not reduce edge clearance to less than 25% of design dimension or 1/8 inch (3 mm) whichever is greater. 2) Limit deflections of metal members spanning door openings to 1/300. The clearance between the member and an operable door shall be no less than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). 3) Twisting (rotation) of the horizontals due to the weight of the glass shall not exceed 1 degree, measured between ends and center of each span. e. Uniform Structural Loads: Recent satisfactory uniform wind loading tests, acceptable to the Architect, of each glazed curtain wall assembly (each window, curtain wall, entrance and storefront) shall have been conducted in accordance with the requirements of ASTM E330. Each assembly shall have been subjected to inward and outward acting uniform loads equal to 1.5 times the inward and outward acting design wind loads specified above under paragraph 'wind loads'. Satisfactory performance at these loads shall mean no glass or other component breakage, component disengagement, and no permanent deformation of main framing members in excess of the permanent deformation criteria specified above. The qualification of `recent` test results is to limit the glazed curtain wall assemblies being provided for the project to only those which have been tested within the last seven years and under conditions similar to the project requirements. f. Operational (Traffic) Loads: Design and fabricate entrances to withstand the operating loads which result from heavy traffic conditions using the specified hardware, without measurable permanent deflection. Limit elastic deflections so as to provide the normal degree of rigidity required to avoid glass breakage, air leaks and other objectionable results of excessive flexibility. Provide weatherstripping at stiles, sill and head rails of door leaves, to minimize air, water and sound leaks. GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08911-2 • • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA B. Air Leakage: Air leakage through each glazed aluminum curtain wall assembly shall not have exceeded 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.03 L/s per sq. m) of fixed wall area when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 at a static -air -pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa). C. Water Penetration: 1. Water penetration in this specification is defined as the appearance of uncontrolled water, other than condensation, on any indoor face of any part of the curtain walls, windows, and the weather exposed portions of the entrances and storefront. 2. Provision shall be made to drain to the exterior face of the curtain wall, windows, entrances and storefront all water entering the system. 3. No uncontrolled water penetration shall have occurred when each glazed aluminum curtain wall assembly (each window and curtain wall) was tested in accordance with the ASTM E331 for one 15 minute cycle at a static pressure difference of 12 lbf/sq. ft. minimum. No uncontrolled water penetration shall have occurred when each entrance and storefront assembly was tested in accordance with the ASTM E331 for one 15 minute cycle at a static pressure difference of 101bf/sq. ft. minimum. D. Thermal Movements: Fabricate the glazed aluminum curtain wall work to accommodate for such expansion and contraction of component materials, and supporting elements, as will be caused by a maximum change (range) in ambient temperature of 120 deg F (67 deg C) and a maximum surface temperature of +180 deg F (+82 deg C), without causing noise, buckling, glass breakage, failure of joint sealants, undue stress on metal members and fasteners, failure of doors or other operating units to function properly, reduction of performance, and other detrimental effects. 1. Dimensions shown on Drawings are based on an assumed ambient design temperature of +70 deg F (+21 deg C). Fabrication and erection procedures shall take into account the ambient temperature range at the time of the respective operations. E. Building Frame Movement: Design, fabricate and install glazed aluminum curtain walls to withstand building movements including thermal movements, loading deflections, shrinkage, creep and similar movements. Thermal movements shall be as specified above. Building frame deflections, shrinkage, creep and other movements are available from the structural engineer. F. Condensation Resistance: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall and window systems with the minimum recommended condensation resistance factor (CRF) recommended in Table 2 of AAMA publication `Window Selection Guide' for the geographic location of the building. Indoor humidity, and indoor and outdoor temperature parameters for the project are available from the mechanical engineer. G. System Solar Performance: As certified according to NFRC 100. 1. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Not greater than 0.30. 2. U -Factor: Not greater than 0.41. H. Glass Statistical Factor: Glass thicknesses when shown on the drawings, or specified, are for convenience of detailing only and are to be confirmed by the Contractor and/or glass manufacturer. All glass for the size openings shown will be provided in thicknesses such that the probability of breakage at the design "Wind Load" will not exceed 8 lights per 1000 lights GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08911-3 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA (S.F. 2.5) based on a 60 second uniform wind load duration, and reflectance and shading indicated. The glass manufacturer shall provide, on request, substantiating glass breakage data if such data is not otherwise available as manufacturer's published data. 1. The minimum glass thickness permitted shall be 6.0 mm. 2. All exterior glass shall be assumed to be non -vented due to the use of interior sun screening devices such as shades and horizontal venetian blinds. I. Design Modifications: 1. Submit design modifications necessary to meet the performance requirements and field coordination. 2. Variations in details or materials shall not adversely affect the appearance, durability or strength of components, nor shall such variations cause excessive stress, or deflections, to the building structural frame. 3. Maintain the general design concept without altering size of members, profiles and alignment. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each glazed aluminum curtain wall component specified. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing scaled elevations, plans, and sections of the glazed aluminum curtain wall work. Full scale sections shall be prepared and submitted for details of the assemblies that cannot be shown in the elevations or sections. Include with shop drawings metal thickness of all metal components, glass thicknesses, metal fmishes, and all other pertinent information as necessary or requested by the Architect to indicate compliance with the Contract Documents. Details of field connections, anchorage, and their relationship to the work of others shall be clearly indicated for the coordination of the work by other building trades. Details of fastening and sealing methods and product joinery shall be shown to ensure proper performance of the field installation. No work shall be fabricated until shop drawings for that work have been approved by Architect for fabrication. C. Samples: Submit samples of the following before any work is fabricated: 1. 3 paired sets of samples for each exposed metal finish required. Sample finishes shall be on the specified alloy, temper, and thickness of metal required for the work. Where finishes involve color and texture variations, include sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. Furnish samples on 12 -inch- (300 -mm) squares of sheet. D. Structural Calculations: Submit, for information only, copies of structural calculations indicating complete compliance with the specified performance requirements. Calculations shall be prepared, signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the state wherein the work is to be erected. E. Product Test Reports: Submit RECENT certified product test reports based on tests performed by an AAMA Accredited Laboratory clearly describing in written form, and in shop drawing GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08911-4 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA • form, compliance of each glazed aluminum curtain wall assembly (each window, curtain wall, entrance and storefront) with requirements indicated based on comprehensive testing. • • F. Energy Rating Test Report: Submit recent NFRC Label Certificate, rating each system for overall U -factor and solar heat gain coefficient (SHGC). 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: The drawings and specifications are based on the Kawneer 1600 Wall Systeme, utilizing 2-1/2" x 7-1/2" framing system sight lines with outside glazing unlless otherwise indicated. Other systems, as manufactured by the manufacturers indicated below may be considered, subject to compliance with the performance requirements. Award the fabrication of glazed aluminum curtain wall components to a single firm specializing in the fabrication of glazed aluminum curtain wall components who has successfully produced work similar in design and extent to that required for the project, in not less than three projects of similar scope to the satisfaction of the Architect, and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance for a period of 5 years. The fabricator shall have sufficient production capacity, have organized quality control and testing procedures, and published written and illustrated installation manuals, to produce and properly install the entrance assemblies required without causing delay in progress of the Work. 1. Vistawall Architectural Products; Terrell, TX. 2. Wausau; Wausau, WI. 3. YKK AP America, Inc.; Atlanta, GA. B. Installer Qualifications: Subcontract the glazed aluminum curtain wall work to a firm which is specialized in the erection of curtain walls and who has successfully installed work similar in design and extent to that required for the project, in not less than three projects of similar scope to the satisfaction of the Architect, and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance for a period of 10 years. C. Standards: Comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following standards below, where standards conflict the more stringent shall apply: 1. Aluminum Association (AA): a. No. 1 "Aluminum Standards and Data". b. "The Aluminum Design Manual". 2. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): a. AAMA "Metal Curtain Wall Manual". b. AAMA "Aluminum Store Front and Entrance Design Guide Manual." c. AAMA 2605, "Specification for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels." GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08911-5 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 3. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC), "Steel Construction Manual," Current Edition. 4. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): "Steel Structures Painting Manual, Vol. 2, Systems and Specifications". 5. Federal Standard 16 CFR 1201, Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC): "Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials," as published in the Code of Federal Regulations (CFR). Comply with the applicable requirements of the laws, codes, ordinances and regulations of Federal and Municipal authorities having jurisdiction, wherever requirements conflict the more stringent shall be required. Obtain approvals from all such authorities. As a minimum provide safety glazing complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials. 6. Welding Standards: Welding shall be performed by skilled and qualified mechanics. Welding shall be performed in accordance with the applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code — Steel." 1.5 IDENTIFICATION, DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with the applicable provisions of AAMA "Curtain Wall Manual # 10" for the care and handling of curtain wall work from shop to site. B. All components of the curtain wall work shall be identified after fabrication by marks clearly indicating their location in the building. Packaging of components shall be so selected to protect the components from damage during shipping and handling. C. Storage on Site: 1. Store curtain wall components in a location and in a manner to avoid damage to the components. Stacking shall be done in a way which will prevent bending, excessive pressure, abrasion or other permanent damage of the component and its finished surfaces. 2. Store curtain wall components and materials in a clean, dry location, away from uncured concrete, masonry work, sprayed on fireproofing work, and other construction activities. Cover with non -staining waterproof paper, tarpaulin, or polyethylene sheeting in a manner that will permit circulation of air inside the covering. D. Keep handling on site to a minimum. Exercise particular care to avoid damage to finishes of metals. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of supporting structure by field measurements before fabrication so that the curtain wall work will be accurately designed, fabricated and fitted to the structure. Indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. Use Contractor's lines and benchmarks as a basis for measurements. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating curtain wall work without GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08911-6 • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA field measurements. Coordinate supporting structure construction to ensure actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Submit a 2 year written warranty, beginning from date of substantial completion, and executed by the Contractor, manufacturer and the curtain wall installer agreeing to repair or replace components of curtain wall systems that develop defects in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Defects include, structural failures, sealant failures, deterioration of metals, metal fmishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering, failure of operating components to function properly, uncontrolled water leakage, uncontrolled air leakage, and any other evidence of failure or deterioration of the curtain wall work to meet performance requirements. B. Warranty, High Performance Organic Coatings: Submit a warranty for a period of 5 years, warranting the integrity of film and permanence of color of the high performance organic coatings for the following: 1. Color fade not to exceed 5 delta E units (Hunter) as calculated in accordance with ASTM D2244 on exposed surfaces cleaned with clean water and a soft cloth. 2. Degree of chalking not to exceed rating No. 8 when measured in accordance with ASTM D659 on exposed unwashed surfaces. 3. Will not crack, check or peel. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Conform to the requirements published in AA "Aluminum Standards and Data", referenced ASTM standards and the following. All aluminum extrusions shall be manufactured to dimensional tolerances so as to eliminate any edge projection or misalignment at joints. Unless otherwise specified, provide alloy and temper as required to suit performance requirements and finish(es) indicated. Provide concealed extruded bars, rods, shapes and tubes in alloys as recommended by the fabricator to join or reinforce assembly of exposed aluminum components. 1. Alloys: a. Sheet and Plate: Alloy 5005 and ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes, and Tubes: Alloy 6063 and ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M) c. Bars, Rods, and Wire: ASTM B 211 (ASTM B 211M). 2. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M. 3. Shapes and Thickness: Provide shapes as shown and as required to suit the performance requirements. GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08911-7 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA B. Carbon Steel: For carbon steel components required to join, reinforce or support the assembly of aluminum components provide carbon steel conforming to ASTM A 36/A 36M for structural shapes, plates, and bars; ASTM A 1008/A 1008M for cold -rolled sheet and strip; or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M for hot -rolled sheet and strip. C. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Material: Stainless steel. 2. Anchor and Fastener Metal Alloy Types, Designations and Standards: Alloys as selected by fabricator to prevent corrosion resistance with the components fastened. Do not use self -drilling, self -tapping type fasteners. 3. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turn out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices. D. Concealed Flashing: Dead -soft, 0.018 -inch- (0.457 -mm-) thick stainless steel, complying with ASTM A 666, Type 304. E. Door Hardware: Refer to Division 8 Section "Door Hardware". F. Aluminum Entrance Doors and Frames: Refer to Division 8 Section "Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts". 2.2 SEALING, GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS A. Concealed Sealing Materials: All sealing materials concealed within the glazed aluminum curtain walls shall be silicone, compatible with and adherent to each material it will be in contact with, as recommended by the manufacturer to fulfill performance requirements. B. Exposed Sealing Materials: All sealing materials exposed at glazed aluminum curtain wall perimeter joints in contact with adjacent cladding materials: silicone, refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants". C. Glass and Glazing Materials: Refer to Division 8 Section "Glazing". 2.3 OTHER GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALL COMPONENTS A. Thermal Construction: Where performance requirements dictate the need for condensation resistance fabricate curtain walls and punched windows with integral, concealed, poured in place and debridged or rigid plastic isolators of material, profile and hardness as recommended by the fabricator, which satisfy the performance requirements, and which have been designed for window, window wall, and curtain wall construction for resistance to thermal conductance and condensation. B. Slip and Separator Gaskets: 1. Bolted Slip Joints: Non-metallic, low friction material bearing temperature and moisture resistances and low abrasion properties as required to suit performance requirements. GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08911-8 • • 411 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 2. Non -Bolted Slip Joints: Non -corrosive, non-toxic impregnated felt, or butyl tape with a pressure sensitive adhesive on one surface which is formulated for proper adhesion to metals indicated; gasket shall bear temperature and moisture resistance properties as required to suit performance criteria; thickness and width as required. C. Baffle Material: Reticulated foam baffle material with a pore count (ppi) as required by assembly fabricator to suit performance requirements. D. Snap In Sealant Stops: Provide rigid PVC sealant stops of profile and hardness as recommended by the window fabricator, and fabricated to a cross sectional profile to interlock with aluminum extrusions at all window perimeters. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate the glazed aluminum curtain walls to the designs, shapes, and sizes shown using the materials specified and shown to produce assemblies which meet or exceed the performance requirements. To the greatest extent possible complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware applications and other work before shipment to Project site. B. Joints in Metal Work: All exposed work shall be carefully fitted and matched to produce continuity of line and design, with all joints, being accurately fitted for hairline contact and rigidly secured. Where additional rigidity or strength is required to satisfy the performance requirements reinforce curtain wall components with aluminum or carbon steel shapes, bars, and plates. C. Shop Assembly: As far as practible, all fitting and assembly work shall be done in a fabrication shop. 1. Framing members attaching curtain wall components to building supports shall provide for 3 way adjustment to accommodate fabrication and construction tolerances, and allow for thermal and building movements. 2. Provide vents, weepholes and internal water passages in the glazing framing recesses as recommended by the respective glass and framing manufacturers to conduct infiltrating water to the exterior. Provide weep baffles secured to inside of frame behind vents and weepholes. 3. Provide flush endcaps for all mullion extension cap extrusions. D. Exposed Fasteners: Not permitted. E. Protection of Metals: Wherever dissimilar metals are in contact, except in the case of aluminum in contact with galvanized steel, zinc, separate such surfaces with a coating of zinc rich primer, bituminous paint, or separation gaskets as the condition requires. Wherever aluminum comes in contact with concrete surfaces separate such surfaces with a coating of zinc rich primer, bituminous paint, or separation gaskets as the condition requires. F. Welding: Complete the welding of exposed surfaces prior to finishing. GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08911-9 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1. All welding shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the AWS and shall be performed with electrodes and/or by methods recommended by suppliers of the metal being welded. G. Shop Painting of Carbon Steel: Ungalvanized steel items shall be thoroughly cleaned of all loose scale, filings, dirt, and other foreign matter, in accordance with SSPC SP3 "Power Tool Clean", and painted with coating as specified for carbon steel surfaces. 2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish Application: Apply high performance organic coatings to all exposed surfaces of glazed aluminum curtain wall components. C. Appearance of Finished Work: During production, maintain large size color range samples for use in comparing against production material. Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within the range of approved samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. D. Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. E. High -Performance Organic Coating Finish: AA-C12C42R1x and the following: 1. Polyvinylidene fluoride finish coating containing not less than 70% of "ATO Atochem Kynar 500" or "Ausimont Hylar 5000" fluorocarbon resin specially formulated for spray application to extrusions and preformed aluminum metal shapes. Remove die markings, scratches, abrasions, dents and other blemishes before applying finish. Coating films shall be uniform and visibly free from flow lines, streaks, blisters, sags or other surface imperfections in the dry -film state on all surfaces. a. Metal Preparation and Pretreatment: Pretreatment of aluminum surface and application of the finish shall be performed under specifications issued by the licensed formulator to approved applicator and the following as a minimum: 1) The products used to form the chemical conversion coating on aluminum extrusions shall conform with ASTM D1730, Type B, Method 5 (Amorphous Chromium Phosphate Treatment) or Method 7 (Amorphous Chromate Treatment). 2) The coating weight of the chemical conversion coating shall be a minimum of 40 mg. per ft.2 on exposed surfaces as specified in ASTM B449, Section 6, Class I. Processing shall conform with that specified in ASTM B449, Section 5. b. Coating Performance Criteria: Meets or exceeding AAMA 2605. GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08911-10 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA c. Color, Manufacturer and Coating System: AKZO NOBEL KD3C34847-CS Bright Gold Spray Trinar TMC -S with Clear Coat (KC3C19704) as manufactured by AKZO NOBEL. 2.6 COATINGS FOR CONCEALED METAL SURFACES A. General: The following protective coatings shall be applied to surfaces of metals which are to be concealed in the construction: 1. Coating for Carbon Steel: Hot dip galvanized, complying with ASTM A123. 2. Coating for Aluminum, Carbon Steel: Where aluminum or carbon steel surfaces are to be in contact with each other or in contact with dissimilar materials such as concrete, and where hot dip galvanizing of carbon steel is incompatible with component parts because of galvanic action or component fabrication tolerances provide one of the following: a. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied, non -sagging, asphalt -mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements, except containing no asbestos. Apply in two coats for an overall minimum dry film thickness of 25 mils. b. Zinc Rich Primer: Organic zinc -rich primer, complying with SSPC-Paint 20. PART 3 - EXECUTION • 3.1 PREPARATION A. Coordinate glazed aluminum curtain wall work with the work of other Sections and provide items to be placed during the installation of other work at the proper time to avoid delays in the work. B. Place such items, including concealed overhead framing, accurately in relation to the final location of glazed aluminum curtain wall components. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Examine the substrates, adjoining construction, and conditions under which the Work is to be installed. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Before beginning installation of the glazed aluminum curtain wall work examine all parts of the existing building structural frame and the existing building cladding indicated to support the glazed aluminum curtain wall work. Notify Contractor in writing, of any dimensions, or conditions, found which will prevent the proper execution of the glazed aluminum curtain wall work, including specified tolerances. Use Contractor's offset lines and bench marks as basis of measurements. GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08911-11 Gensler 32.2177.089 3.3 INSTALLATION April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for protecting, handling, and installing glazed aluminum curtain wall systems. Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Seal joints watertight. Clean excess joint sealants from finished surfaces. 1. Cut and trim component parts of the glazed aluminum curtain wall work during erection only with the approval of the manufacturer or fabricator, and in accordance with his recommendations. Restore finish completely to protect material and remove all evidence of cutting and trimming. Remove and replace members where cutting and trimming has impaired strength or appearance, as directed by Architect. 2. Set components within the erection tolerances with uniform joints. Place components on shims and fasten to supporting substrates using bolts and similar fasteners. Use stainless steel shims at structural connections only. U shaped shims at structural connections are not permitted. Use aluminum, stainless steel, or high impact polystyrene shims at other connections. 3. Do not erect components which are warped, deformed, bowed, dented, defaced or otherwise damaged as to impair its strength or appearance. Remove and replace members damaged in the process of erection. 4. Coat concealed surfaces of dissimilar materials, and any ferrous metal components, with a heavy coating of bituminous paint, zinc rich primer or other separation in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Where aluminum components will contact concrete, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. 5. No holes or slots shall be burned, cut into, or field drilled in any building framing member without the written acceptance of the structural engineer. B. Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall, Entrance and Storefront Framing: Install framing components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades without warp or rack of framing members. C. Entrance Doors: Doors shall be securely anchored in place to a straight, plumb and level condition, without distortion. Adjust doors to provide a tight fit at contact points for weathertight closure and to operate smoothly, without binding, with hardware functioning properly. Weatherstripping contact, and hardware movement, shall be field tested and final adjustment, and lubrication, made for proper operation and performance of doors. 1. Door Hardware: Refer to Division 8 Section "Door Hardware". 2. Install surface -mounted hardware according to manufacturer's written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. 3. Set sill members in a bed of polyurethane sealant to provide weathertight construction. Comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants". D. Flashing: Install flashings fabricated from specified flashing material to the profiles shown. Flashings shall be furnished in single piece lengths. Laps and joints, where required, shall be lap seamed by a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) with lap completely embedded in sealant. Mechanical fasteners shall be used where necessary to maintain contact of overlapping elements. Spot heads of all fasteners with sealant. Refer to Division 7 Section `Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim'. GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08911-12 • • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA E. Install glazing to comply with requirements of Division 8 Section "Glazing," unless otherwise ind icated. F. Install perimeter sealant to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," unless otherwise indicated. G. Concealed Sealing Components: Apply sealant and gasket components which are integral to the glazed aluminum curtain wall systems in strict accordance with the each component manufacturers printed instructions. Before applying components remove all mortar, dust, dirt, moisture, and other foreign matter which will be deleterious to the intended performance of the cornponent. Mask adjoining exposed surfaces to avoid spilling, dripping, dropping or other unintended contact of the sealing components onto adjacent exposed surfaces. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. The glazed aluminum curtain wall systems shall be fabricated and erected to accommodate the dimensional tolerances of the structural frame and surrounding cladding while providing the following as installed tolerances. 1. Variation from theoretical calculated position as located in plan or elevation in relation to established floors lines, column lines and other fixed elements of the structure, including variations from plumb, level, straight and member size: +/- '4 inch max in any 20'-0" (+/- 6 mm in any 6 m) run, column -to -column bay, or floor -to -floor height. 2. Alignment: Where surfaces abut in line, and meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch (.75 mm). 3. Variation from angle, or plumb, shown: +/- 1/8 inch max in any 10'-0" (+/- 3 mm in any 3 m) run or story height, non -cumulative. 4. Variation from slope, or level, shown: +/- 1/8 inch max in any 20'-0" (+/- 3 mm in any 6 m) run or column -to -column bay, non -cumulative. 3.5 ANCHORAGE A. Anchorage of the glazed aluminum curtain wall work to the structure and surrounding cladding shall be in accordance with the accepted shop drawings. 3.6 WELDING A. Weld with electrodes and by methods recommended by manufacturer of material being welded, and in accordance with AWS D1.1 for concealed steel members. B. Welds and adjacent metal areas shall be thoroughly cleaned and coated with a single coat of bituminous paint. GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08911-13 Gensler 32.2177.089 3.7 REMOVAL OF DEBRIS April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. All debris caused by, or incidental to, the erection of the glazed aluminum curtain wall work shall be removed from the site and disposed of legally. 3.8 CLEANING A. Clean metal surfaces promptly after installation, exercising care to avoid damage to factory finished exposed surfaces. B. Wash glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances. C. Immediately remove any deleterious material from surfaces of aluminum. 3.9 PROTECTION A. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction period to ensure that glazed aluminum curtain wall work will be without damage or deterioration, other than normal weathering, at time of acceptance. END OF SECTION 08911 08911/11-00/m GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08911-14 • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review SECTION 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes gypsum board assemblies. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1. Typical Walls: All standard wallboard areas shall be constructed for deflection not to exceed 1/240 of the wall height when subjected to a positive and negative pressure of 5 psf. 2. Walls with Ceramic Tile Finish: All standard wallboard areas to receive ceramic tile finishes shall be constructed for deflection not to exceed 1/360 of the wall height when subjected to a positive and negative pressure of 5 psf. 3. Ceilings, bulkheads, soffits, ceiling transitions, ledges, and coves shall be constructed for a deflection not to exceed 1/360 of the distance between supports. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit samples for the following products: 1. Trim Accessories: Full-size sample in 12 -inch- (300 -mm-) long length for each trim accessory indicated. 2. Product Data indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer, post industrial, preconsumer recycled content for materials furnished. 3. List of regionally manufactured materials and regionally extracted, harvested, or recovered materials. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with fire -resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260-1 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA B. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. STC -Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from GA -600, "Fire Resistance Design Manual." C. Single -Source Responsibility for Panel Products: Obtain each type of gypsum board and other panel products from a single manufacturer. D. Single -Source Responsibility for Finishing Materials: Obtain finishing materials from either the same manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other panel products or from a manufacturer acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. C. Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends and surfaces. Do not bend or otherwise damage metal corner beads, trim, track, and studs. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Installation of wallboard joint treatments shall not start when outside temperature is below 55 degrees F, unless building is enclosed and heated to maintain a continuous and uniform temperature of not less than 55 degrees F, from one week prior to beginning of joint treatment until joint treatment is completed and thoroughly dry. Ventilation, either natural or supplied by fans, circulators or air conditioning systems shall be provided to remove excess moisture during joint treatment. Temperature requirements may be waived only on recommendation of wallboard materials manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. General: For fire rated assemblies, provide materials, including accessories and fasteners produced by one manufacturer, or, when products of more than one manufacturer are used in a rated system, they shall be acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2.2 STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING FRAMING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260-2 • • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. General: Provide steel framing members sized and spaced as indicated but not less than that required to comply with ASTM C 754 under the maximum deflection conditions specified under Article `Performance Requirements'. B. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625 -inch- (1.59 -mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475 -inch- (1.21 -mm-) diameter wire. C. Hanger Attachments to Overhead Decks: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion resistant materials, with eyepins, clips, or other devices for attaching hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by the complete ceiling systems. D. Hangers: As follows: 1. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162 -inch (4.12 -mm) diameter. 2. Rod Hangers: ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M), mild carbon steel. a. Diameter: 1/4 -inch (6.34 -mm). b. Protective Coating: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot -dip galvanized. 3. Flat Hangers: Commercial -steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot -dip galvanized. a. Size: 1 by 3/16 inch (25.4 by 4.76 mm) by length indicated. E. Carrying Channels: Cold -rolled, commercial -steel sheet with a base metal thickness of 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm), a minimum 1/2 -inch- (12.7 -mm-) wide flange, with manufacturer's standard conrosion-resistant coating. 1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm). F. Furring Channels (Furring Members): Commercial -steel sheet with manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant coating. 1. Cold Rolled Channels: 0.0538 inch bare steel thickness, with minimum Y2 inch wide flange, 3/4 inch deep. 2. Steel Studs: ASTM C645, with flange edges bent back 90 degrees and doubled over to form 3/16" minimum lip (return), minimum 0.0312 inch thickness of base (uncoated) metal and minimum depth as required to suit deflection criteria. 3. Hat -Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22.2 mm) deep. a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm). 4. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 -inch- (12.7 -mm-) deep members designed to reduce sound transmission. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260-3 Gensler 32.2177.089 2.3 STEEL PARTITION FRAMING April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. General: Provide steel framing members sized and spaced as indicated but not less than that required to comply with ASTM C 754 under the maximum deflection conditions specified under Article `Performance Requirements'. 1. In areas where top of partitions are dependent on ceiling system for lateral support, coordinate design and installation to comply with the above deflection limitation. 2. Steel Sheet Components: Complying with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal and with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot -dip galvanized zinc coating. B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, with flange edges bent back 90 degrees and doubled over to form 3/16" minimum lip (return), and complying with the following requirements for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and minimum depth: 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: a. Typical: As required to comply with deflection criteria. b. Partitions Supporting Wall Mounted Casework: 16 ga. minimum. 2. Depth: As indicated C. Deep -Leg Deflection Track: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2 -inch- (50.8 -mm-) deep flanges. D. Proprietary Firestop Track: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire -resistance -rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs; one of the following: 1. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak. 2. Metal -Lite, Inc.; The System. E. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing for fastening to studs for the attachment of surface mounted items and accessories, length as required by 36 inch wide height unless otherwise indicated. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm). F. Cold -Rolled Channel Bridging: For channel bridging for fixture attachment or lateral bracing provide 0.0538 -inch (1.37 -mm) bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2 -inch- (12.7 -mm-) wide flange. 1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Clip Angle: 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inch (38.1 by 38.1 mm), 0.068 -inch- (1.73 -mm-) thick, galvanized steel. G. Hat -Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm). 2. Depth: 7/8". GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260-4 • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA H. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 -inch- (12.7 -mm-) deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. I. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates involved; complying with the recommendations of gypsum board manufacturers for applications indicated. J. "F" Reveal: Fry Reglet Corp. FDM-625-50, fabricated from clear anodized extruded aluminum. 2.4 GYPSUM WALLBOARD A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints. B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36. All gypsum wallboard products shall be manufactured by National Gypsum unless otherwise accepted by the Owner. 1. Regular Type: a. Thickness: 5/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated. b. Long Edges: Tapered. c. Location: Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Type X: a. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). b. Long Edges: Tapered. c. Location: Where required for fire -resistance -rated assembly. C. Flexible Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, manufactured to bend to fit tight radii and to be more flexible than standard regular -type panels of the same thickness. 1. Thickness: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Location: Apply in double layer at curved assemblies. D. Sag -Resistant Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular -type gypsum board. 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Location: Ceiling surfaces. 2.5 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260-5 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA B. Water -Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630/C 630M. All tile backing gypsum wallboard products shall be manufactured by National Gypsum unless otherwise accepted by the Owner. 1. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. 2.6 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Steel Trim Accessories: ASTM C 1047; formed metal sheet steel zinc coated by hot dipped process. Shapes indicated below by reference to Fig. 1 designations in ASTM C1047: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. LC -Bead with both face and back flanges to receive joint compound: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. U -Bead with face and back flanges; face flange formed to be left without application of joint compound: Use where indicated. 4. Expansion (Control) Joint: One-piece control joint formed with V-shaped slot, with removable strip covering slot opening. Use where indicated. 5. Curved -Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges; use at curved openings. B. Aluminum Trim Accessories: Extruded aluminum trim with 'A" diameter holes in fins for attachment to wallboard or studs; longest lengths available in profiles indicated; primed for finish painting; sized for scheduled wallboard thickness shown. 2.7 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Provide joint treatment materials complying with ASTM C 475 and the recommendations of both the manufacturers of the wallboard products and joint treatment materials for each application indicated. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting -type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting -type taping compound. 3. Second coat: For filling over tape, beads and fasteners. Use setting -type, sandable topping compound. 4. Third coat: For finishing over tape, beads and fasteners. Use drying -type, all-purpose compound. D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260-6 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA • 1. Water -Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting -type taping and setting -type, sandable topping compounds. • • 2.8 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. C. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. D. Spot Grout: ASTM C475, setting type joint compound recommended for spot grouting hollow metal door frame anchors. E. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to cold formed light gage steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick. F. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral -fiber requirements of assembly. G. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." H. Wood Blocking Concealed in Partition Construction: Fire retardant treated, refer to Section 06105, MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY. 1. Metal Post for Tube Framing at Partial Height Walls: Refer to Section 05500, METAL FAI3RICATIONS. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach or abut, welded hollow - metal frames, cast -in anchors, and structural framing, with installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies specified in this Section. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260-7 Gensler 32.2177.089 12 PREPARATION April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Suspended Ceilings: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive ceiling hangers at spacing required to support ceilings. 3.3 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. General: Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C754, ASTM C840 and the gypsum board manufacturers recommendations, where standards conflict the more stringent shall apply. B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, backing plates, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations or, if none available, with United States Gypsum's "Gypsum Construction Handbook." C. Isolate steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. 1. Where building structure abuts ceiling perimeter or penetrates ceiling. 2. Where partition framing and wall furring abuts structure, except at floor. Install slip -type joints at head of assemblies that avoid axial loading of assembly while laterally supporting the assembly. 3.4 INSTALLING STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING FRAMING A. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards. 3. Where structural deck is unfilled metal deck, install supplemental suspension members to span between structural beams and joists supporting the structural deck. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by the referenced standards. 4. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire -tying, directly to inserts that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 5. Secure rod, flat and angle hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, or other devices using fasteners that are secure and appropriate for GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260-8 • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 6. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. B. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so members for panel attachment are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members. C. In seismic zones sway -brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support. D. Screw furring to wood framing (ceiling joists, beams, studs, etc). E. Wire -tie or clip furring channels to supports, as required to comply with requirements for assemblies indicated. F. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and spacings indicated, but not less than that required by the referenced steel framing and installation standards unless more stringent spacings are recommended by the gypsum board manufacturer. 3.5 INSTALLING STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING A. Install continuous runners (tracks) sized to match studs at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum board stud assemblies abut other construction. Secure runners to substrates with fasteners spaced a maximum of 24" o.c. unless closer spacing is recommended by the framing manufacturer for the floor and ceiling construction involved. Provide fasteners at all corners and ends of runner tracks. B. Installation Tolerance: Install each steel framing and furring member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing. C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings and at partial height partitions. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. 1. Cut studs 1/2 inch (13 mm) short of full height to provide perimeter relief. Do not fasten studs to top track to allow independent movement of studs and track. 2. For fire -resistance -rated and STC -rated partitions that extend to the underside of floor/roof slabs and decks or other continuous solid -structure surfaces to obtain ratings, install framing around structural and other members extending below floor/roof slabs and decks, as needed to support gypsum board closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. 3. Terminate partition framing at suspended ceilings as indicated. 4. Terminate partial height partition framing as indicated. D. Install steel studs and furring in sizes and at spacings indicated but not less than that required by the referenced steel framing installation standard to comply with maximum deflection and miniimum loading requirements specified, unless more stringent requirements are recommended by the gypsum board manufacturer: GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260-9 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review 1. Space studs 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA E. Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each panel can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. F. Install backing plates for support of wall mounted items. G. Curved Partitions: 1. Cut top and bottom track (runners) through leg and web at 2 -inch (50 -mm) intervals for arc length. In cutting lengths of track, allow for uncut straight lengths of not less than 12 inches (300 mm) at ends of arcs. 2. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs. 3. Support outside (cut) leg of track by clinching steel sheet strip, 1 -inch- (25 -mm-) high - by -thickness of track metal, to inside of cut legs using metal lock fasteners. 4. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along arcs at stud spacing recommended in writing by gypsum board manufacturer for radii indicated. On straight lengths of not less than 2 studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches (150 mm) o.c. H. Frame door openings to comply with GA -600 and with gypsum board manufacturer's applicable written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. 1. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. Install one additional stud no more than 6" from jamb studs at single doors greater than 4'-0" and at all pairs of doors. 2. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud. Provide runner track and typical studs above door openings with studs spaced not more than 24" o.c. 3. At all welded frames with fixed anchor clips secure stud reinforcing to jamb anchor clips with not less than two self tapping screws per clip. 4. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof structure above. I. Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. J. Stiffeners: Use two rows at third points for studs with finish one side only; one row at midpoint for studs with finish both sides. Snap into punched web of each stud; nest laps and wire tie. 3.6 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing, General: Install and finish gypsum panels to comply with ASTM C 840, GA -216, and the gypsum wallboard manufacturer's recommendations, where standards conflict, the more stringent shall apply. B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260-10 • • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 C. Single Layer Application: April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance -rated assembly, and minimize end joints or avoid them entirely. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board. b. At high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance -rated assembly. D. Multilayer Application: 1. On Partitions/Walls: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face -layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base -layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance -rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. 2. On Ceilings: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply base layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face layer joints 1 framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance -rated assembly. E. Single -Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. F. Multilayer Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set. H. Curved Partitions: 1. Install panels horizontally and unbroken, to the extent possible, across curved surface plus 12 -inch- long straight sections at ends of curves and tangent to them. 2. Wet gypsum panels on surfaces that will become compressed where curve radius prevents using dry panels. Comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations for curve radii, wetting methods, stacking panels after wetting, and other preparations that precede installing wetted gypsum panels. 3. On convex sides of partitions, begin installation at one end of curved surface and fasten gypsum panels to studs as they are wrapped around curve. On concave side, start GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260-11 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA fastening panels to stud at center of curve and work outward to panel ends. Fasten panels to framing with screws spaced 12 inches o.c. 4. For double -layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches o.c. Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with screws spaced 12 inches o.c. 5. Allow wetted gypsum panels to dry before applying joint treatment. I. Tile Backing Panels: 1. Water -Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: For substrates indicated to receive thin -set ceramic tile, install water-resistant gypsum backing board panels, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in the same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces. J. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged, or damp panels. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place. K. Locate both edge or end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back -blocking is provided behind end joints. Position adjoining panels so that tapered edges abut tapered edges, and field -cut edges abut field -cut edges and ends. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions. Avoid joints at corners of framed openings where possible. L. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. M. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. N. At wood framed partitions do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide -dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members using resilient channels, or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage. O. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. P. Spot grout hollow metal door frames for all doors. Apply spot grout at each jamb anchor clip and immediately insert gypsum panels into frames. Q. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 2. Where partitions intersect joists, interior and exterior wall kickers, and other structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by joists, and other structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8 -inch- (6.4- to 9.5 -mm-) wide joints to install sealant. 3. Where chase walls are shown, provide bracing between parallel rows of studs. Unless otherwise shown, provide gypsum wallboard braces no less than 1/2" thick x 12" wide GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260-12 • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA and cut to width of chase. Locate at quarter points in wall height between each pair of parallel studs. Fasten with not less than 3 screws at each stud. R. Isolate perimeter of non -load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2 -inch- (6.4- to 12.7 -mm-) wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with U -bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. S. STC -Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound -flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. T. Cult openings in wallboard for electrical outlets, piping and other penetrations. Maintain close tolerances so that edges will be covered by plates and escutcheons. Cut both face and back paper. Do not install electrical outlets back to back on opposing sides of partitions. U. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations. 1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches o.c. for vertical applications. 2. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches o.c. 3. Install fasteners not less than 3/8" from ends or edges of wallboard sheets, spacing fasteners opposite each other on adjacent ends or edges. 4. Begin fastening from center of wallboard and proceed toward edges and corners. 5. Apply pressure on surface of wallboard adjacent to fasteners being driven to ensure that wallboard will be secured tightly to supporting members. a. Drive fastener with shank perpendicular to face of board. b. Drive screws with a power screwdriver as recommended by wallboard manufacturer. Set heads of screws slightly below surface of paper without cutting paper. 3.7 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: Fasten trim accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions for type, length, and spacing of fasteners. B. Install corner beads at external corners. C. Install interior trim accessories where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed or semiexposed. Provide interior trim accessories with face flange formed to receive joint compound. D. Install aluminum trim accessories where indicated. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260-13 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review 3.8 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. General: Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints, flanges of interior trim and aluminum trim accessories, interior angles, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration and levels of gypsum board finish indicated. Produce surfaces free of tool marks and ridges ready for decoration of type indicated. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C 840 and GA -214, for locations indicated: 1. Level 1: Embed tape at joints in ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire -resistance -rated assemblies and sound -rated assemblies as recommended by the gypsum board manufacturer. 2. Level 2: Embed tape and apply separate first coat of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges where water resistant gypsum backing board panels are substrate for ceramic tile and where indicated, unless a higher level of fmish is required for fire - resistance -rated assemblies and sound -rated assemblies as recommended by the gypsum board manufacturer. 3. Level 4 (For Surfaces Scheduled to Receive Wall Coverings and Paints): Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated. 3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean floors of all wallboard debris and leave broom clean. Excess material, scaffolding, tools and other equipment are to be removed upon completion of the work. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensures gypsum board assemblies remain without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260-14 • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC TILE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review A. This Section includes ceramic tile. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit samples of the following: Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. 2. Assembled samples with grouted joints for each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required, at least 12 inches (300 mm) square and mounted on rigid panel. Use grout of type and in color or colors approved for completed work. 3. Metal edge strips in 6 -inch (150 -mm) lengths. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 110 A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. • 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. 1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide tile matching the Architect's samples which have been selected from the product lines and manufacturers indicated in the Finish Schedule in the drawings. CERAMIC TILE 09310-1 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA B. Quarry, Porcelain and Paver Tile: Flat tile, provide trim shapes matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile and coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile to the extent indicated. 1. Facial Dimensions and Colors: As indicated on the drawings. 2. Products: As indicated in the finish schedule on the drawings. C. Crack Suppression Membrane (Anti -Fracture): One of the following: 1. LATICRETE International Inc.; Laticrete Blue 92 Anti -Fracture Membrane. 2. Elastomeric Crack Bridging (ECB) Membrane by National Applied Construction Products. 800-633-4622. ANSI A118.10 Material Standard. 2.2 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS A. Mortar: Prepackaged dry -mortar mix combined with styrene -butadiene -rubber liquid -latex additive. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar that complies with Paragraph F- 4.6.1 in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4. B. 100% Solid Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3. 1. Manufacturer, Product and Colors: Provide one of the following: a. Woodlands, H194 by Hydroment b. Sahara Beige — #11, by Mapei c. Light Smoke, #145, by Custom Building Products d. Natural Grey, #24, by Laticrete 2. Installation: Per ANSI A108.6 as well as manufacturer's written instructions and product packaging instructions. 2.3 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS A. Silicone Sanitary Sealant: Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Metal Edge Strips: Provide extruded aluminum transition and reducer metal edge stripping in single lengths wherever possible, keeping the number of joints or splices to a minimum and of height required to protect exposed edges of tile. Provide in quantities and locations as job required based upon the recommended good practice of the industry; include in every location where tile terminates and other flooring continues. 1. Schulter Trim Transition #H-10; M-100 Clear anodized aluminum B. Grout Sealer: Grout manufacturer's recommended silicone product for sealing grout joints that does not change color or appearance of grout. CERAMIC TILE 09310-2 • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review 2.5 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of oil, waxy films, and curing compounds and any foreign matter that would inhibit proper binding of the tile setting material. 2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Rernove paint, coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that are incompatible with tile -setting materials. Grind concrete substrates to remove films, sealing and curing compounds if they are determined to be present on the substrate. B. Blending: Blend tiles for color blending at Project site before installing. 1. Furnish the same lots, batches, etc. within the same contiguous areas of the building. (i.e. corridors on the same floors, common rooms which adjoin each other, etc.). 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. 1. Cut field tile, not trim shapes. B. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. S C. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile CERAMIC TILE 09310-3 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated. 1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work. D. Movement Joints: Locate sealant filled movement joints where recommended by the manufacturers of mortar and tile materials but not less than the requirements of TCA EJ171, and as accepted by the Architect. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw -cut joints after installing tiles. 1. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 2. Create movement joints at all perimeters where tile work ends. 3. Create soft joints in the field of tile according to TCA EJ 171. E. Grout tile to comply with requirements of the following tile installation standards: 1. For ceramic tile grouts (latex-portland cement grouts), comply with ANSI A108.10. 3.4 CRACK -SUPPRESSION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install crack -suppression membrane to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate at all slab control joints. 3.5 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION A. General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Floor Tile Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards. B. Joint Widths: Install tile on floors with the following joint widths: 1. Quarry, Porcelain, and Paver Tile: 1/8 inch. C. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile. Ensure 100% coverage of mortar for proper support under tile and metal edge strip. D. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints according to grout -sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer that has gotten on tile faces by wiping with soft cloth. 3.6 WALL TILE INSTALLATION CERAMIC TILE 09310-4 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Install types of tile designated for wall installations to comply with requirements in the Wall Tile Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI setting -bed standards. B. Joint Widths: Install tile on walls with the following joint widths: 1. Quarry and Porcelain Tile: 1/8 inch. 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of grout residue and foreign matter. 3.8 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Interior floor installation on concrete; thin -set mortar: 1. Thin -Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar. Provide crack suppression membrane full coverage. Follow ANSI A108.5 standard installation specifications for thin setting. Follow ANSI A108.10 standard installation specifications for grouting. Follow ANSI A108.13 standard installation specifications for membrane application. 2. Grout: Polymer -modified grout. • 3.9 WALL TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE • A. Interior wall installation over gypsum board; thin -set mortar; TCA W243 and ANSI A108.5. 1. Thin -Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar. 2. Grout: Polymer -modified grout. END OF SECTION 09310 CERAMIC TALE 09310-5 • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review SECTION 09511 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes acoustical panel ceilings. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1. All exterior soffits shall be constructed for a deflection not to exceed 1/360 of the distance between supports when subjected to an upward and downward pressure as required by IBC Section 1609 'Wind Loads' using wind loads as determined by Section 6 of ASCE 7 using an Importance Factor of 1.0, and the authorities having jurisdiction for the geographic location of the building. 1.3 SUIBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit samples for each component indicated and for each exposed fmish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. Samples shall show the full range of color and texture variations to be expected in the final installation. 1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 6 -inch- square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. 2. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12 -inch- long Samples of each type, finish, and color. B. Research/Evaluation Reports: Submit Research/Evaluation Reports for each acoustical panel ceiliing and components and anchor type for projects in seismic zones. C. Calculations: Submit, for information only, complete engineering data for design of exterior soffits bearing the seal of a licensed Professional Engineer registered in the state wherein the work is to be erected. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer. Qualifications: Engage an Installer, with not less than 5 years experience in the installation of materials specified, and who has completed acoustical panel ceilings similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance. • B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension system through one source from a single manufacturer. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511-1 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA C. Performance Requirements: In areas where gypsum wallboard partitions are dependent on the ceiling suspension system for lateral support, design and install suspension system components to sustain the imposed load from the completed partition system including a minimum inward and outward pressure of 5 psf normal to the plane of the wall. D. Seismic Standard (For Projects in Seismic Zones): Provide acoustical panel ceilings designed and installed to withstand the effects of earthquake motions according to the following: 1. CISCA's Recommendations for Acoustical Ceilings: Comply with CISCA's "Recommendations for Direct -Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings --Seismic Zones 0-2." 2. CISCA's Guidelines for Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with CISCA's "Guidelines for Seismic Restraint of Direct -Hung Suspended Ceiling Assemblies -- Seismic Zones 3 & 4." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install interior acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed (building exterior doors and windows are in place and glazed) and weatherproof, wet work (painting, drywall, interior tilework, concrete, and concrete leveling) in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings and soffits is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire -suppression system, and partition assemblies. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANELS ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511-2 • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. ACT -1: Wet formed mineral fiber acoustical panels with factory applied acrylic latex painted finiish, complying with ASTM E1264 Classification Type III, Form 2, Pattern CE. UL listed with a flame spread rating of 25 or less — Class A, beveled tegular edged, CAC range of 35 — 39 (ASTM E1414 for transmission loss), minimum NRC of .50 (ASTM C423 for sound absorption), non -directional fissured, LR grade 1. 1. Manufacturers and Products: One of the following: a. USG; Olympia Micro Climaplus 4231. b. Armstrong; Dune with HumiGuard Plus 1775. 2. Edge Detail: Reveal sized to fit flange of exposed suspension system members. 3. Size: 24" x 24". 4. Thickness: 5/8". B. ACT -2: Gypsum wallboard panels with factory applied vinyl facing, complying with ASTM E1264 Classification Type XX, Pattern G (for gypsum wallboard). UL Listed with a flame spread rating of 25 or less — Class A, square edged, minimum CAC of 35 (ASTM E1414 for transmission loss), LR Grade 1. 1. Manufacturers and Products: One of the following: a. USG; Lay -In Ceiling Tile ClimaPlus, #3260. b. Chicago Metallic; Endure Concord, 7773.01V. c. Capaul Division of BPB America (Celotex); Vinylrock X Indoor/Outdoor Sanitary Ceiling Panels. 2. Size: 24" x 24". 3. Thickness: '/2" minimum. 2.2 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct -hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635. 1. High Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C635 requirements for "Coating Classification for Severe Environment Performance" for exterior drive thru soffit metal suspension systems. B. Grid and Molding Finish and Color: Provide manufacturer's standard factory -applied white finish. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511-3 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA C. Hanger Attachments to Overhead Structural Decks: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion resistant materials, with eyepins, clips, or other devices for attaching hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times the design load indicated in ASTM C635, Table 1, Direct Hung. Corrosion protection of hanger attachments to be as follows: 1. Hanger Attachments and Fasteners for Interior Suspended Ceilings: Carbon steel zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 for Class SC 1 service condition (mild). 2. Hanger Attachments and Fasteners for Exterior Suspended Soffits: Carbon steel zinc plated attachments zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 12 for Class SC 3 service condition (severe); fasteners to be stainless-steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F594, Group 1 alloy 304 or 316 for bolts; alloy 304 or 316 for anchor. D. Hangers: As follows, except provide only galvanized round steel threaded or flat strap type hangers sized as required to comply with the maximum deflection conditions specified under Article `Performance Requirements' for the maximum exterior soffit areas to be supported. 1. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: a. Zinc -Coated Carbon -Steel Wire: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. b. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 12 ga. diameter for hanger wire. 2. Hanger Rods: ASTM A510, mild carbon steel. a. Diameter: '/a -inch. b. Protective Coating: ASTM A153/A153M, hot dip galvanized. 3. Flat Hangers: Commercial -sheet steel, ASTM A653/A653M, G60, hot dip galvanized. a. Size: 1 by 3/16 inch by length indicated. E. Carrying Channels: ASTM C754, cold rolled steel channels, 1-1/2", 475 lbs. Per 1000 linear ft. Size carrying channels as required to comply with the maximum deflection conditions specified under Article `Performance Requirements' for the maximum soffit areas to be supported F. Moldings and Trim Accessories: Types and profiles as indicated, or if not indicated, manufacturers standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems specified. 1. Shadow Molding: Provide ''/2" x ''A" metal shadow line reveal at edges of ceiling fields where they meet vertical walls and columns. Provide outside and inside corner molding accessories to accommodate corner transitions. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511-4 • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 2. F Moldings: Provide F moldings at ceiling breaks, soffits, bulkheads, and changes in elevation other than vertical walls and columns to the extent indicated. G. Clips: Provide support clips, clamps, fasteners, splines, and other attachment devices as required to align components and to connect components and transfer imposed loads of suspension system. 1. Provide partition attachment clips, for reveal edge panels, and fasteners for areas where partition ceiling runners are secured to the ceiling suspension system. 2. Provide attachment clips, for runner to angle molding to avoid use of pop rivets. 3. Provide grid converter accessories as required to change main tee direction 90 degrees from adjacent main tee. 4. Provide light fixture clips. 5. Provide hold down clips at drive thru soffit areas, and in interior ceiling entryways to reduce flutter as required. 6. Seismic Struts (For Projects in Seismic Zones Only): Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate seismic forces. 7. Seismic Clips (For Projects in Seismic Zones Only): Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure acoustical panels in-place. H. Suspension Systems: 1. ACT -1: Narrow -Face, Double -Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from hot dip galvanized coated, cold -rolled steel sheet, with prefinished baked on enamel finished 9/16" wide exposed metal flanges; other characteristics as follows: a. Face Design: Flat, flush. b. Structural Classification: Intermediate -duty system. c. Exposed Metal Finish: Steel sheet painted to match color of acoustical panel. d. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Armstrong; Suprafine XL 9/16" Exposed Tee Grid. 2) USG; Centricitee (DXT). 3) Chicago Metallic Corp.; 4000 Tempra System. 2. ACT -2: Wide Faced, Capped, Double Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from hot dipped galvanized coated, cold rolled steel sheet, with ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511-5 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA prefinished baked on enamel finished 15/16" wide metal caps on flanges; other characteristics as follows: a. Face Design: Flush capped faces. b. Structural Classification: Intermediate duty system. c. Cap Material and Finish: Aluminum sheet painted to match color of acoustical panel. d. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Armstrong; Prelude Plus XL Fire Guard Grid. 2) USG; ZXLA Grid. 3) Chicago Metallic Corp.; 1830 System. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce transmission of airborne sound. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Layout the work to center board pattern both directions around work points shown in each major space or room as shown on the drawings or directed and, where possible, adjust pattern so that edge pieces will be not less than 1/2 unit in width. 3.3 INSTALLATION, INTERIOR CEILINGS A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with publications referenced below per manufacturer's instructions, the CISCA "Ceiling Systems Handbook". ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511-6 • 1 • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension System Installations: Comply with ASTM C 636. 2. CISCA Recommendations for Acoustical Ceilings: Comply with CISCA "Recommendations for Direct -Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay -In Panel Ceilings." B. Suspend ceiling hangers as follows: 1. Fasten hangers to anchors that extend into structural decks. Space hangers not more than 48" o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers; and provide hangers not more than 6" from ends of each member. Provide additional hangers for support of fixtures and other items including but not limited to light fixtures and diffusers, as required to prevent overloading of deck attachment, eccentric deflection or rotation of supporting runners. 2. Hangers: a. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of 3 tight turns. Connect hangers directly to drilled in anchors (eye screws), or other devices that are secure, and are appropriate for substrate. b. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to drilled in anchors, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger involved. • 3. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces • by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 4. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of the supporting structure or of the ceiling suspension system. 5. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Align moldings accurately and fasten securely to construction by screw attaching to substrate at intervals not over 16" o.c. and not more than 3" from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system. a. Join straight runs of shadow moldings at corners with prefabricated outside, and inside, corner shadow molding accessories and connect securely. 2. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511-7 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Clip runners to angle moldings do not use exposed fasteners. Finish to lines and levels shown, with maximum deflection not to exceed 1/360 of the span between supports. Laser level accurately in all directions, leveling to a tolerance of 1/8" noncumulative. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fitted accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Run grain of units in one direction as accepted on shop drawings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide neat, precise fit. 1. For reveal -edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. 2. Install hold-down clips in interior entryway areas, spaced as recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 INSTALLATION, EXTERIOR DRIVE THRU SOFFITS A. General: Install exterior soffit framing to comply with Article `Performance Requirements' and the manufacturer's instructions. B. Suspend soffit hangers as follows: 1. Provide hangers and strap iron hanger inserts necessary to support soffits below structural deck. Give particular attention to the correct location and alignment of hangers and inserts. Provide cross bracing and additional framing as required to resist wind loads. 2. Where structural deck is unfilled metal deck, install supplemental suspension members to span between structural beams and joists supporting the structural deck. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to comply with Article `Performance Requirements'. 3. Provide sufficient hangers for runner channels on each side of light fixtures, and other items penetrating the soffits. C. Install edge moldings of the type indicated at perimeter of soffit area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Align moldings accurately and fasten securely to construction by screw attaching to substrate at intervals not over 8" o.c. and not more than 3" from ends, leveling with soffit suspension system. 2. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings. D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Clip runners to angle moldings do not use exposed fasteners. Finish to lines and levels shown, with maximum deflection not to exceed 1/360 of the span between supports. Laser level accurately in all directions, leveling to a tolerance of 1/8" noncumulative. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511-8 • • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fitted accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide neat, precise fit. 1. Install hold-down clips in drive thru soffit areas, spaced as recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 09511 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511-9 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review SECTION 09651 - RESILIENT FLOOR TILE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes resilient floor tile, wall base, and accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1. Tile: Submit full-size units of each color and pattern of resilient floor tile required. 2. Resilient Wall Base and Accessories: Submit manufacturer's standard -size Samples, but not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long, of each resilient product color and pattern required. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not Tess than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C). Store tiles on flat surfaces. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C). C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation. D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation. E. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651-1 Gensler 32.2177.089 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review A. Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT): ASTM F 1066. 1. Product and Manufacturer: As indicated on the drawings. B. Class: 2 (through -pattern tile). C. Wearing Surface: Smooth. D. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm). E. Size: 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm). 2.2 RESILIENT WALL BASE A. Wall Base: ASTM F 1861. 1. Product and Manufacturer: As indicated on the drawings. B. Type (Material Requirement): TP (rubber, thermoplastic). C. Group (Manufacturing Method): 1 (solid). D. Style: Cove (with top -set toe) at VCT, straight base at carpet. E. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm). F. Height: 4 inches (102 mm). G. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. H. Outside Corners: Job formed. I. Inside Corners: Job formed. J. Surface: Smooth. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Portland cement based formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651-2 • • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA C. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edges of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints. 1. Schutter Trim Transition #H-10; M-100 Clear anodized aluminum PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of resiilient products. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare concrete substrates as follows: 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Moisture, Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. E. Apply primer to concrete slabs, if recommended by the flooring manufacturer, prior to application of adhesive. F. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651-3 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA G. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 TILE INSTALLATION A. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. 1. Lay tiles square with room axis unless otherwise indicated. B. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 1. Lay tiles with grain direction alternating in adjacent tiles (basket weave pattern). C. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames, and thresholds. Extend unexposed edges of flooring under set on bases and similar trim work. D. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. E. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. F. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. 3.4 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. B. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. C. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. D. Do not stretch wall base during installation. E. Job -Formed Corners: RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651-4 • • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. Shave back of base at points where bends occur and remove strips perpendicular to length of base that are only deep enough to produce a snug fit without removing more than half the wall base thickness. 2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form by cutting an inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to produce a snug fit to substrate. 3.5 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Metal Edge Strip Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install edge strips at edges of floor coverings that would otherwise be exposed. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp -mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. a. Do not wash or apply floor polishes until flooring adhesives have cured unless otherwise recommended by the flooring manufacturer. B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer. 1. Apply protective floor polish to horizontal surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes if recommended in writing by manufacturer. a. Use commercially available product acceptable to manufacturer. b. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service. 2. Cover products installed on horizontal surfaces with undyed, untreated building paper until Substantial Completion. 3. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over surfaces. Place hardboard or plywood panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels. END OF SECTION 09651 RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651-5 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 SECTION 09680 - CARPET PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes carpet tile. 1.2 STANDARDS April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following: 1. The Carpet and Rug Institute "The Carpet Specifiers' Handbook." 2. The Carpet and Rug Institute "CRI 104 Commercial Carpet Installation Standard." 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing the following: 1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet tiles. 2. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot. 3. Type of subfloor. 4. Type of installation. Provide information as to which areas require a total glue down installation of carpet tile. 5. Pattern of installation, carpet locations, direction, and starting points per floor. 6. Pattern type, location, and direction. 7. Pile direction. 8. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 9. Transition details to other flooring material B. Samples: Submit samples showing full range of color, texture, and pattern variations expected. Prepare samples from same material to be used for the Work. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Submit the following: 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Samples. 2. Exposed Edge Stripping and Accessory: 12 -inch- long Samples of each type, and color, of edge strip. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE CARPET 09680-1 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Installer Qualifications: Engage a carpet installer, who has completed a minimum of three (3) projects over the last 10 years which were similar in material, design and extent to that indicated for the project - as determined by the Architect — and which have resulted in construction with a record of successful in service performance. B. Indoor Air Quality Requirements: 1. The VOC (volatile organic compound) content of interior carpets, carpet cushions, and adhesives shall meet or exceed the Carpet and Rug Institute Green Label VOC standards; the limits are as follows: Carpet — Total VOCs: 0.50 mg/m2/hr 4-Phenylcyclohexene 0.05 Formaldehyde 0.05 Styrene 0.40 2. Adhesive — Total VOCS: 10.0 mg/m2/hr Formaldehyde 0.05 2 -Ethyl -1 -Hexanol 3.00 3. Interior carpet adhesives VOCs shall fall within the current South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule 1168 VOC limits, which are as follows: Indoor carpet adhesive 50 g/L Carpet pad adhesive50 g/L 4. Recycled Content: 5. Tiles: Combined total recycled content of face fiber and backing no less than 30%. 1.5 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. Second. Backing Adhesion - guaranteed not to delaminate for a Lifetime Warrty period. B. Guaranteed to maintain tuft bind wet or dry during the Lifetime Warranty period. C. The stain resistant properties of the fiber must be permanent and cannot be removed by commercial cleanings or abrasive wear. Test data as follows: AATCC TM -175 Stain Resistance: Pile Floor coverings — must meet a grade of 8.0 or better Red Dye 40 must be released by water only, after exposure to 150,000+ cycles in a tetrapod walker and after sample is allowed to soak in 10:1 solution of water and am- monia. CARPET 09680-2 • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA D. Fade Resistant Characteristics: Fiber utilized must meet the following guidelines for colorfastness to ozone and light: E. AATCC TM 129 Colorfastness to Ozone in the atmosphere under high humilities. A grade of 4.0 or better after 5 standard cycles. F. AA.TCC TM -16E Colorfastness to Light: A grade of 4.0 or better after 160 accelerated fade units G. Topical stain resistant treatments will not be acceptable. Stain resistant properties shall be inherent. H. Moisture Barrier: Subsequent to the installation of the carpet utilizing the manufactures recommended adhesive in accordance with the British Spill Test "Method E". I. The installation of the carpet shall follow manufacturer's recommended installation procedures and should meet or exceed requirements as set forth by the provisions of the American Disability Act. J. Carpet and adhesives shall meet or exceed qualifications for environmental standards of the Carpet and Rug Institute's Green Label Program and South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1168 VOC Limits. K. Carpet and backing shall be 100% PVC free. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver carpeting in original mill protective wrapping with mill register numbers and tags attached. B. Deliver other materials in manufacturers unopened containers identified with name, brand, type, grade, class, and other qualifying information. C. Store materials in a dry location, in such a manner as to prevent damage. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer. 1.8 WARRANTY CARPET 09680-3 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Special Carpet Tile Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet tile manufacturer agreeing to replace carpet tile that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, wear, static buildup in excess of 3.0 kV when tested under the Standard Shuffle Test at 70 degrees F. and 20% RH, edge raveling without seam sealers, tuft bind loss, zippering (wet or dry), shrinkage, curling, doming, snags, runs, and delamination. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of substantial completion. B. Special Carpet Tile Installer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet tile installer agreeing to fix, repair or replace carpet tile that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than edge raveling, shrinkage, curling, doming, and delamination. 1. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET TYPES A. Carpet Tile: Provide product no. 03002 by Tandus 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Portland -cement-based formulation provided by or recommended by the carpet manufacturer. Do not use gypsum based compounds. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew -resistant, nonstaining, high solids, low VOC emitting specifically recommended, as verified through compatibility and adhesion testing, by the carpet manufacturer for the application shown, type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and as follows: C. Carpet Tile Installation: Monolithic Installation 1. Strictly adhere to Manufacturer's installation guidelines for pressure sensitive adhesive installation of Powerbond Modules. D. Carpet to Tile Edging: Provide extruded aluminum carpet edging in single lengths wherever possible, keeping the number of joints or splices to a minimum and of height required to protect exposed edges of carpet. Provide in quantities and locations as job required based upon the recommended good practice of the industry; include in every location where carpet terminates and other flooring continues. CARPET 09680-4 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review 1. Carpet to Ceramic Tile: Schulter Trim Transition, RENO -TK (3/8") Clear anodized aluminum Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 2. Carpet to Resilient Flooring Edging: Provide resilient carpet edging in single lengths wherever possible, keeping the number of joints or splices to a minimum. Provide in quantities and locations as job required based upon the recommended good practice of the industry; include in every location where carpet terminates and other flooring continues. a. FUTURA TRANSITION STRIP: 460543 VT 754 Color: to match vinyl base. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PRE -INSTALLATION MEETING A. Prior to the installation, and at the Contractor's direction, meet at the project site to review the material selections, substrate preparations, installation procedures, coordination with other trades, special details and conditions, standard of workmanship, and other pertinent topics related to the Work. The meeting shall include the Owner, the Contractor, the installer, material manufacturer's representatives, and representatives of other trades or subcontractors affected by the installation. • 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate the installation of carpet so as not to delay the occupancy of the building or interfere with the completion of construction. • B. Examine the substrates, adjoining construction and the conditions under which the Work is to be installed. Verify recommended limits for moisture content and alkalinity of concrete substrates with carpet manufacturer. 1. Moisture Content: Verify moisture content using a standard calcium chloride crystal test or a 1 yd. x 1 yd. clear plastic test. Perform testing at a frequency as recommended by the carpet manufacturer. Perform testing at a frequency of not less than once every 1,000 square feet. 2. Alkalinity Test: Verify alkalinity of concrete substrates by drilling a 3/8" diameter hole approximately 1/4" deep, remove all residue; fill with distilled water, allow water to stand 3 minutes and test with a calibrated electronic meter or Ph paper. Perform testing at a frequency of not less than once every 1,000 square feet. 3. Alternative test procedures for moisture content and alkalinity may be acceptable subject to the carpet manufacturer's written acceptance. C. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with the following: CARPET 09680-5 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by the carpet manufacturer 2. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by the carpet manufacturer. 3. Use leveling and patching compounds recommended by flooring manufacturer for filling cracks, holes and depressions in the substrate. Surface shall be smooth, level and at proper elevation. Remove ridges, roughness and protrusions from concrete surfaces by grinding. 4. Strictly adhere to manufacturer's requirements for installation over concrete D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the manufacturer's instructions, specified industry standards and recommendations, and as required to match the accepted sample installations. Apply adhesive in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's directions. B. Adhere perimeter tiles, and cut tiles, with a full spread of adhesive. Dry fit cut tiles and apply adhesive to tile back after tile has been cut. Use full uncut tiles down the center of corridors and, where necessary, cut perimeter tiles to butt walls. 1. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Cut openings in carpet for electrical outlets, piping and other penetrations. Maintain close tolerances so that edges of carpet will be covered by plates and escutcheons. 3. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open -bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. C. In traffic areas adhere all tiles with a full spread of adhesive. Ensure uniform bond over the entire area. In non -traffic areas only adhere perimeter tiles with full spread of adhesive. D. Butt carpet tile tightly together to form seams without gaps or entrapped pile yams and aligned with adjoining tiles. E. Edge Strip Installation: Install edge strip at every location where edge of carpet is exposed to traffic, unless otherwise indicated. Unless otherwise directed by Architect install in single lengths and secure in accordance with manufacturer's directions. F. Traffic over adhesive installations shall be restricted until adhesive has properly cured in accordance with the adhesive manufacturers recommendations. CARPET 09680-6 • • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Cleaning: As the carpeting is installed, remove and dispose of all trimmings, excess pieces of carpeting and laying materials from each area as it is completed. Vacuum carpeting with a commercial vacuum, having a cylindrical brush or beater bar and high suction. Remove adhesives, stains, and soil spots in accordance with the carpet manufacturers recommendations. B. Protection: Protect carpeting against damage of every kind as any damaged carpeting shall be rejected. Use non -staining cover material for protection. Tape joints of protective covering. 1. Plastic and polyethylene sheet protective coverings shall not be permitted over glue down installations. 2. Remove and replace rejected carpeting with new carpeting. At the completion of the work and when directed by the Architect, remove covering, vacuum clean carpeting and remove soiling and stains (if any) to the satisfaction of the Architect. END OF SECTION 09680 CARPET 09680-7 • Gensler 32.2177.089 SECTION 09720 - WALL COVERINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review A. This Section includes heavy-duty synthetic textile wall covering. 1.2 SUBMITTALS Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Sannples: Submit wall covering samples in full width by 36 -inch- (1000 -mm-) long sections of wall covering from dye lot to be used for each type of wall covering indicated for each color, texture, and pattern required. Samples shall show complete pattern repeat. 1. Provide each sample with specified treatments applied. B. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data for wall coverings. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 4110 A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has specialized in the installation of vvall coverings similar to that required for this project. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install wall coverings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1. Do not store rolled goods upright (on end); lay flat, blocked off the floor to prevent sagging and warping. B. Lighting: Do not install wall covering until a permanent level of lighting is provided on the surfaces to receive wall covering. C. Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the time recommended by wall -covering manufacturer for full drying or curing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL -COVERING PRODUCTS WALL COVERINGS 09720-1 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. General: Provide rolls of each type of wall covering from the same run number or dye lot. B. Heavy -Duty Synthetic Textile Wall Covering (WC -1 & WC -2): 1. Colorfastness to Wet and Dry Crocking: Passes AATCC 8, Class 5. 2. Colorfastness to Light: Passes AATCC 16A, Class 4 (slight fading) at 80 hours to 200 hundred hours in fadeometer test. 3. Durability: No wear after 1,000,000 double rubs with cotton duck abrader when tested in accordance with ASTM D3597 `Wyzenbeek Abrasion Test. 4. Strength: Exceeding the standards for `heavy duty use' promulgated by the ACT (Association of Contract Textile Companies) and as follows: a. Tear Strength: ASTM D226I. b. Tensile Strength: ASTM D1682. c. Seam Slippage: ASTM D4034. d. Resistance to Pilling and Fuzzing: Class 5 per Better Fabrics Testing Bureau (BFTB). 5. Dimensional Stability: No shrinkage and no average length change per BFTB 404. 6. Resistance to Fungus: No growth at 28 days per ASTM G21. 7. Width: 52 inches. 8. Backing: Paperbacked for direct application of wall covering to substrates. Backing application process to be used shall result in a wallcovering product which can be aggressively cleaned on the wall without fear of delaminating the material from the wall. 9. Manufacturer and Product: a. (WC -1) — Carnegie; Xorel Classic, line and color as indicated on the drawings (paperbacked) and matching Architect's sample. b. (WC -2) [for Alternate Restroom Application, Only] — Bacara Weave with micro- perforation; DesignTex, line and color as indicated on the drawings. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Mildew -resistant, nonstaining vinyl adhesive, for use with specific wall covering and substrate application, as recommended in writing by wall -covering manufacturer. B. Primer/Sealer: Mildew -resistant primer/sealer recommended in writing by wall -covering manufacturer for intended substrate. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION WALL COVERINGS 09720-2 • • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for levelness, wall plumbness, maximum moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance of work. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair wall covering's bond, including mold, mildew, oil, grease, incompatible primers, dirt, and dust. C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects. 1. Gypsum Board: Prime with primer recommended by wall -covering manufacturer. 2. Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding. D. Verify painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand eggshell finishes with fine sandpaper. E. Remove electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items. F. Acclimatize wall -covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not less than 24 hours before installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with wall -covering manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. B. Cutting: Cut wall -covering strips in roll number sequence by table trimming. Trim 2 inches from both sides using a new blade for each sheet. Do not double cut on the wall unless a zipper knife (double cutter) is being used to avoid cutting the wall surface. Change roll numbers at partition breaks and corners. 1. Cut and hang each strip consecutively including pieces over doors and windows. Trim edges and seams for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure. C. Adhesive Application and Hanging: Where paperbacked wall covering is being used apply the adhesive to the paper backing prior to applying strips to the wall substrates. Place wall covering strip to substrates within 5 minutes of applying adhesive. 1. Butt seams without any overlay or spacing between strips. 2. Roll each strip after pasting do not fold. 3. Install wall coverings by reversing every other strip to minimize paneling. WALL COVERINGS 09720-3 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 4. Install wall covering with no gaps or overlaps, no lifted or curling edges, and no visible shrinkage. 5. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches (150 mm) from outside corners and 3 inches (75 mm) from inside comers unless a change of pattern or color exists at corner. No horizontal seams are permitted. 6. Fully bond wall covering to substrate. Roll, brush, or use a broad knife to remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects. a. Smooth seams and edges with a plastic scraper, do not use a seam roller. 7. Remove excess adhesive at seams and edges by wiping with a slightly damp sponge using clean, hot water. Dry immediately with a terry towel. D. Cover plates shall be covered with wall covering. Match pattern to make cover plates inconspicuous. 3.4 CLEANING A. Use cleaning methods recommended in writing by wall -covering manufacturer. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned. B. Reinstall electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items. C. Remove all droppings, trimmings, and other debris, and protect the installation so that it will be clean and without indication of damage at the time of acceptance by the Architect. END OF SECTION 09720 WALL COVERINGS 09720-4 • • s • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 SECTION 09912 - PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and interior items and surfaces. 1. Surface preparation, priming, and finishcoats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or material is not to be painted. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated, Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Gloss ranges used in this Section include the following: 1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85 -degree meter. 2. Low Luster (eggshell) refers to low -sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when measured at a 60 -degree meter. 3. Semigloss refers to medium -sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when measured at a 60 -degree meter. 4. Full gloss refers to high -sheen finish with a gloss range more than 70 when measured at a 60 -degree meter. B. Exterior Surfaces: Exterior surfaces to be painted are defined as those surfaces which are indicated in areas exposed to conditions which are not controlled by building heating and cooling systems. C. Interior Surfaces: Interior surfaces to be painted are defined as those surfaces which are indicated in areas exposed to conditions which are controlled by building heating and cooling systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit samples for each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions. PAINTING 09912-1 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved. 2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each Sample. Label each Sample for location and application. 3. Submit paint samples on 12" square of hardboard for the Architect's review of each color and texture required. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system applications similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and other identifying information. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well -ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C). B. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. PART 2- PRODUCTS PAINTING 09912-2 • • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 2.1 MANUFACTURERS April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles. B. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Benjamin Moore). 2. ICI Dulux Paint Centers (ICI Dulux Paints). 3. M. A. Bruder & Sons, Inc. (M. A. B. Paint). 4. PPG Industries, Inc. (Pittsburgh Paints). 5. Sherwin-Williams Co. (Sherwin-Williams). 6. Duron Paints and Wallcoverings (Duron). 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide primers, and finish -coat materials that are compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best -quality paint material of the various coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint -material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. C. Colors: Provide custom colors of the finished paint systems to match the Architect's samples. 2.3 EXTERIOR PRIMERS A. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board Primer: Factory -formulated alkyd- or alkali -resistant acrylic - latex primer for exterior application. B. Exterior Ferrous -Metal Primer: Factory -formulated rust -inhibitive metal primer for exterior application. C. Exterior Galvanized Metal Primer: Factory -formulated galvanized metal primer for exterior application. D. Exterior Aluminum Primer : Factory -formulated acrylic -based metal primer for exterior application. PAINTING 09912-3 Gensler 32.2177.089 2.4 INTERIOR PRIMERS April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Interior Gypsum Board Primer: Factory -formulated latex -based primer for interior application. B. Interior Ferrous -Metal Primer: Factory -formulated quick -drying rust -inhibitive alkyd -based metal primer. C. Interior Zinc -Coated Metal Primer: Factory -formulated galvanized metal primer. 2.5 EXTERIOR FINISH COATS A. Exterior Low -Luster Acrylic Paint: Factory -formulated low -sheen (eggshell) acrylic -latex paint for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Low Lustre Latex House Paint No. 185: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil (0.025 mm). 2. ICI Dulux Paints; 2402-XXXX Dulux Professional Exterior 100 Percent Acrylic Satin Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm). 3. M. A. B. Paint; Fresh Kote Latex Eggshell 405 Line: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 4. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-2000 Series SpeedHide Exterior House & Trim Satin --Acrylic Latex: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil (0.025 mm). 5. Sherwin-Williams; A-100 Exterior Latex Satin House & Trim Paint A82 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 6. Duron; Weathershield Exterior Acrylic Coating Satin Finish 11 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). B. Exterior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory -formulated semigloss waterborne acrylic -latex enamel for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex House & Trim Paint No. 170: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.1 mils (0.028 mm). 2. ICI Dulux Paints; 2406-XXXX Dulux Professional Exterior 100 Percent Acrylic Semi - Gloss Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). 3. M. A. B. Paint; Sea Shore/Four Seasons Acrylic Latex Trim Enamel 024 Line: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 4. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-900 Series SpeedHide Exterior House & Trim Semi -Gloss Acrylic Latex Paint: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 5. Sherwin-Williams; A-100 Latex Gloss A8 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). 6. Duron; Weathershield Exterior Acrylic Coating Semi -gloss Finish 03 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. 2.6 INTERIOR FINISH COATS A. Interior Flat Latex -Emulsion Size: Factory -formulated flat latex -based interior paint. PAINTING 09912-4 • 1 • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1. Benjamin Moore; Pristine Eco Spec Interior Latex Flat Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). 2. Duron; Genesis Interior Latex Flat 60-101: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 3. M. A. B. Paint; Enviro-Pure Latex Flat 040 Line: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.030 mm). 4. Pittsburgh Paints; Pure Performance Interior Wall Flat Latex 9-100: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mil. 5. Sherwin-Williams; Harmony Latex Flat B5 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). B. Interior Low -Luster Acrylic Enamel: Factory -formulated eggshell acrylic -latex interior enamel. 1. Benjamin Moore; Eco Spec Interior Latex Eggshell Enamel No. 223: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils ((0.036 mm). 2. Duron; Genesis Interior Latex Low Sheen Enamel 79-101: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). 3. M. A. B. Paint; Enviro-Pure Eggshell 045 Line: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.030 mm). 4. Pittsburgh Paints; Pure Performance Interior Eggshell Wall and Trim 9-300: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.036 mm). 5. Sherwin-Williams; Harmony Latex Eggshell B9 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm). C. Interior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory -formulated semigloss acrylic -latex enamel for interior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Eco Spec Interior Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel No. 224: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils ((0.036 mm). 2. Duron; Genesis Interior Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel 83-101: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 3. M. A. B. Paint; Enviro-Pure Semi -Gloss 047 Line: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.030 mm). 4. Pittsburgh Paints; Pure Performance Interior Enamel Wall & Trim Semi -Gloss Latex 9- 500: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.028 mm). 5. Sherwin-Williams; Harmony Interior Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm). 2.7 TRAFFIC PAINT A. Traffic paint: 1. Duron: Dura Clad Alkyd Zone Marking Paint 993-8000 white, or 993-8001 yellow. 2. M. A. B. Paint; Zone Marking Traffic Paint (183001 white, 183002 white). 3. Sherwin Williams; Set Fast Premium Traffic Marking Paint (white A300, yellow A303). PART 3 - EXECUTION PAINTING 09912-5 Gensler 32.2177.089 3.1 EXAMINATION April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for paint application. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P4. 1. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted, or provide surface -applied protection before surface preparation and painting. Remove these items, if necessary, to completely paint the items and adjacent surfaces. 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. 1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous -metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign substances in accordance with SSPC SP 1 "Solvent Cleaning". After solvent cleaning prepare any bare metal surfaces by removing all stratified rust (rust scale), all loose mill scale, all loose or non -adherent rust and detrimental welding deposits by methods specified in SSPC SP -3 "Power Tool Cleaning". a. Touch up bare areas, heads of bolts, welded surfaces which are unpainted, and shop -applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire -brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with same primer as the shop coat. b. Surfaces requiring touch up painting shall be cleaned and primed as soon as practicable after erection and before excessive rusting or other damage occurs to such surfaces from weather or other exposure. 3. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents in accordance with SSPC SP -1 "Solvent Cleaning", and pretreat in accordance with the recommendations of SSPC "Good Painting Practice", Vol. 1, Chapter 22. PAINTING 09912-6 • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 4. Gypsum Wallboard: Repair all surfaces in gypsum wallboard with wallboard joint finishing compound or spackling compound, filled out flush and sanded smooth. Clean all surfaces and taped joints of dust, dirt and other contaminants and be sure they are thoroughly dry before applying paint. D. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint schedules. B. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 1. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 2. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, grilles, convector covers, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection. 3. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 4. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles. 5. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. Access panels, electrical panels, air diffusing outlets, supply and exhaust grilles, louvers, exposed conduit, primed hardware items, primed outlet covers, primed wall and ceiling plates and other items in painted areas shall be painted to match the areas in which they occur unless otherwise directed by the Architect. 6. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. 7. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. C. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. PAINTING 09912-7 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. 2. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform fmish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. D. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for surface or item being painted. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet -back, or high -pile sheep's wool as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. E. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer. F. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces. G. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn -through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. H. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. I. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections. J. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. PAINTING 09912-8 • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 3.4 CLEANING April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from Project site. 1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint -spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work. 1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P 1. 3.6 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Provide the following finish systems over exterior gypsum soffit board: 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two fmish coats over an exterior alkyd- or alkali -resistant primer. a. Primer: Exterior gypsum soffit board primer. b. Finish Coats: Exterior low luster acrylic paint. B. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not required on shop -primed items. 1. Semi -Gloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a rust -inhibitive primer. a. Primer: Exterior ferrous -metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Exterior semi -gloss acrylic enamel. C. Zinc -Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over all exterior zinc -coated metal surfaces that are not part of the exterior facade system. 1. Semigloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish: Two fmish coats over a galvanized metal primer. a. Primer: Exterior galvanized metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel. D. Alu:minum: Provide the following finish systems over exterior aluminum surfaces: 1. Semi -Gloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. PAINTING 09912-9 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review a. Primer: Exterior aluminum primer. b. Finish Coats: Exterior semi -gloss acrylic enamel. E. Traffic and Parking Lane and Stall Marking: 1. One coat Traffic Paint, minimum dry film thickness of 2.5 mils. Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 3.7 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces: 1. Low -Luster Acrylic -Enamel Finish (Typical System): Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior low -luster acrylic enamel. 2. Semigloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish (Provide only where scheduled): Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel. B. Primed Wood Doors: Provide the following paint finish system over primed wood door surfaces: 1. Semigloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats. a. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel. C. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal: 1. Semigloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior ferrous -metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel. D. Zinc -Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over interior zinc -coated metal surfaces: 1. Semigloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior zinc -coated metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel. E. All -Service Jacket over Insulation: Provide the following finish system on cotton or canvas insulation covering: 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof. 2. Finish Coats: Interior flat latex -emulsion size. PAINTING 09912-10 • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA • 3.8 COLOR SCHEDULE A. Reference to a particular manufacturer's number or color name is used only as a convenience for the Architect in order to establish the Project color requirements. These references are not intended to describe the required generic paint systems. For generic paint systems requirements, refer to the "Schedule of Exterior Painting" and the "Schedule of Interior Painting" as applicable to the respective conditions of use. • • B. The selection of paint colors are indicated on the drawings by manufacturer and color type. 1. Furnish the same lots, batches, etc. within the same contiguous areas of the building (i.e. corridors on the same floors, common rooms which adjoin each other, etc.). END OF SECTION 09912 PAINTING 09912-11 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review SECTION 09961 - ANTI GRAFFITI COATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This section includes surface preparation and field application of anti -graffiti coating systems to items and surfaces scheduled. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 9 Section "Painting" for general field painting. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each coating system indicated. Include block fillers and primers. 1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference the specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each material specified. B. Certification by manufacturer that products supplied comply with requirements indicated that limit the amount of VOCs in coating products. 1. Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be color coated (if applicable). C. Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate. D. Qualification Data: For Firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owner, and other information specified. E. Warranty. ANTI GRAFFITI COATINGS 09961-1 Gensler 32.2177.089 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage Manufacturer to provide an American Polymer "Certified" applicator who has completed anti -graffiti coating system applications similar in material and extent to those indicated for Project, and whose work has a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain base coatings, top coatings, and removal agent from the same manufacturer. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide anti -graffiti coating system complying with the following: 1. Permanent coating system. Coatings shall not require re application regardless of number of graffiti taggings during the life of the 10 year performance warranty period. 2. Show no signs of deterioration, or change of appearance after graffiti removal during the warranty period. No ghosting staining or shadowing. 3. Capability of removing 100% of all types of paint and graffiti materials from treated surfaces without damaging the coating or the substrate. 4. Upon graffiti removal, no evidence of graffiti shall remain. 5. Capable of withstanding a minimum of 120 cleaning cycles over the same area without measurable coating deterioration. 6. Shall not increase dirt pick-up of substrate. 7. Meet the following test results for the following chemicals: a. MEK No effect after 5 days b. Carboxylic Acid No effect after 5 days c. 75% Phosphoric Acid No effect after 5 days d. 37% HCL 3 hours blister e. 50% Sulfuric Acid No effect after 5 days f. 20% NIT 68 hours blister B. Time Tested 1. System specified must have been in successful commercial use for at least 12 years and have hada continuous City of Los Angeles Research Report number in good standing and compliance since 1991. 2. Provide documentation of performance of the anti -graffiti coating system by written report from a nationally recognized and certified Protective Coating Specialist. Such documentation shall include; type of substrate, location, length of service, testing performed and results. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label with the following information: 1. Name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. ANTI GRAFFITI COATINGS 09961-2 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review 8. Handling instructions and precautions. Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well -ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and applying coatings. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air temperatures are between 40 and 100 deg F. B. Do not apply coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Allow wet surfaces to dry thoroughly and attain temperature and conditions specified before proceeding with or continuing coating operation. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra graffiti removal materials in quantities described below. Package coating material in unopened, factory -sealed containers for storage and identify with labels describing contents. 1. Quantity: One full case (12, 16 ounce bottles). 1.9 WARRANTY A. System Performance Warranty: Provide written warranty signed by manufacturer that exhibits defects in materials or workmanship. Defects are defined to include failure to withstand complete graffiti removal, ghosting, shadowing, chemical staining, yellowing, and normal environmental effects. Refer to American Polymer Corporation 10 Year Warranty. To obtain warranty service the purchaser must contact: American Polymer in writing. 1. A third party that is authorized by American Polymer must inspect project. 2. Warranty period: 10 years from date of completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ANTI GRAFFITI SYSTEM/MANUFACTURER A. Products Approved: Graffiti Solution System manufactured by American Polymer Corporation, is the only acceptable anti -graffiti product approved for use. Contact American Polymer in Sandy, Utah at 800-676-5963, 801-255-9505. Fax 801-255-7123. ANTI GRAFFITI COATINGS 09961- 3 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review 2.2 ANTI -GRAFFITI COATING MATERIALS Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. VOC Classification: Provide materials that comply with the South Coast Air Quality Management District's VOC classification. B. Coatings shall meet requirements of the following: 1. ASTM B 117 and ASTM D 714 (salt spray minimum acceptable of 8000 hours. 2. ASTM D 530 (hardness) 3. ASTM D 412 (tensile strength and elongation) 4. ASTM D 522 (pass 3/8 inch mandral) 5. ASTM 968 (abrasion test) 6. ASTM E 96 (vapor transmission) 7. Water clear, non -yellowing, free of waxes and urethanes. 8. Shall allow moisture vapor transmission. C. GSS-10 Undercoating: Clear VU High Solids Base Coating (AP307); a water-based high performance under coating used as sealer. Specify Sure Bond (AP308) for metal, marble, slate and tile surfaces. D. GSS-10 Top coatings: permanent anti -graffiti top coating. 1. Clear Finish: AP100 Clear Matte [Matte is defined as the finish of the top coating reading less than five degrees on a Gardner Gloss Meter] or API01 Clear semi -gloss or AP102 Clear gloss. 2. Pigmented Finish: AP 200 Pigmented Matte or AP 201 Pigmented semi -gloss or AP202 Pigmented gloss. E. Graffiti Remover: GSS Erasol; Non-flammable, biodegradable, with a pH 7 - 8.5 and recyclable, allowing graffiti removal without the use of blasting equipment, hot water, or high pressure wash equipment. 2.3 COLORS A. Colors: Match Architect's samples. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to bid, with Applicator present, a job "walk through" examining substrates and conditions under which anti -graffiti coatings will be applied for compliance with coating application requirements is essential. Surface / substrates will vary and must be taken into account. 1. Apply coatings only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces to receive coatings are thoroughly dry. 2. Start of application is construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces within that particular area. B. Coordination of Work: Review other sections in which primers or other coatings are provided to ensure compatibility of total systems for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of specified finish materials to ensure compatible primers. ANTI GRAFFITI COATINGS 09961-4 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1. If a potential incompatibility of primers applied by others exists, obtain the following from the primer Applicator before proceeding. a. Confirmation of the primer's suitability for expected service conditions. b. Confirmation of primer's ability to be top coated with materials specified. 2. Notify Architect about anticipated problems before using the coatings specified over substrates primed by others. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be coated. If removal is impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of item, provide surface - applied protection before surface preparation and coating. 1. After completing coating operation, reinstall items that were removed; use workers skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying coatings, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. 1. Schedule cleaning and coating application so dust and other contaminates from cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces. C. Surface preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be coated according to manufacturers written instructions for each substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove primers and reprime substrate. 2. Cementitious Substrates: Prepare concrete, brick, concrete masonry block, and cement plaster surfaces to be coated. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods to prepare surfaces. a. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Metal Substrates: Clean ferrous -metal surfaces that have been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt and other foreign substances. D. Material Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare coating materials according to the manufacturers written instructions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying coatings in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir materials before applying to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Apply coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use applicators and techniques best suited for the material being applied. ANTI GRAFFITI COATINGS 09961- 5 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA a. Do not apply coatings over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to forming a durable coating film. b. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until coating has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and application of another coat does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. B. Application Over Cementitious Surfaces: 1. All natural surfaces to include concrete, all masonry units, brick tile and block should be treated with a siloxane penetrating water sealer: Aqua -lock WB Water Repellent by American Polymer is compatible with the Graffiti Solution System. 2. Base: Minimum of 2 coats equaling 3 to 4 mils minimum dry film thickness or as many as necessary to achieve a pinhole free surface of GSS Barrier undercoating as specified by manufacturer. 3. Finish: Minimum of 2 coats of top coating; 3 to 4 mils minimum dry film thickness [or as many coats as necessary to satisfy warranty requirements] Surfaces will vary and the objective is to have the coating work on all substrates, the number of coats could vary as well. C. Application Over Primed Metal Surfaces: 1. Finish: 2 coats of top coating; 3 to 4 mils minimum dry film thickness. D. Completed Work: Match approved Samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or recoat work that does not comply with specified requirements. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when coatings are being applied: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample coating material being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. 2. Testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required by Owner: a. Quanitive materials analysis. b. Absorption c. Accelerated weathering. d. Accelerated yellowness. e. Alkali and mildew resistance. f. Abrasion resistance. g. Washability. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials being used do not comply with specified requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying coating materials from Project site, pay for testing, and recoat surfaces coated with rejected materials. If necessary, Contractor may be required to remove rejected materials from previously coated surfaces if, on recoating with specified materials, the two coatings are not compatible. ANTI GRAFFITI COATINGS 09961-6 • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA B. Demonstration: Apply alkyd -based graffiti to a 2 ft. sq. treated area selected by the Architect. 5 days minimum after application, demonstrate complete removal of the graffiti in the presence of the Architect. 3.5 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. 1. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether being coated or not, against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. 1. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly coated finishes. After completing coating operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work. 2. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1. END OF SECTION 09961 ANTI GRAFFITI COATINGS 09961- 7 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review SECTION 10155 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes toilet compartments and screens. 1.2 SUBMITTALS Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings including plans, elevations, sections, details of installation, and attachments to other Work. B. Samples: Submit samples for each exposed finish and for each color and pattern required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Accurate Partitions Corporation. 2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 3. Commercial and Architectural Products, Inc.; Marlite. 4. Crane Plumbing; Sanymetal. 5. Global Steel Products Corp. 6. Metpar Corp. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Core Material for Plastic Laminate: ANSI A208.1, Type M-2 particleboard with 45 -Ib (20.4 - kg) density in thicknesses required to provide nominal thicknesses of 1 inch (25 mm) minimum for doors, panels, and screens and 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) minimum for pilasters. B. Plastic Laminate: PL -4 as specified on drawings. C. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Stainless steel, not less than 3 inches (75 mm) high. D. Stirrup Brackets: Stainless steel. TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 1 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review 2.3 FABRICATION A. Toilet Compartments: Overhead braced and floor anchored. B. Urinal Screens: Wall hung. Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA C. Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, 24 -inch- (610 -mm-) wide in -swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36 -inch- (914 -min-) wide out -swinging doors with a minimum 32- inch- (813 -mm-) wide clear opening for compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities. D. Door Hardware: Stainless steel. Provide units that comply with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities. 1. Hinges: Self-closing type, adjustable to hold door open at any angle up to 90 degrees. 2. Latches and Keepers: Surface -mounted unit designed for emergency access and with combination rubber -faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible. 3. Coat Hook: Combination hook and rubber -tipped bumper, sized to prevent door from hitting compartment -mounted accessories. 4. Door Bumper: Rubber -tipped bumpers at out -swinging doors or entrance screen doors. 5. Door Pull: Provide at out -swinging doors. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb, with not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) between pilasters and panels and not more than 1 inch (25 mm) between panels and walls. Provide brackets, pilaster shoes, bracing, and other components required for a complete installation. Use theft -resistant exposed fasteners finished to match hardware. Use sex -type bolts for through -bolt applications. 1. Brackets: Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in tile joints. 2. Set hinges on in -swinging doors to hold open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out -swinging doors and swing doors in entrance screens to return to fully closed position. END OF SECTION 10155 10155/11-99/dub TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 2 1 • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 SECTION 10350 - FLAGPOLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review A. This Section includes wall -mounted flagpoles. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Structural Performance: Provide flagpole assemblies, including anchorages and supports, capable of withstanding the maximum effects of wind loads, determined according to NAAMM FP 1001, "Guide Specifications for Design of Metal Flagpoles" using wind loads as determined by Section 6 of ASCE 7, and the authorities having jurisdiction for the geographic location of the building. 1.3 SU:BMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings include elevations and details showing general arrangement, jointing, fittings and accessories, grounding, and anchoring and supporting systems. B. Structural Calculations: Submit structural calculations, for information only, for flagpoles indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain flagpole, except light topper at top of flag, as a complete unit, including fittings, accessories, bases, and anchorage devices, from a single manufacturer. B. Pole Manufacturer: The drawings and specifications are based on Model PTN-30 Flagpole, without a topper, as manufactured by Pole -Tech Co., Inc., East Setauket, NY (800) 633-6733 voice/ (631) 689-5528 fax. C. Light topper Manufacturer: Model ORN FPB 1H -6.5 -D -12V LED with a transformer or 120 volt power supply, finish to match flagpole, as manufactured by The Flag Company, Inc., Acworth, GA (770) 947-0507 voice, (770) 974- 0793 Fax 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Spiral wrap flagpoles with heavy paper and enclose in a hard fiber tube or other protective container. FLAGPOLES 10350 - 1 Gensler 32.2177.089 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FLAGPOLES April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Flagpole Construction, General: Construct flagpoles in one piece if possible. If more than one piece is necessary, comply with the following: 1. Fabricate shop and field joints without using fasteners, screw collars, or lead calking. 2. For tapered flagpoles, provide flush hairline joints using self -aligning, snug -fitting, internal sleeves. B. Exposed Height: 30 to 35 feet (9.1 m). Coordinate with architect. C. Aluminum Flagpoles: Provide cone -tapered flagpoles fabricated from seamless extruded tubing complying with ASTM B 241/ (B 241M), Alloy 6063, a minimum yield strength of 30,000 psi, and a minimum butt wall thickness of 0.188". Heat treat after fabrication to comply with ASTM B 597, Temper T6. 1. Cone taper to be a uniform straight line rate of 1" every 5.5 feet. D. Cast -Metal Shoe Base: For anchor -bolt mounting; provide with anchor bolts. 1. Provide units made from aluminum with same finish and color as flagpoles. 2. Provide ground spike at grade -mounted flagpoles. 2.2 FITTINGS A. Light topper: Manufacturer Model ORN FPB IH -6.5 -D -12V LED with a transformer or 120 volt power supply, fmish to match flagpole, as manufactured by The Flag Company, Inc., Acworth, GA (770) 974-0507 voice, (770) 974- 0793 Fax (Light topper and flag pole are manufactured by two independent companies and shall be ordered separately. General Contractor is responsible for installing the light topper on the flag pole on site.) B. Internal Halyard System: A system including a heavy duty stainless steel revolving truck and hood with a heavy duty stainless steel direct drive winch with a removable handle. Winch is to be manually operated and have a spring loaded friction brake to lock the flag at any position on the pole. The winch shall be accessible through a flush pivot access door with a cylinder lock and a continuous stainless steel piano hinge. Flag descent system shall consist of a nylon sling, which encircles the pole and is attached to a neoprene coated counterweight at the halyard end. The flag shall be attached to 2 stainless steel snap hooks with vinyl covers that are attached to a 1/8" diameter 7 x 19 construction stainless steel aircraft cable halyard. 2.3 FINISHES A. Metal Finishes, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. FLAGPOLES 10350 - 2 • • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA B. Aluminum: Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. 1. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M32A41 (Mechanical Finish: directional textured mechanical satin finish; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FLAGPOLE INSTALLATION A. General: Install flagpoles where shown and according to Shop Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 10350 FLAGPOLES 10350 - 3 • • Gensler 32.2177.089 SECTION 10506 - WOOD LOCKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review A. This Section includes wood lockers. 1.2 SUBMITTALS Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings including plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. 1. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 2. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in wood lockers. 3. Show wood locker fillers, trim, base, and accessories. 4. Show wood locker numbering sequence. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Source Limitations: Obtain wood lockers through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver wood lockers until painting and similar operations that could damage wood lockers have been completed in installation areas. If wood lockers must be stored in other -than - installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions are same as that in final installation location and comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install wood lockers until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Verify concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support wood lockers by field measurements before being enclosed and before wood locker fabrication, and :indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. WOOD LOCKERS 10506 - 1 Gensler 32.2177.089 1.6 COORDINATION April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review A. Coordinate size and location of concealed wood support bases. Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA B. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that wood lockers can be supported and installed as indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT AND MANUFACTURER A. Basis -of -Design Product: The design for wood lockers is based on Model Z 72" x 12" x 20" as manufactured by Hollman, Inc., Irving TX. Contact Sherand Esser, (972) 815-4000 voice, (972) 815-2921. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade as standard with manufacturer, minimum 45-lb/cu. ft. (720-kg/cu. m) density. B. Thermoset Decorative Overlay: Particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, or medium -density fiberboard complying with ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, with surface of thermally fused, melamine -impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT -1. 1. Color: Almond interior. C. High -Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as follows: 1. Horizontal Surfaces: HGS. 2. Vertical Surfaces: VGS. 3. Product and Manufacturer: Nevamar Plastic Laminate, English Lace, Textured, S-2085. D. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. E. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. 1. Provide nonferrous -metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. 2. Provide toothed -steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled -in-place anchors. F. Concealed Wood Support Base: Refer to Section 06105, MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY. WOOD LOCKERS 10506 - 2 • • Gensler 32.2177.089 2.3 WOOD LOCKER HARDWARE April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard wood locker hardware and accessories complying with the following: B. Frameless Hinges (European Type): Fully concealed, nickel -plated steel, with not less than 125 degrees of opening. Provide 3 hinges for each door. C. Pulls and Hinges: Metal, back mounted; manufactures standard for specified model. D. Exposed Hardware Finishes: Satin chrome, unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 DOOR LOCKS A. General: Fabricate wood lockers to receive locking devices. Provide one locking device for each wood locker door, unless otherwise indicated. B. Cain Padlock Hasp: Surface mounted, steel; finished to match other wood locker hardware. 2.5 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED WOOD LOCKERS A. Construction Style: As indicated. B. Locker Body: Fabricated from particleboard -core panels covered on both sides with thermoset decorative overlay. 1. Side Panels: 5/8 inch (16 mm) thick. 2. Back Panel: 5/8 inch (16 mm) thick. 3. Top Panel: 5/8 inch (16 mm) thick. 4. Bottom Panel: 5/8 inch (16 mm) thick. 5. Exposed Panel Edges: 2 -mm -thick PVC, black. C. Plastic -Laminate -Faced Wood Doors: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS, over both sides of particleboard core. 1. Core Thickness: 5/8 inch (16 mm) thick. 2. Panel Edges: 2 -mm -thick PVC, black. D. End Panels: Match style, material, construction, and finish of plastic -laminate -faced wood doors. E. Shelves: Fabricated from particleboard -core panels covered on both sides with thermoset decorative overlay; fixed, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (16 mm). 2. Exposed Edges: 2 -mm -thick PVC, black. • F. Semiexposed Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative overlay. WOOD LOCKERS 10506 - 3 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA G. Corners and Filler Panels: Laminate -faced, 3/4 -inch- (19 -mm-) thick panel that matches door faces. 2.6 LOCKER ACCESSORIES A. Hooks: Manufacturer's standard ball -pointed, aluminum or steel; chrome finished. Attach hooks with at least two fasteners. 1. Provide one double -prong wall hook for each compartment of double -tier wood lockers. B. Coat Rods: Manufacturers standard steel; chrome finished. 1. Provide coat rod for each compartment of double -tier wood lockers. C. Number Disks: 1 -1/2 -inch- (38 -mm-) diameter, etched, embossed, or stamped, metal plates with black numbers and letters at least 1/2 inch (13 mm) high. Identify wood lockers in sequence indicated on Drawings. Finish plates to match other wood locker hardware. 2.7 WOOD LOCKER FABRICATION A. Unit Principle: Fabricate each wood locker with an individual door and frame, individual top, bottom, back, and shelves, and common intermediate uprights separating compartments. 1. Fabricate wood lockers to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. 2. Ease edges of corners of solid wood members to radius of 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). B. Fabricate components square, rigid, without warp, and with finished faces flat and free of scratches and chips. Accurately machine components for attachments in factory, with no chips. Make joints tight and true. 1. Fabricate wood lockers using European 32 -mm doweled and glued construction. C. Venting: Fabricate wood lockers with space between doors and locker assembly of not less than 12 mm. D. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment. E. Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing -in diagrams to WOOD LOCKERS 10506 - 4 • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA • produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. F. Attach PVC edging to panels by thermally fusing edging to panels after panel fabrication. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls, floors, and wood bases for suitable conditions where wood lockers will be installed. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Condition wood lockers to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation. B. Before installing wood lockers, examine factory -fabricated work for completeness and complete work as required, including removal of packing. 41110 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install concealed wood support base with 1/2 -inch- (13 -mm-) thick plywood top. B. Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. C. Connect groups of wood lockers together with manufacturer's standard fasteners, through predrilled holes, with no exposed fasteners on face frames. Fit wood lockers accurately together to firm flush, tight, hairline joints. D. Install wood lockers without distortion so doors fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Installation Tolerance: No more than 1/8 inch in 96 -inch (3 mm in 2400 -mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. Shim as required with concealed shims. 2. Fasten wood lockers through back, near top and bottom, at ends with No. 8 pan -head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish spaced not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. 3. Fasten wood lockers through wood locker base, at ends and not more than 36 inches (910 mm) o.c. with No. 8 flush -head wood screws sized for 1 -inch (25 -mm) penetration into wood base. • E. Scribe and cut corner and filler panels to fit adjoining work using fasteners concealed where practical. Repair damaged finish at cuts. WOOD LOCKERS 10506 - 5 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review F. Number Disks: Install disks after wood lockers are in place. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. Adjust doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. B. Protect wood lockers from damage, abuse, dust, dirt, stain, or paint. Do not permit wood locker use during construction. C. Touch up marred finishes, or replace wood lockers that cannot be restored to factory -finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by wood locker manufacturer. END OF SECTION 10506 WOOD LOCKERS 10506 - 6 • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review SECTION 10520 - FIRE -PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fire protection specialties. 1.2 SUBMITTALS Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers and fire -protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and fire -protection cabinets through one source from a single manufacturer. B. NFIPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." C. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size of fire -protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each fire -protection cabinet indicated. B. Multipurpose Dry -Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL -rated minimum 2-A:10-B:C, 5 -lb (2.2 -kg) nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate -based dry chemical in enameled - steel container. 2.2 FIRE -PROTECTION CABINETS FIRE -PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520-1 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. General: Provide fire extinguisher cabinets of suitable size for housing fire extinguishers of types and capacities specified. B. Construction: Provide manufacturer's standard enameled steel box, with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld joints and grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. 1. Cabinet Mounting: Cabinet box (tub) fully recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated. 2. Trim Style: Trimless with hidden flange of same metal and finish as box (tub) that overlaps surrounding wall finish and is concealed from view by an overlapping door. 3. Door Material and Construction: Manufacturer's standard door construction, of material indicated, coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. a. Enameled Steel: Manufacturer's standard flush, hollow steel door construction with tubular stiles and rails. 4. Door Style: Manufacturer's standard design, Duo Panel with clear acrylic vision panel. 5. Door Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard door -operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style specified. Provide built-in door fmgerpull 1 and friction latch. Provide concealed continuous -type hinge permitting door to open 180 deg. C. Product and Manufacturer: Potter -Roemer: Dana Extinguisher Cabinets, Model 7220-DV- VAB with vertical duo door. 2.3 FINISHES FOR FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for finish application recommendations except as otherwise indicated. Apply finishes in factory after products are assembled. Protect cabinets with plastic or paper covering, prior to shipment. B. Painted Finishes: Provide painted finish to comply with requirements indicated below for extent, preparation and type: 1. Extent of Painted Finish: Apply painted finish to both concealed and exposed surfaces of cabinet components. 2. Color: Provide color or color matches indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 3. Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, grease, and loose rust or mill scale. 4. Field-Paintable Factory Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreatment, apply to surfaces indicated below, manufacturer's standard factory -applied paint system which is FIRE -PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520-2 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA • suitable, after deglossing, as an undercoat for field -applied paint system specified in Section 09912 PAINTING: • • a. Exterior of cabinet except for those surfaces indicated to receive another finish. b. Interior of cabinet. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prepare recesses for recessed fire -protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Follow manufacturer's printed instructions for installation. Install fire -protection specialties in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights indicated below: 1. Fire -Protection Cabinets: 54 inches (1372 mm) above finished floor to top of cabinet. B. Fire -Protection Cabinets: Fasten fire -protection cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust fire -protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units. B. On completion of fire -protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 10520 FIRE -PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520-3 • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review SECTION 10705 - EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Fixed exterior sun control devices. B. Related Sections include the following: Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for blocking, shims, reinforcing, and supplemental support members for connecting to sun shade frame and anchorage. 2. Division 07 Sections "Metal Wall Panels" and "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for fascias and flashings associated with sun shades. 3. Division 08 Section "Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls" for curtain walls receiving sun shades. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Design, fabricate, and install sun shades to withstand loads from gravity, wind, snow, drift, seismic, and structural movement, including thermally induced movement; and to resist, without failure, other conditions of in-service use, including exposure to weather. B. Structural Performance: Provide sun shades capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on the following minimum design wind pressures: a. Uniform pressure as indicated on Drawings. C. Seismic Performance: Provide sun shades capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures." D. Thermal Movements: Provide sun shades that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, tearing of fabric, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES Copyright 2008 Gensler 10 71 13 - 1 Gensler 32.2177.089 1.3 SUBMITTALS April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Product Data: Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, fabrication details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, fittings, mounting accessories, features, and fmishes, for sun shades. B. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of sun shades. Include elevations, sections, and details not shown in Product Data. Show materials, fabrication, dimensions, mounting heights, connections, anchorages, installation details, attachments to other work, operational clearances, and relationship to adjoining work. Show colors and graphic layout and content. 1. Show locations for blocking, reinforcement, and supplementary structural support to be provided by others. 2. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. Calculate requirements for supporting sun shades and for seismic restraint. Verify capacity of members and connections to support loads and verify loads, point reactions, and locations for attachment of sun shades to structure with those indicated on Drawings. C. Samples for Verification: For each of the following products and for the full range of color, texture, and pattern variations required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. If finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. 1. Metal Finish: Not less than 6 -inch (150 -mm) lengths. 2. Frame and Blade Intersection: Not less than 10 -inch (254 -mm) square construction sample showing finished joint construction and blade attachment to sun shade frame. 3. Exposed Hardware Finishes: Manufacturer's standard -size unit, not less than 3 inches (76 mm) square. D. Welding certificates. E. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator and professional engineer. F. Research/Evaluation Reports: For anchors and fasteners. G. Maintenance Data: For sun shades, to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining finishes. H. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design structural support framing components for sun shades under direct supervision of professional structural engineer. B. Installer qualifications: Approved by manufacturer for installation sun of shade system. EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES 10 71 13 - 2 Copyright 2008 Gensler • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA C. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom -fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance. D. Source Limitations: Obtain sun shades through one source from a single manufacturer. E. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code --Steel." 2. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code --Aluminum." 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit installation of sun shades in exterior locations to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements. B. Field Measurements: Where sun shade installation is indicated to fit to other work, verify dimensions of other work by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for fenestration operation throughout the entire operating range. Notify Architect of discrepancies. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. • 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer and fabricator agree to repair or replace components of sun shades that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including framework. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2. Sun Shade Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 3. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Extruded aluminum: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063, Temper T-6. B. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 6061-T6. 4111 C. Sheet aluminum: ASTM B209 6063, Temper T-6. EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES Copyright 2008 Gensler 10 71 13 - 3 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review D. Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar: ASTM A 666, Type 304. E. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA F. Steel Sheet, Cold Rolled: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, either commercial steel or structural steel, exposed. 2.2 SUN SHADE SYSTEM A. Type: Custom sun shades consisting of sheet metal or metal plate infill framed into outriggers, for mounting on exterior building surfaces, as shown in Drawings. B. Blades: Profiles as indicated in Drawings. C. Support System: Outriggers and mounting system shall be designed to resist applicable dead, live, wind, and seismic loads. Provide configuration shown in Drawings. 1. Construction: Welded and bolted fabrication as detailed and dimensioned on Drawings and approved shop drawings. Coordinate with curtain wall construction for required reinforcement. 2. Size: As required to provide sufficient structural support of blades. D. Fasteners: Stainless steel bolts, studs, and other types of size and spacing as recommended by manufacturer for specific condition and detailed on approved shop drawings. 2.3 ALUMINUM FINISH A. Baked -Enamel or Powder -Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm). Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish. 1. Color and Gloss: Match Architect's sample. 2.4 FERROUS METAL FINISH A. Powder -Coat Finish: Prepare, treat, and coat nongalvanized ferrous metal to comply with resin manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: 1. Prepare uncoated ferrous -metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Treat prepared metal with iron -phosphate pretreatment, rinse, and seal surfaces. 3. Apply thermosetting polyester or acrylic urethane powder coating with cured -film thickness not less than 1.5 mils (0.04 mm). 4. Color: Match Architect's sample. EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES Copyright 2008 Gensler 107113-4 • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 411 2.5 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISH A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish. B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches. 1. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece. C. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for supporting members, blocking, inserts, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Install sun shades at locations and in position indicated, securely connected to supports, free of rack, and in proper relation to adjacent construction. Use mounting methods of types indicated and in compliance with Shop Drawings and fabricator's written instructions. B. Install sun shades after other finishing operations, including joint sealing and painting, have been completed. C. Anchoring to In -Place Construction: Use anchors, fasteners, fittings, hardware, and installation accessories where necessary for securing sun shades to structural support and for properly transferring load to in-place construction. D. Con-osion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. E. Coordinate sun shade installation with flashing and joint -sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed exterior wall and roof assemblies. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean sun shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, connections, and abraded area>. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with same or compatible material as used for shop - applied finish painting. EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES 10 71 13 - 5 Copyright 2008 Gensler Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0 -mil (0.05 -mm) dry film thickness. C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. D. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that sun shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. E. Replace damaged sun shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 10 73 13 EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES Copyright 2008 Gensler 107113-6 • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review SECTION 10801 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes toilet and bath accessory items. 1.2 COORDINATION Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by disabled persons, proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. 1.3 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Mirror Warranty: Written warranty, executed by mirror manufacturer agreeing to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects within minimum warranty period indicated. 1. Minimum Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, No. 4 finish (satin), in 22 ga. minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. B. Mirror Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, nominal 6.0 mm thick, with silvering, electroplated copper coating, and protective organic coating complying with FS DD- M -411. C. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. D. Fasteners: Provide concealed fastenings for all accessory items. Exposed fastenings will be permittedonly where specifically approved by the Architect and are required to match finish of the accessories fastened thereby. E. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801-1 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 2.2 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES A. Toilet and Bath Accessories, General: 1. Only equal products to the those specified and manufactured by Franklin Brass will be considered. B. Underlavatory Guards (Indicated on the Drawings as Insulation Sock): 1. Product and Manufacturer: LAV -GUARD undersink protective pipe cover; Truebro, Inc. 2. Insulating Piping Coverings: White, antimicrobial, molded -vinyl covering for supply and drain piping assemblies intended for use at accessible lavatories to prevent direct contact with and burns from piping. Provide components as required for applications indicated with flip tops at valves that allow service access without removing coverings. C. Baby Changing Tables: Koala Bear Kare Baby Changing Station, Horizontal Style,Recessed Mount with Stainless Steel Flange #KB 100-00ST; Koala Corp. Contact: Andy Hansen @ (800) 764-3454, ext. 8417, ahansen@koalabear.com. D. Partition Mounted Sanitary napkin Disposal (Large Layout Only): Bobrick, Classic Line B- 354 . E. Recessed Paper Towel Dispenser: Bobrick B-35903 dispensers shall be non -lockable. F. Recessed Toilet Tissue Dispenser: Bobrick B-3888. G. Surface Mounted Robe/Utility Hook: Bobrick B-6707. H. Surface Mounted Mirror: Bobrick, B-165 (24" w. x 36" h.) I. Recessed Paper Towel Dispenser and Waste Receptacle: Bobrick B- 38034. J. Grab Bars: Bobrick B-6806.99. K. Custom Grab Bars: Bobrick B-6893 modified to length as shown on drawings. L. Recessed Toilet Tissue Dispenser with Sanitary Napkin Disposal: Bobrick B-3094 M. Restroom Signage: Advance Corporation (888) 328-9451, Injected Molded Plastic Signs, with raised text, internal pictogram, and Grade 2 Braille, Classic White colored characters with black background, 6" wide x 8" high x'A" thick, model numbers as follows: 1. Men's Room Signs: P101. 2. Women's Rooms Signs: P102. N. Recessed Toilet Seat Cover Dispenser: Bobrick B-301. O. Surface Mounted Soap Dispenser: Bobrick B-2111. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801-2 • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and finnly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. B. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms function properly. Replace damaged or defective items. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations. END OF SECTION 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801-3 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review SECTION 11310 - KITCHEN APPLIANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. General: Provide Kitchen Appliances in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. General: Furnish submittals simultaneously with submittals for adjacent casework, specified in Section 06400 "Architectural Woodwork". B. Product Data: Submit for Architect's action. Submit manufacturer's literature, specifications and installation instructions describing the general properties of each appliance to be used in the Work. C. Shop Drawings: Submit for Architect's action. Submit shop drawings for the layout of the Work. Prepare plans and elevations at not less than 'A in. = lft. scale. D. Closeout Submittals: Submit for Owner's documentation. 1. Warranties. 2. Maintenance Data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, ordinances and regulations of Federal, State and Municipal authorities having jurisdiction. Obtain necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading: Protect architectural woodwork during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage. Cover and keep covered with non -staining protective wrapping. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 KITCHEN APPLIANCES A. Water Cooler: 1. Product: Spectrum Water Cooler SWC2000. (Note: on the website this product has KITCHEN APPLIANCES 11310-1 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA been renamed SWC -15.) 2. Contact information: Mark Kershes Tel 800-475-5037 x 1223 MKershes@SpectrumWaterCoolers.com 3. Installation shall only be done by installers who have 5 years experience with installing Spectrum Water Coolers. B. Plumbing: 1. A 1/4" or 3/8" water line with shutoff valve. Water line may be copper or food grade polyethylene. 2. Run water line to run within 2 feet of location where cooler is to be located C. Electrical: 1. Standard 110v outlet 2. Locate outlet within 5' of cooler location, preferable immediately behind where cooler will be located. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Manufacturer's Instructions: Install the work of this Section, including components and accessories in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, and where project conditions require extra precautions or provisions to ensure satisfactory performance of the Work. If there is a conflict between the requirements listed below and the construction drawings, this discrepancy shall be brought to the attention of Spectrum Water Cooler prior to installation. B. Plumbing: 1. A 1/4" or 3/8" water line with shutoff valve. Water line may be copper or food grade polyethylene. 2. Run water line to run within 2 feet of location where cooler is to be located C. Electrical: 1. Standard 110v outlet 2. Locate outlet within 5' of cooler location, preferable immediately behind where cooler will be located. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine the areas to receive the Work and the conditions under which the Work would be performed. Remedy conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. END OF SECTION 11310 KITCHEN APPLIANCES 11310-2 • • • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 SECTION 12494 - SHADES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review A. This section includes window shades. Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA 1. Window shades are required at all exterior windows, window walls, and curtain walls to the extent indicated on the drawings. 1.2 QUALIFICATIONS A. Provide shades by a single manufacturer. B. Each shade shall be provided in place and in full operative condition by skilled workmen experienced and especially trained in the type of installation required, and who are acceptable to the shade manufacturer. C. Manufacturer's nameplates, or stamped or printed markings, shall not be exposed on any item of shades or accessories provided. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. .Manufacturer's Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for the shades. B. Warranty: Submit copies of written warranty signed by the manufacturer, warranting the shade installation to remain operational without fault for the warranty period and include all operating parts, including shade cloth, except for the bead chain which is not covered by the warranty for a period of twenty five (25) years from date of substantial completion. 1.4 DELIVERY AND HANDLING A. Special care shall be taken in the handling of the shades to avoid their being either scratched or otherwise defaced during the course of installation. Any materials showing evidence of such mishandling shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SHADES SHADES 12494-1 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A Manufacturer: Products specified herein by proprietary designation are as manufactured by MechoShade Systems, Inc., Long Island City, NY and establish the quality standards required. Equivalent products of other manufacturers will NOT be considered. 1. Shade Type and Product Line: a. Type: Head mounted, manually operated, interior roller screen solar shades with 1000 series fabric and front and reverse fascia. b. Product Line: Mecho Shade System; totally integrated manual operating chain and sprocket driven roller shades. B. Hardware and Brackets: 1. Provide hardware with regular and offset drive capacity (for beaded chain fall at front or rear of bracket) on all shade drive end brackets. 2. The hardware system shall be fabricated which allows: a. For removal of shade roller tube from brackets without removing hardware from opening. b. Removal and re -mounting of the shade without having to remove shade tube, drive, or operating support brackets. c. The installation of a removable fascia assembly, regular and reverse roll, with concealed fastening. d. Positive engagement of drive mechanism to shade roller tube. 3. All shade hardware shall be fabricated of minimum 1/8" thick cadmium plated steel or heavier as required to support 150% of the full weight of each shade. 4. All plastic hardware components shall be fabricated of delrin. 5. Drive Bracket/Brake Assembly: a. The brackets shall be fabricated to integrate with the accessories, hardware, and fascias specified. Product reference: Mechoshade Drive Bracket Model 5 (M5). b. The bracket shall use standard 1/8" thick steel plate for mounting and support of the assembly. The drive sprocket and brake assembly shall rotate and be supported on a welded 3/8" diameter steel pin. c. The brake means shall be an overrunning clutch design which shall disengage to 90% during the raising and lowering of the shade. The brake shall withstand a pull force of 50 pounds in the stopped position. The braking means shall be applied to an oil impregnated hub on to which the brake system is mounted. The oil impregnated hub SHADES 12494-2 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA • shall include an articulated brake assembly which assures smooth, non jerky operation in raising and lowering the shades. • • d. The drive bracket/brake assembly shall be fully mounted on the steel support bracket, fully independent of the shade roller assembly, which may be removed and reinstalled without effecting the roller shade limit adjustments. 6. Beaded Chain: The drive chain shall be #10 qualified stainless steel beaded chain rated to 90 pound minimum breaking strength. C. Shade Roller: The shade roller shall be fabricated from extruded aluminum tube of a diameter and wall thickness required to support fabric covered tubes of the spans and areas indicated without excessive deflection. The tube shall be formed with asymmetrically shaped channels in which a matching snap -in vinyl spline and lightseal shall be inserted. The shade and spline shall be removable and replaceable without removing either the tube or the brackets. D. Fascia Assembly: Provide a continuous, regular and reverse roll, removable extruded aluminum fascia assembly, fmished as specified, that attaches to shade mounting brackets without the use of adhesives, magnetic strips, or exposed fasteners. Fascia shall be sized to span the width of each shade panel in one single length. In addition the fascia assembly shall be fabricated and installed so as to fully conceal mounting brackets, shade roller and fabric on the tube. E. Exposed Metal Finishes: All exposed aluminum parts shall have a clear natural anodized finish. Steel parts shall be satin finished, chromium or cadmium plated, or bonderized prior to painting. F. Shade Cloth: 1 . Fabric shall be sufficiently heat -set so that edges do not ravel when knife cut. 2. Shade Fabrication: Shades shall be fabricated square with a Snap -Loc spline for fastening directly to shade roller tube. Form a hem pocket along the bottom edge of each shade using a continuous RF welded seam appropriated sized for the hembar. Insert a continuous hembar, appropriately sized for the weight of the shade, into the hem pocket and fully conceal by RF welding the ends of the pocket. a. Layout shade fabric for attachment to mounting tube by railroading. ? . Shade Fabric, Pattern, and Color: Visually transparent single fabric shade cloth fabricated from single thickness non -raveling 0.030 inch thick vinyl fabric which is woven from 0.018 inch diameter extruded vinyl yarn comprised of 21% polyester and 79% reinforced vinyl. a. Product: 1000 Series with 3% open dense linear weave pattern, 1002 Beige color; Mecho Shade Systems, Inc. Thermoveil Group. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CONDITION OF SUBSTRATES SHADES 12494-3 Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Examine all surfaces and the conditions under which the shade work is to be installed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and are acceptable. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions before proceeding with work. Obtain field measurements for work required to be accurately fitted to other construction. The Contractor shall be responsible for accuracy of such measurements and precise fitting, and assembly of fmished work. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install all shades in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions for the type of mounting and operation required. Provide units plumb, true, and securely anchored in place with recommended hardware and accessories to provide smooth operation without binding. Do not make any permanent attachments to the window system. B. Install shades within the following tolerances: 3. Maximum variation of gap at window opening perimeter: 1/4 inch, per 8 feet (+/- 1/8 inch) of shade height. 4. Maximum offset from level: 1/8 inch per 5 feet of shade width. C. Testing and Adjustments: Test all manual shades to verify proper operation. Adjust drive / brake mechanism of shades for smooth operation. Adjust shade and shadecloth to hang flat without buckling or distortion. Replace any shades or components which do not hang properly or operate smoothly. 3.4 CLEANING A. Upon completion of the installation, remove all debris from the site and leave all areas clean. Remove any soiled spots from the face of fmish surfaces using processes recommended by the shade manufacturer. B. Clean exposed fmishes as recommended by the manufacturer or processor, using care to avoid abrasion of the fmish. C. Replace any areas of fmish surfaces where cleaning has failed to restore appearance and quality satisfactorily, as determined by the Architect. D. Upon completion of installation and verification of shade operation, raise shades to their uppermost position. END OF SECTION 12494 SHADES 12494-4 • • • Gensler 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review 411 SECTION 12900 - BUILDING ACCESSORIES • • PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This section includes building accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. ;Submit shop drawings showing installation details of accessories permanently affixed to construction, including full scale installation details of special conditions. B. Submit samples of building accessory items as requested by Architect. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to project site in original factory wrappings and containers, clearly labeled with identification of manufacturer, brand name, and lot number. Store materials in original undamaged packages and containers, inside well -ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, humidity; laid flat, blocked off ground to prevent sagging and warping. B. Comply with instructions and recommendations of manufacturer for special delivery, storage, and handling requirements. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Screws, bolts or other exposed devices of same material as accessory unit, or of galvanized steel where concealed. Equip items with theft -proof fasteners where accessible to tampering. 2.2 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Provide accessory items, both free standing and permanently installed, equipped with functions as specified. Fabricate units with tight seams and joints. Manufacturer or product identification on exposed surfaces is unacceptable. Provide products with smooth welds, consistent fmish with no evidence of wrinkling, chipping, uneven coloration, dents, or other imperfections. 2.3 PRODUCTS BUILDING ACCESSORIES 12900-1 Gensf'er 32.2177.089 April 30, 2008 CD Owner Review • Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA A. Fireman's Lockbox: Unless otherwise required by the authorities having jurisdiction provide Model 3200-R Heavy Duty Knox -Box with Recessed Mounting Kit (3200 RMK) provide manufacturer's standard aluminum finish as selected by Architect; Knox Company. B. Walk -Off Mat: Reference interior fmish schedule on drawing. C. Coat Hook: Provide and install (3) type II coat hooks on 5" centers. Securely mounted on 6" x 18" x %" thick plywood painted to match wall. Quantity as shown in elevations. Type II: Product no. 885.06.209 chrome polished Hafele: www.hafele.com 1-800-423-3531. D. Proof Bag Hook: Provide and install (5) type I hooks space at 4" centers with 2" on either end for a total; securely mounted to a piece of 'A" x 6" x 24" plywood painted to match wall. Type I: Product no. 845.00.809 aluminum polished Hafele: www.hafele.com 1-800-423-3531. E. Trash/Ash Urn: MF3006, Classic Ash n' Trash Waste Container with Rain Cover and Concrete Base, by Wausau Tile. 30 gallon capacity with gray panel, ring, and top. Contact Julie Meis at (800) 388-8728 x.360, jmeis@wausautile.com for Bank of America preferred pricing F. FRP Panels for Janitors Mop Sink Wall Protection: Fiber -Lite Liner Panels by NUDO Products, Inc. Product No. LP -S9 with Class A Fire -Rating in Gray. Provide manufacturers suggested adhesive for securing panels to walls and sealant (in Gray) for joints and at panel perimeter. Provide vinyl moldings, including inside corner angle, perimeter cap, and inside corner cove (parts V-13, V-1, and V-5 respectively.). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Verify that materials are those specified before installing. B. Install accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. C. Wall -Mounted Accessory Units: Install accessories complying with manufacturer's printed instruction, using fasteners as recommended by manufacturer as appropriate to substrate. D. Free Standing Accessory Units: Install free standing units in scheduled locations. E. Adjust accessory items for proper operation. Clean and polish exposed surfaces, using materials and methods recommended by the manufacturer. 3.2 PROTECTION A. Protect accessories against damage during remainder of construction period, complying with manufacturer's directions. END OF SECTION 12900 BUILDING ACCESSORIES 12900-2 • 4 • • • Volume2of2 PLC Copy -:-.for construction of Bank of America SouthCenter Branch Relocation 320 Strander Blvd Tukwila, WA 98188 COD REVIEWED FOR-- E CCMPLIMCE /APPROVE® OCT 2 7 2008 *�fT. wlBDa BUILDING DJ ION Dob-3b3 RECEIVED JUL 08 2000 PERMIT CENTER Prepared by Gensler 1524 Fifth Avenue Suite 300 Seattle, Washington 98101 Phone: 206.654.2100 Fax: 206.654.2121 Not for Construction 04/30/2008 CD Owner Review Project Number 32.2177.089 • • Gensler April 30, 2008 32.2177.089 CD Owner Review VOLUME 2 DIVISION 21- FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS — FIRE PROTECTION 21 10 00 FIRE PROTECTION DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING 22 05 00 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS - PLUMBING 22 05 01 PLUMBING 22 07 00 22 11 23 2221 13 22 21 23 22 40 00 PLUMBING INSULATION PLUMBING EQUIPMENT PLUMBING PIPING, VALVES AND SPECIALTIES PUMPS AND SPECIALTIES PLUMBING FIXTURES DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 05 00 23 05 93 23 07 00 23 08 00 23 09 00 23 09 02 23 09 93 23 31 13 23 34 13 23 74 13 23 81 25 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS - HVAC TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING HVAC INSULATION MECHANICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFD) SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS AIR DISTRIBUTION FANS AND VENTS PACKAGED HVAC UNITS MINI -SPLIT AIR CONDITIONING UNITS DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 26 05 19 26 05 26 26 05 29 26 05 33 26 05 48 26 05 53 26 06 51 26 06 52 26 09 23 26 24 16 26 27 26 26 28 16 26 29 23 26 43 13 26 51 00 26 56 00 28 31 11 Bank of America SouthCenter Tukwila, WA BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SITE LIGHTING LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE INTERIOR LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES PANELBOARDS WIRING DEVICES ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS VARIABLE -FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS TRANSIENT -VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FOR LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS INTERIOR LIGHTING EXTERIOR LIGHTING DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE -ALARM SYSTEM GENERAL CONDITIONS 00700-3 Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America 507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch SECTION 210500 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS — FIRE PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS A. All work under this Section shall comply with the requirements of General Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements, and shall include all Mechanical Sections specified herein. 1.2 SCOPE OF THIS SECTION A. All work to be furnished and installed under this Section shall comply with all the requirements of Division 01, and shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following: 1. Compliance with all codes and standards applicable to this jurisdiction. 2. Shop Drawings for Equipment 3. Coordination Documents 4. Record Drawings 5. Start-up Service and Building Commissioning 6. Instruction, Maintenance, and 0 & M Manuals 7. Work associated with Delivery, Storage, and Handling of products 8. Work associated with provision of Temporary Facilities 9. Preparation of Posted Operating Instructions 10. Meeting Project Safety and Indemnity requirements 111. Proper Cleaning and Closing 12. Supplying proper Warranty information 13. Supply specified Guarantee documentation 14. Design and provision of Supports and Anchors 15. Design and provision of Seismic Restraints and Vibration Isolation 16. Pipe Portals 17. Access Panels and Doors 18. Identification Markers 19. Coordination of Electrical requirements for equipment provided 1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The Contract Documents, including Specifications and Construction Drawings, are intended to provide all material and labor to install complete fire protection systems for the building and shall interface with all existing building systems affected by new construction. B. The Contractor shall refer to the architectural interior details, floor plans, elevations, and the structural and other Contract Drawings and he shall coordinate his work with that of the other trades to avoid interference. The plans are diagrammatic and show generally the locations of the equipment, and risers and are not to be scaled; all dimensions and existing conditions shall be checked at the building. C. The Contractor shall comply with the project closeout requirements as detailed in General Requirements of Division 01. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS — FIRE PROTECTION (WITH SEISMIC) Copyright 2008 Glumac 210500 - 1 Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America 507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch D. Where project involves interface with existing building and site systems, effort has been made to note existing utilities and services. However, the Contractor should thoroughly familiarize themselves with existing conditions and be aware that in some cases information is not available as to concealed conditions, which exist in portions of the existing building affected by this work. 1.4 DESCRIPTION OF BID DOCUMENTS A. Specifications: 1. Specifications, in general, describe quality and character of materials and equipment. 2. Specifications are of simplified form and include incomplete sentences. 1.5 DEFINITIONS A. "Above Grade": Not buried in the ground and not embedded in concrete slab on ground. B. "Actuating" or "Control" Devices: Automatic sensing and switching devices such as thermostats, pressure, float, electro -pneumatic switches and electrodes controlling operation of equipment. C. "Below Grade": Buried in the ground or embedded in concrete slab on ground. D. "Concealed": Embedded in masonry or other construction, installed in furred spaces, within double partitions or hung ceilings, in trenches, in crawl spaces, or in enclosures. In general, any item not visible or directly accessible. E. "Connect": Complete hook-up of item with required service. F. "Exposed": Not installed underground or "concealed." G. "Furnish": To supply equipment and products as specified. H. "Indicated," "Shown" or " "Noted": As indicated, shown or noted on Drawings or Specifications. I. "Install": To erect, mount and connect complete with related accessories. 3. "Motor Controllers": Manual or magnetic starters (with or without switches), individual push buttons or hand -off -automatic (HOA) switches controlling the operation of motors. K. "Piping": Pipe, tube, fittings, flanges, valves, controls, strainers, hangers, supports, unions, traps, drains, insulation, and related items. L. "Provide": To supply, install and connect as specified for a complete, safe and operationally ready system. M. "Reviewed," "Satisfactory" or "Directed": As reviewed, satisfactory, or directed by or to Architect/Engineer/Owner. N. "Rough -In": Provide all indicated services in the necessary arrangement suitable for making final connections to fixture or equipment. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS — FIRE PROTECTION (WITH SEISMIC) Copyright 2008 Glumac 210500 - 2 Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America 507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch O. "Shall": An exhortation or command to complete the specified task. P. "Similar" or "Equal": Of base bid manufacture, equal in materials, weight, size, design, and efficiency of specified products. Q - "Supply": To purchase, procure, acquire and deliver complete with related accessories. R. "Typical" or "Typ": Exhibiting the qualities, traits, or characteristics that identify a kind, class, number, group or category. Of or relating to a representative specimen. Application shall apply to all other similarly identified on plan or detail. S. "Will": A desire to complete the specified task. Allows some flexibility in application as opposed to "Shall." T. "Wiring": Raceway, fittings, wire, boxes and related items. U. "Work": Labor, materials, equipment, apparatus, controls, accessories, and other items required for proper and complete installation. 1.6 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All Division 21 Fire Suppression sections included herein. B. Division 02: Existing Conditions. Coordinate with Civil Engineer. 1. Coordination of excavation of trenches and the installation of piping on site. C. Division 03: Concrete. 1. All concrete work for Fire Suppression Division shall be included in Division 21 under the appropriate Sections and shall include: a. Concrete curbs and housekeeping pads for the equipment. b. Thrust blocks for piping. D. Division 07: Thermal and Moisture Protection. 1. Sealants and caulking. 2. Firestopping. E. Division 09: Finishes: 1. Division 21 installers shall perform all painting, except where specifically stated otherwise in Division 09. F. Diivision 26: Electrical is related to work of: 1. Fire protection alarms and relays. 2. Detectors and monitoring. 3. Power connections to all equipment. 4. Life safety provisions. 1.7 CODES AND STANDARDS A. The Contractor is cautioned that code requirements not explicitly detailed in these specifications or drawings, but which may be reasonably inferred or implied from the nature of the project, must be provided as part of the contract. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS — FIRE PROTECTION (WITH SEISMIC) Copyright 2008 Glumac 210500 - 3 Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America 507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch B. Perform all tests required by governing authorities and required under all Division 21 Sections. Provide written reports on all tests. C. Electrical devices and wiring shall conform to the latest standards of NEC; all devices shall be UL listed and labeled. D. All excavation work must comply with all provisions of state laws including notification to all owners of underground utilities at least 48 business day hours, but not more than 10 business days, before commencing an excavation. E. Provide in accordance with rules and regulations of the following: 1. Building Codes enforced by the Authority Having Jurisdiction in Washington: a. 2003 International Building Code (IBC) with State Amendments. b. 2003 International Fire Code (IFC) with State Amendments c. 2002 National Electrical Code (NEC) d. 2005 Washington State Energy Code, (WAC 51-11, WSEC) 2. Local, city, county and state codes and ordinances. 3. Local Bureau of Buildings. 4. Local Health Department. 5. Local and State Fire Prevention Districts. 6. Washitngton Administrative Codes. F. Provide in accordance with appropriate referenced standards of the following: 1. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association. 2. CSA - Canadian Standards Association. 3. ANSI - American National Standards Institute. 4. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers. 5. ASTM - American Society for Testing Materials. 6. AWS - American Welding Society. 7. AWWA - American Water Works Association. 8. FM - Factory Mutual. 9. MSS - Manufacturer's Standardization Society. 10. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturer's Association. 11. UL - Underwriter's Laboratories. 12. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act. 13. ETL - Electrical Testing Laboratories. 14. IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Nameplates: Nameplates on manufactured items shall be aluminum or Type 304 stainless steel sheet, not less than 20 USG (0.0375"), riveted or bolted to the manufactured item, with nameplate data engraved or punched to form a non -erasable record of equipment data. B. Current Models. All work shall be as follows: 1. Manufactured items furnished shall be the current, cataloged product of the manufacturer. 2. Replacement parts shall be readily available and stocked in the USA. C. Experience: Unless more stringent requirements are specified in other sections of Division 21, manufactured items shall have been installed and used, without modification, renovation or repair, on other projects for not less than one year prior to the date of bidding for this project. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS — FIRE PROTECTION (WITH SEISMIC) Copyright 2008 Glumac 210500 - 4 • • Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America 507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch 1.9 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Examine all existing conditions at building site. B. Review contract documents and technical specifications for extent of new work to be provided. C. Provide and pay for all permits, licenses, fees and inspections. D. Install equipment and materials to provide required access for servicing and maintenance. Coordinate the final location of concealed equipment and devices requiring access with final location of required access panels and doors. Allow ample space for removal of all parts that require replacement or servicing. This work shall include furnishing and installing all access doors required for mechanical access. E. Verify final locations for rough -ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected. Refer to Equipment Specifications in Divisions 02 through 43 for rough -in requirements. F. Coordinate equipment and materials installation with other building components. G. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. H. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for mechanical installations. I. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured -in- place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. J. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing -in the building. K. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the installation of equipment and materials. Contractor to provide for all cutting and patching required for installation of his work unless otherwise noted. L. Install fire protection services and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. M. Install equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, without interference with other installations. N. Coordinate the installation of materials and equipment above ceilings with ductwork, piping, conduits, suspension system, light fixtures, cable trays, and other installations. O. Coordinate connection of systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS — FIRE PROTECTION (WITH SEISMIC) Copyright 2008 Glumac 210500 - 5 Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America 507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch P. Coordinate with Owner in advance to schedule shutdown of existing systems to make new connections. Provide valves in new piping to allow existing system to be put back in service with minimum down time. Q. All materials (such as insulation, piping, wiring, controls, etc.) located within air plenum spaces, air shafts, and occupied spaces shall have a flame -spread index of 25 or less, and smoke - developed index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E84 (NFPA 255) Method. In addition, the products, when tested, shall not drip flame particles, and flame shall not be progressive. Provide Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., label or listing, or satisfactory certified test report from an approved testing laboratory to prove the fire hazard ratings for materials proposed for use do not exceed those specified. R. Products made of or containing lead, asbestos, mercury or other known toxic or hazardous materials are not acceptable for installation under this Division. Any such products installed as part of the work of the Division shall be removed and replaced and all costs for removal and replacement shall be borne solely by the installing Contractor. 1.10 MINOR DEVIATIONS A. The Contractor shall review the structural and architectural conditions affecting his work. It is the specific intention of this section that the contractor's scope of work shall include 1. Proper code complying support systems for all equipment whether or not scheduled or detailed on drawings or in these specifications B. The Contractor shall study the operational requirements of each system, and shall arrange his work accordingly, and shall furnish such fittings, offsets, supports, accessories, as are required for the proper and efficient installation of all systems from the physical space available for use by this section. This requirement extends to the Contractor's coordination of this section's work with the "Electrical Work." Should conflicts occur due to lack of coordination, the time delay, cost of rectification, demolition, labor and materials, shall be borne by the Contractor and shall not be at a cost to the Owner. C. Advise the Architect, in writing, in the event a conflict occurs in the location or connection of equipment. Bear all costs for relocation of equipment, resulting from failure to properly coordinate the installation or failure to advise the Architect of conflict. 1.11 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. The Contractor shall certify the following items are correct when using substituted products other than those scheduled or shown on the drawings as a basis of design: 1. The proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on drawings. 2. The Contractor shall pay for changes to building design, including engineering design, detailing, structural supports, and construction costs caused by proposed substitution. 3. The proposed substitution has no adverse effect on other trades, construction schedule, or specified warranty requirements. 4. Maintenance and service parts available locally are readily obtainable for the proposed substitute. B. The Contractor further certifies function, appearance, and quality of proposed substitution are equivalent or superior to specified item. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS — FIRE PROTECTION (WITH SEISMIC) Copyright 2008 Glumac 210500 - 6 Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America 507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch C. The Contractor agrees that the terms and conditions for the substituted product that are found in the contract documents apply to this proposed substitution. 1.12 SHOP DRAWINGS AND EQUIPMENT SUBMITTALS A. See Section 211000. 1.13 COORDINATION DOCUMENTS A. See Section 211000. 1.14 START-UP SERVICE AND BUILDING COMMISSIONING A. Prior to start-up, be assured that systems are ready, including checking the following: Proper equipment rotation, proper wiring, auxiliary connections, lubrication, venting, controls, and installed and properly set relief and safety valves. B. Provide services of factory -trained technicians for start-up of pumps, and other major pieces of equipment. Certify in writing compliance with this Paragraph, stating names of personnel involved and the date work was performed. C. Refer to other Division 21 Sections for additional requirements. 1.15 INSTRUCTION, MAINTENANCE, AND O&M MANUALS A. O&M Manuals: Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect complete set of operating instructions, maintenance instructions, part lists, and all other bulletins and brochures pertinent to the operation and maintenance for equipment furnished and installed as specified in this section, bound in a durable binder. Refer to Division 01. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for proper instruction of Owner's personnel for operation and maintenance of equipment, and apparatus installed as specified in Division 21 to be no less than 2 hours for each piece of equipment. 1.16 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and similar information needed for distinct identifications; adequately packaged and protected to prevent damage during shipment, storage, and handling. B. Store equipment and materials in an environmentally controlled area at the site, unless off-site storage is authorized in writing. Protect stored equipment and materials from damage. Piping shall be stored in bundles covered with visqueen. Piping showing signs of rust shall be removed from site and replaced. C. Coordinate deliveries of materials and equipment to minimize construction site congestion. Limit each shipment of materials and equipment to the items and quantities needed for the smooth and efficient flow of installations. 1.17 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS — FIRE PROTECTION (WITH SEISMIC) Copyright 2008 Glumac 210500 - 7 Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America 507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch A. Furnish approved operating instructions for systems and equipment indicated in the technical sections for use by operation personnel. The operating instructions shall include wiring diagrams, control diagrams, and control sequence for each principal system and equipment. Print or engrave operating instructions and frame under glass or in approved laminated plastic. Post instructions where directed. Attach or post operating instructions adjacent to each principal system and equipment including start-up, operating, shutdown, safety precautions and procedure in the event of equipment failure. Provide weather -resistant materials or weatherproof enclosures for operating instructions exposed to the weather. Operating instructions shall not fade when exposed to sunlight and shall be secured to prevent easy removal. 1.18 SAFETY AND INDEMNITY A. The Contractor shall be solely and completely responsible for conditions of the job site including safety of all persons and property during performance of the work. This requirement will apply continuously and not be limited to normal hours of work. B. No act, service, Drawing, review, or Construction Review by the Owner, Architect, the Engineers or their consultants, is intended to include the review of the adequacy of the Contractor's safety measures, in, on, or near the construction site. C. The Contractor performing work under this Division of the Specifications shall hold harmless, indemnify and defend the Owner, the Architect, the Engineers and their consultants, and each of their officers, employees and agents from any and all liability claim, losses or damage arising, or alleged to arise from bodily injury, sickness, or death of a person or persons, and for all damages arising out of injury to or destruction of property arising directly or indirectly out of, or in connection with, the performance of the work under the Division of the Specifications, and from the Contractor's negligence in the performance of the work described in the Construction Contract Documents; but not including the sole negligence of the Owner, the Architect, the Engineers, and their consultants or their officers, employees and agents. 1.19 CLEANING AND CLOSING A. All work shall be inspected, tested, and approved before being concealed or placed in operation. B. Upon completion of the work, all equipment installed as specified in this section, and all areas where work was performed, shall be cleaned to provide operating conditions satisfactory to the Architect. 1.20 WARRANTIES A. All equipment shall be provided with a minimum one-year warranty to include parts and labor. Refer to individual Equipment Specifications for extended or longer-term warranty requirements. B. Provide complete warranty information for each item, to include product or equipment, date of beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or bond; and names, addresses, telephone numbers and procedures for filing a claim and obtaining warranty services. C. Service during warranty period: Contractor shall provide maintenance as specified elsewhere during the 12 -month warranty period. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS — FIRE PROTECTION (WITH SEISMIC) Copyright 2008 Glumac 210500 - 8 Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America 507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch 1.21 GUARANTEE A. The Contractor shall guarantee and service all workmanship and materials to be as represented by him and shall repair or replace, at no additional cost to the Owner, any part thereof which may become defective within the period of one (1) year after the Date of Final Acceptance, ordinary wear and tear excepted. B. Contractor shall be responsible for and pay for any damages caused by or resulting from defects in his work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Furnish and install all new material, equipment, and apparatus hereinafter specified unless specifically noted otherwise. All material, equipment, and apparatus shall be identified by the manufacturer's name, nameplate, and pertinent data. B. All materials, equipment, and apparatus are mentioned as standards unless noted otherwise. The words "or approved equal" shall be considered to be subsequent to all manufacturers' names used herein, unless specifically noted that substitutes are not allowed. 2.2 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS A. General: Comply with applicable codes pertaining to product materials and installation of supports and anchors, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. UL and FM Compliance: Provide products, which are UL listed and FM approved. 2. ASCE 7-05: "Amercian Society of Civil Engineers." 3. 2006 International Building Code (IBC) 4. MSS Standard Compliance: Manufacturer's Standardization Society (MSS). 5. SMACNA: "Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems." 6. NFPA: Pamphlet number 13 and 14 for fire protection systems. 7. Provide copper plated or plastic coated supports and attachment for copper piping systems. Field applied coatings or tape is unacceptable. 8. Manufacturer: B -Line, Grinnell, Michigan, Tolco, Kin -Line, Simpson, or Superstrut. B. Horizontal Piping Hangers and Supports: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory -fabricated hangers and supports of one of the following MSS types listed. 1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers: MSS Type 1. 2. Adjustable Steel Swivel Band Hangers: MSS Type 10. 3. U -Bolts: MSS Type 24. 4. Pipe Slides and Slide Plates: MSS Type 35, including one of the following plate types: a. Plate: Unguided type. b. Plate: Guided type. c. Plate: Hold-down clamp type. 5. Pipe Saddle Supports: MSS Type 36, including steel pipe base support and cast iron floor flange. 6. Pipe Saddle Supports with U -Bolt: MSS Type 37, including steel pipe base support and cast iron floor flange. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS — FIRE PROTECTION (WITH SEISMIC) Copyright 2008 Glumac 210500 - 9 Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America 507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch 7. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports: MSS Type 38, including steel pipe base support and cast iron floor flange. 8. Single Pipe Roller with Malleable Sockets: MSS Type 41. 9. Adjustable Roller Hangers: MSS Type 43. 10. Pipe Roll Stands: MSS Type 44. 11. Pipe Guides: Provide factory -fabricated guides of cast semi -steel or heavy fabricated steel, consisting of a bolted two -section outer cylinder and base with a two -section guiding spider bolted tight to pipe. Size guide and spiders to clear pipe and insulation (if any), and cylinder. Provide guides of length recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel. C. Horizontal Cushioned Pipe Clamp: Where pipe hangers are called out to absorb vibration or shock install a piping clamp with thermoplastic elastomer insert. Cush -A -Clamp or equal. D. Vertical Piping Clamps: Provide factory -fabricated two -bolt vertical piping riser clamps, MSS Type 8. E. Hanger -Rod Attachments: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory -fabricated hanger -rod attachments of one of the following MSS types listed. 1. Steel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13. 2. Steel Clevises: MSS Type 14. 3. Swivel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 15. 4. Malleable Iron Eye Sockets: MSS Type 16. 5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts: MSS Type 17. F. Building Attachments: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory -fabricated building attachments of one of the following types listed. 1. Concrete Inserts: MSS Type 18 or Blue Banger Hanger by Simpson 2. Steel Brackets: One of the following for indicated loading: a. Light Duty: MSS Type 31. b. Medium Duty: MSS Type 32. c. Heavy Duty: MSS Type 33. 3. Horizontal Travelers: MSS Type 58. 4. Internally Threaded Expansion Shell Anchors: By Simpson or approved equal. 5. Concrete Screw Anchors: Titen HD by Simpson or approved equal. G. Saddles and Shields: Except as otherwise indicated, provide saddles or shields under piping hangers and supports, factory -fabricated, for all insulated piping. Size saddles and shields for exact fit to mate with pipe insulation. 1. Pipe Covering Protection Saddles: MSS Type 39; fill interior voids with segments of insulation matching adjoining insulation. 2. Insulation Protection Shields: MSS Type 40, 18" minimum, or of the length recommended by manufacturer to prevent crushing of insulation. High-density insulation insert lengths shall match or exceed shield length. 3. Thermal Hanger Shields: Constructed of 360° insert of waterproofed calcium silicate (60 psi flexural strength minimum) encased in 360° sheet metal shield. Provide assembly of same thickness as adjoining insulation. Shield length shall match or exceed length of calcium silicate insert. 4. Thermal Hanger Couplings: Constructed of high strength plastic coupling to retain tubing and join insulation at clevis hangers and strut -mounted clamps. Klo-Shure Insulation Coupling or equal. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS - FIRE PROTECTION 210500 - 10 (WITH SEISMIC) Copyright 2008 Glumac Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America 507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch H. Miscellaneous Materials: 1 Metal Framing: Provide products complying with NEMA STD ML 1. 2. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: Provide products complying with ASTM A36. 3. Cement Grout: Portland Cement (ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III) and clean uniformly graded, natural sand (ASTM C404, Size No. 2). Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts sand by volume, with minimum amount of water required for placement and hydration. 4. Heavy -Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from steel shapes selected for loads required. Weld steel in accordance with AWS standards. 5. Pipe Brackets: "HoldRite" copper plated brackets. Insulate brackets attached to metal studs with felt. 2.3 SEISMIC RESTRAINTNIBRATION ISOLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Equipment, piping, ductwork and all system appurtenances (including weight of normal operating contents) shall be adequately restrained to resist seismic forces. Restraint devices shall be designed and selected to meet seismic requirements as defined in the latest edition of the IBC, with State Amendments, and applicable local codes in accordance with Seismic Zone <D. E. F. 3, 4 r= and the applicable Importance Factors and Soil Factors. B. All anchorages and/or seismic restraints shall be designed by a registered professional Civil or Structural Engineer licensed in the state of the project. Design shall include: 1. Number, size and location of anchors for floor or roof -mounted equipment. For curb mounted equipment, provide design of attachment of both the unit to the curb and the curb to the structure. 2. Number, size and location of vibration isolators, seismic restraint devices and their anchorage for vibration -isolated and suspended equipment. 3. Number, size and location of braces and anchors for suspended piping and ductwork on shop drawings. a. The contractor must select a single seismic restraint system pre -designed to meet the requirements of the current version of the IBC «UBC», with State Amendments. b. Installations not addressed by the selected system must be designed, detailed and submitted along with the shop drawings. c. Maximum seismic loads shall be indicated on drawings at each brace location. d. Drawings shall bear the stamp and signature of the registered professional engineer licensed in the state of the project who designed the layout of the braces. 4. Manufacturers: Mason, M.W. Sausse, Kinetics or approved equal. C. Isolated Equipment: 1. Spring type isolators shall be freestanding and laterally stable and complete with 1/4" neoprene acoustical friction pads or neoprene cup between the spring and the base plate. All mountings shall have leveling bolts. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Submittals shall include spring diameters, deflections compressed spring height and solid spring height. A steel housing shall be included to resist motion due to earthquake loads. A minimum clearance of 'A" shall be maintained around restraining bolts and between the housing and the spring so as not to interfere with the spring action. The housing shall be out of contact during normal operations. Mountings used out of doors shall be hot dipped galvanized. Manufacturer: Mason Industries #SLR series or approved equal. 2. Spring isolators shall be free standing and laterally stable without any housing and complete with a molded neoprene cup or 1/4" neoprene acoustical friction pad between BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS — FIRE PROTECTION 210500 - 11 (WITH SEISMIC) Copyright 2008 Glumac Glumac April 30, 2008 Bank of America 507048GEN CD Owner Review New Southcenter Branch the base plate and the support. All mountings shall have leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the equipment. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Manufacturer: Mason Industries #SLF series or approved equal. 3. Spring hangers shall consist of rigid steel frames containing minimum 1-1/4" thick neoprene elements at the top and steel springs that are free standing and laterally stable seated in a steel washer reinforced neoprene cup at the bottom. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. The neoprene element and the cup shall have a neoprene bushing projecting through the steel box. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30 arc from side to side before contacting the rod bushing and short circuiting the spring. Manufacturer: Mason Industries #30N or approved equal. 4. All -directional seismic snubber restraints shall consist of interlocking steel members restrained by a one-piece molded bushing or bridge bearing neoprene. A minimum air gap of 1/4" shall be incorporated in the snubber design in all directions before contact is made between the rigid and resilient surfaces. Snubber end shall be removable to allow inspection of internal clearances. Manufacturer: Mason Industries #Z-1225. 5. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish integral structural steel bases designed to prevent excessive base flexure at start up, prevent misalignment of equipment and provide attachment points for seismic restraints. Bases shall be rectangular in shape and constructed of welded wide flange structural steel main members with cross bracing located at or near each restraint location. Where height saving brackets are required, they shall be employed in all mounting locations to maintain a 1" clearance below the base. Manufacturer: Mason Industries #WF. 6. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish rectangular steel concrete pouring forms for floating and inertia foundations. Bases for split case pumps shall be large enough to provide for suction and discharge elbows and shall be 6"deep for pumps thru 75 HP and 10" deep for pumps 100 HP thru 250HP. Forms shall include minimum concrete reinforcing consisting of #4 bars welded in place on 6" centers running both ways in a layer 1-1/2" above the bottom. Forms shall be furnished with steel templates to hold the anchor bolts sleeves and anchors while concrete is being poured. Height saving brackets shall be employed in all mounting locations to maintain a 1" clearance below the base. Manufacturer: Mason Industries #BMK or K. 7. Flexible spherical expansion joints shall employ peroxide cured EPDM in the covers, liners and Kevlar tire cord frictioning. Solid steel rings shall be used within the raised face rubber ends to prevent pullout. Flexible cable bead wire is not acceptable. Sizes 2" and larger shall have two spheres reinforced with a ring between spheres to maintain shape and complete with split ductile iron or steel flanges with hooked or similar interlocks. Sizes 16" to 24" may be single sphere. Sizes 3/4" to 1 1/2" may have threaded bolted flange assemblies, one sphere and cable retention. 14" and smaller connectors shall be rated at 250 psi up to 190F with a uniform drop in allowable pressure to 190 psi at 250F. 16" and larger connectors are rated 180 psi at 190F and 135 psi at 250F. Safety factors to burst and flange pullout shall be a minimum of 3/1. All joints must have permanent markings verifying a 5 minute factory test at twice the rated pressure. Concentric reducers to the above specifications may be substituted for equal ended expansion joints. Expansion joints shall be installed in piping gaps equal to the length of the expansion joints under pressure. Control rods need only be used in unanchored piping locations where the manufacturer determines the installation exceeds the pressure BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS — FIRE PROTECTION (WITH SEISMIC) Copyright 2008 Glumac 210500 - 12